Home

T-PRO 4000 User Manual v1.2 Rev 1.book

1. Main Screen View Change Service Choice Menu Enter Password Main Menu V C S System V C S Relay Identification V Relay Comm Setup V Settings factory Name Plate Data Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Metering V C S Analog V C S Analog Inputs IO IR Harmonics Trend External Inputs V C S Output Contacts V C S Logic V C S Logic Protection 1 Logic Protection 2 ProLogic Group Logics Virtual Inputs Records V C S T PRO 4000 User Manual 3 3 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 4 Table 3 2 T PRO Front Panel HMI Menu View Record List V C S Fault Record Trigger C S Event Recording C S Trend Recording C S Fault Log V C S Fault List Event Log V C S Event List Utilities V C S Setup C S Timeouts Time Settings Set Manual Time Set DST Time Maintenance C S Output Contacts Control S Virtual Inputs Control C S Setting Groups Control C S Erase C S Erase Records Erase Event Logs Network V C S Network Protocol Stats C S Active Sockets C S Routing Tables C S Ping VCS LOGOUT The display the 16 LED lights and the 6 push but
2. 1 Virtual Input 1 2 Virtual Input 2 3 Virtual Input 3 4 Virtual Input 4 5 Virtual Input 5 6 Virtual Input 6 7 Virtual Input 7 8 Virtual Input 8 9 Virtual Input 9 0 Virtual Input 10 1 Virtual Input 11 2 Virtual Input 12 3 Virtual Input 13 4 Virtual Input 14 5 Virtual Input 15 6 Virtual Input 16 7 Virtual Input 17 8 Virtual Input 18 9 Virtual Input 19 20 Virtual Input 20 21 Virtual Input 21 22 Virtual Input 22 23 Virtual Input 23 24 Virtual Input 24 25 Virtual Input 25 26 Virtual Input 26 27 Virtual Input 27 28 Virtual Input 28 29 Virtual Input 29 30 Virtual Input 30 Setting Group Names Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Setting Group Setting Group 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 3 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Setting Group Comments Default Settings Nameplate Data Transformer 3 Phase Capacity 100 0 MVA 1 0 to 2000 0 Transformer Winding 3 20r3 Tap Changer Range 0 Yo 100 to 100 Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temp 110 0 CG 70 0 to 200 0 Transformer Temp
3. Setting Tree T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Tools Window Help Identification Settings Version aor Ignore Serial Number i 3 Refer to the serial number Serial Number TPRO 4000 000000 01 on ine back afine relay Unt ID funto Nominal CT Sec Current 5 A Nominal System Frequency B Hz v Standard HO B External Inputs 14 Output Contacts Optional VO fnotinstaled Comments Comments Software Setting Setting Name Settings Name Date CreatediModified pot 0 08 28 16 14 14 Station Station Name Station Name i Station Number iii Location Location Bank Name Bank Name Setting Area Figure 6 1 Opening Screen T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 2 Offliner Features D02705R01 21 The Offliner software includes the following menu and system tool bar Help User Manual About T PRO Offliner File Edit Tools Window Help Open Cut Paste Copy Setting Show or Hide Graph Group Left Hand Side to Clipboard Tree Figure 6 2 Top Tool Bar Table 6 1 Windows Menu Windows Menu Sub Menu Comment Document Restore Restores active window to previous Menu Icon size Move Allows user to move active window Size Allows user to resize active window Minimize Makes the active window as small as poss
4. Table 2 7 Signal name connections to pins on Modem Adapter Signal Name Direction Modem Relay Pin on the Modem Adapter DCD 1 RxD 2 TxD a 3 DTR a 4 Common 5 DSR 6 RTS 3 7 CTS 8 No connection 9 Notes Relay with modem adapter is DTE modem is DCE Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 1 Introduction This section provides information on the start up sequence and ways to inter face with the T PRO Descriptions of the Front Panel Display Terminal Mode and Metering Data are provided 3 2 Start up Sequence When the power supply 1s connected the following initialization initializing sequence takes place Table 3 1 Initialization Sequence TEST MODE red LED on when power applied RELAY FUNCTIONAL green LED on within 5 seconds after power applied TEST MODE red LED off then on within 10 seconds Front Display on on within 20 seconds after power applied TEST MODE red LED off within 20 seconds after power applied When the Relay Functional LED comes on it indicates that the DSP is actively protecting the system When the test mode LED goes off the relay is capable of recording and com municating with the user 3 3 Interfacing with the Relay The following methods can be used to interface with the relay Front p
5. SAON saBeyon Ov sydu jueuno Oy eee Zee lee occ we ZE le se ce wr Eze zx EE Oe 6E 8E Le 9E SIE ple ele zie LIE Ole 6 ME oe WE SOE WE 0 ZOE loc 00 N 04 8A VA Soy 901 Sai 98i 9vi Svi 01 Pol Pai Pai wi Pv o o1 far Ear 8i Evi Zo 291 za Zar vi evi tor ton bai ar Ivi bi iE T T T T T S MAUI 15 ANWI LO e ndu 1D 3 i I 4 T 3o m I I I EU 3 E I 3 E i I i lt ot i SLO SPISAL OA I S2 9pis AH IE aaa V TBUPUMIO Y vuogeanDyuoD Au JauuojsueJ JMO ul Ud Y Y T PRO 4000 User Manual Figure 1 1 T PRO AC Schematic D02705R01 21 Appendix J DC Schematic Drawing Output Relay Contacts Inoperative C ou Out3 Ol Out Out6 Out Out8 Out9 Outl0 Out Outl2 Outt3 Outl4 202p 204 206 208 210p 212 214 216p 218p 220 2226 204 220 228 II T IT TL TL TL TL TL ITA TL xsl ad ax ad 211 ad ad ad ag zl zl ol oon zx 8 ag 5 z SUE 3 8 E m m m 120VAC Figure J 1 T PRO DC Schematic D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual In9 T In8 In7 T Extemal Inputs 90 150 VDC range Ind 100 102 104 106 108 10 112 114 116 T In6 In3 In4 In2 Isolated 30VDC supply Int 234 T Temperature Inputs 4 20 mA current loop Ambient 230 T 103 105 107 109 111 b 6 13 115 117 101 231 1 IRIG B a
6. T PRO 4000 User Manual Turns Ratio 4000 00 1 1 00 to 50000 00 External Input Selection Not Used d Used EI 1 to El Ambient Temperature Scaling Max Valid Temperature 50 0 C 40 0 to 50 0 Min Valid Temperature 50 0 C 50 0 to 40 0 Max Correlating Current Value 20 00 mA 5 00 to 20 00 Min Correlating Current Value 4 00 mA 4 00 to 19 00 Top Oil Temperature Scaling Top Oil Calculated Max Valid Temperature 200 0 C 30 0 to 200 0 Min Valid Temperature 40 0 GC 50 0 to 190 0 Max Correlating Current Value 20 00 mA 5 00 to 20 00 Min Correlating Current Value 4 00 mA 4 00 to 19 00 Record Length Fault Record Length 0 5 s 0 2 to 10 0 Prefault Time 0 20 s 0 10 to 2 00 or to Fault Record Length 0 10 whichever lesser Thermal Logging Disabled Trend Sample Rate 3 minutes sample 3 to 60 Event Auto Save Disabled Protection Summary 87 Disabled 87N HV Disabled 87N LV Disabled 87N TV Disabled 49 1 OFF 49 2 OFF 49 3 OFF 49 4 OFF 49 5 OFF 49 6 OFF 49 7 OFF 49 8 OFF 49 9 OFF 49 10 OFF 49 11 OFF 49 12 OFF TOEWS Disabled 24INV Disabled D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges 24DEF 1 Disabled 24DEF 2 Disabled 59N Disabled 27 1 Disabled 27 2 Disabled 60 Disabled 81 1 Disabled 81 2 Disabled 81 3 Disabled 81 4 Disabled 50BF 1 Disabled 50BF 2 Disabled 50BF 3 Disa
7. Group Logic 7 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 GL 8 Group Logic 8 Group Logic 8 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 9 Group Logic 9 Group Logic 9 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 05 Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt GL 10 Group Logic 10 Group Logic 10 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0
8. D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 1 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 1 Device Identification 1 1 9 Notable Additions Capabilities Start stop qualifier codes 0x00 and 0x01 limited quantity qualifier codes 0x07 and 0x08 and indi ces qualifier codes 0x17 and 0x28 for Binary In puts Binary Outputs and Analog Inputs object groups 1 10 and 30 32 bit and 16 bit Analog Inputs with and without flag variations 1 2 3 and 4 Analog Input events with time variations 3 and 4 Fault Location information as analog readings Event Log messages as Object groups 110 and 111 Current Value If configurable list methods 1 1 10 Methods to set Configurable Parameters XML Loaded via DNP3 File Transfer XML Loaded via other transport mechanism Terminal ASCII Terminal Command Line Software Vendor software named T PRO Offliner Proprietary file loaded via DNP3 file transfer Proprietary file loaded via other transport mech anism Direct Keypad on device front panel Factory Specified when device is ordered Protocol Set via DNP3 e g assign class Other explain 1 1 11 DNP3 XML files available On Line RdWrFilename Description of Contents dnpDP xml Complete Device Profile dnpDPcap xml Device Profile Capabilities dnpDPcfg xml Device Profile config values xml The Complete Device Profile Document contains the capabilities Current Value and c
9. o ES EN N a Relative rate of loss of life 64 top curve 32 16 8 4 2 1 bottom curve o do o o Allowed Loading per unit o P o N o 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Ambient Temp deg C Figure M 3 Allowed Loading 65 C Rise Transformer Type 1 Cooling Allowed Loading 65 degC rise Transformer Type 2 cooling Relative rate of loss of life 64 top curve 32 16 8 4 1 bottom curve 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 O 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Ambient Temp deg C Figure M 4 Allowed Loading 65 C Rise Transformer Type 2 Cooling T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Allowed Loading 65 degC rise Transformer Type 3 cooling Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation 2 1 8 1 6 Eid 12 2 n 8 0 8 Relative rate of loss of life 3 64 top curve 32 306 NG 8 lt o4 4 2 0 2 1 bottom curve 0 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Ambient Temp deg C Figure M 5 Allowed Loading 65
10. Appendix F 20 T PRO 4000 User Manual NOTES 3 Virtual Inputs default Binary Output points 14 43 can be used to control re lay output contacts See T PRO Offliner Setting Group X Output Matrix screen for configuration options 4 Binary Output data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Binary Output point selection can be obtained through the T PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none c i S 5 o o x 2 Name for Name for Name o amp State when State when Change Command Description z E a amp 2 value is 0 value is 1 igliz 22 5 5 2 2 2 Tile TF a 9 006 65 6 a jS E s 99228 25 8 o s gs 5 8B5 5 r 239 sS a o0 O JaA JA amp AU F O o 0 Output contact 1 Open Closed None None Output contact 2 Open Closed None None 2 Output contact 3 Open Closed None None 3 Output contact 4 Open Closed None None 4 Output contact 5 Open Closed None None 5 Output contact 6 Open Closed None None 6 Output contact 7 Open Closed None None 7 Output contact 8 Open Closed None None 8 Output contact 9 Open Closed None None 9 Output contact 10 Open Closed None None 10 Output contact 11 Open Closed None None 11 Output contact 12 Open Closed None None 12 Output contact 13 Open Closed None None 13 Output contac
11. ERL T PRO Transformer Protection Relay Model 4000 ie User Manual Version 1 2 Rev 1 Preface Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2014 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd 1s strictly forbidden This manual is part of a complete set of product documentation that includes detailed drawings and operation Users should evaluate the information in the context of the complete set of product documentation and their particular applications ERLPhase assumes no liability for any incidental indirect or consequential damages arising from the use of this documentation While all information presented is believed to be reliable and in accordance with accepted engineering practices ERLPhase makes no warranties as to the completeness of the information All trademarks used in association with B PRO B PRO Multi Busbar Multi Busbar Protection F PRO iTMU L PRO ProLogic S PRO T PRO TESLA I O Expansion Module TESLA Control Panel Relay Control Panel RecordGraph and RecordBase are trademarks of ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation HyperTerminal is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon Contact Information D02705R01 21 ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Website www
12. Enable Disable lOmin per unit 0 10 to Min IRs S1 100 1 00 S1 S2 95 IRs per unit CT Turns Ratio IOmin 100 81 to 50 00 IOmin 100 IRs to Min S2 100 Max S1 30 to 200 87 Example on Grounded Wye Delta Transformer 1 00 to 10000 00 87 Example on Auto Transformer Input 1 Input 2 Input 1 Input 2 HA a Y THY EE CH Y M Y Y Ha Hb 11c aloj 12a 12b 12c Ma Ib Hc 12a I2b 12c Input 5 E I I Input 4 Input 4 Input 3 y 13a 13b 13c HF CJ fi Ma 14b 14c 13a 13b 13c Ma 14b 14c Figure 4 7 87N Application Examples Note Only 87N HV function is available for auto transformer application D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 49 1 to 49 12 Thermal Overload Transformer d Feeders Ohs p Top oi Highest Priority i Baasa 170 I I gt 160 ZEEE 160 pim 140 110 normal T PRO calculates hot spot temperature CT Ambient Other Functions SCADA Alarm Block Tapchanger Prevent Load Restoration etc Figure 4 8 49 1 to 49 12 Thermal Overload Modules Thermal overload protection protects the transformer windings from excessive insulation damage due to heavy loading and or high temperature conditions There are 12 identical devices that use a combination of current and tempera ture monitoring to shed and to r
13. Outputs GroupLogic Virtual Utilities Unit Identification Communication Time Analog Input Calibration N A N A External Input Settings Group Save Save Password N A N A Virtual Inputs N A Latch Pulse Latch Pulse Loss of Life Save Save Through Fault Save Save Clear Trend Log Save Save Configuration Present Settings Get From Relay Saved Settings Load to Load to Relay Relay Notice that some options are not available N A depending on the access level T PRO 4000 User Manual 3 9 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 1 Protection and Recording Functions This section describes the equations and algorithms of the T PRO protection functions the recording functionality and programming of the Output Matrix All functions with time delay provide an alarm output when their pick up level is exceeded All functions use the fundamental component of the analog inputs except for THD Alarm and harmonic restraint of the 87 function 87 Differential Differential protection is the most universally applied form of transformer pro Protection tection The electrical area enclosed within the High Voltage HV Low Volt age LV and Tertiary TV side CTs define the zone of protection The element uses a percent restraint slope characteristic where the sensitivity of the element has in inverse relations
14. Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCRDR M IEC61850 IED name xit RR OOHA IF ON mo port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 8 Connected 0 00 43 vT100 TCP IP NUM Figure 5 1 T PRO 4000 System Utility T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 USB HyperTerminal ie Xx 5 Data Communications Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by Enter The fol lowing screen appears File Edit View Call Transfer Help Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA 0 Modify IEC61850 IED name 11 Exit 1 8 9 1 port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 1 Current network configuration Port 119 MAC address 002185010RCD Port 119 IP addres 192 168 100 85 Port 119 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Port 120 MAC address 002185010acc Port 120 IP addres 192 168 101 85 Port 120 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 100 1 IEC 61850 port 120 Do you want to change the IP address for port 119 N v 8 _ Connected 0 00 17 vT100 1152008 N 1 CRO CAPS Capture Print echo Figure 5 2 Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application T PRO 4000 User Manual 5 3 5 Data Communications Offliner SCADA Details on using the Offliner software are available in Offliner Settings Soft Configuration
15. Virtual Input 30 10542 0 Off inactive 1 On active D02705R01 21 Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 Channel Address Units Scale T PRO Clock Time UTC Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data Milliseconds now 40001 0 1 Millisecond information not supported Seconds Now 40002 0 59 1 Minutes Now 40003 0 59 1 Hours Now 40004 0 23 1 Day of Year Now 40005 1 365 up to 366 if leap year 1 Years since 1900 40006 90 137 1 Sync d to IRIG B 40007 0 No 1 Yes 1 Time of Acquisition UTC Read all in same query to ensure consistent time reading data Milliseconds now 40008 0 1 Millisecond information not supported Seconds Now 40009 0 59 1 Minutes Now 40010 0 59 1 Hours Now 40011 0 23 1 Day of Year Now 40012 1 365 up to 366 if leap year 1 Years since 1900 40013 90 137 1 Sync d to IRIG B 40014 0 No 1 Yes 1 Offset of UTC of IED time 40015 2 s complement half hours 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual North America is negative Appendix E 7 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 8 Read Holding Registers Function Code 03 Channel Address Units Scale Va Magnitude 40257 kV 10 Va Angle 40258 degrees 10 Vb Magnitude 40259 kV 10 Vb Angle 40260 degrees 10 V
16. An adapter is available for connecting an external modem to Port 123 for de tails see Modem Link on page 2 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual 8 1 8 Installation RJ 45 Optical ST USB RJ 11 IRIG B Wiring 8 2 There is one front 100BASE T Ethernet Port 119 with RJ 45 receptacle Use CATS or CATSe straight The rear Ethernet Ports 119 and 120 may also be configured as 100BASE T Ethernet Ports Port 119 and port 120 in the rear panel may be configured with ST style optical connectors if desired These are 1300 nm 100BASE FX optical Ethernet ports The transmit and receive connections are indicated on the rear panel Use stan dard multi mode cables with ST connectors for this interface There is a standard USB B connector on the front panel This is a USB 2 0 Full Speed interface and can be connected to a PC with a standard USB peripheral cable A style to B style The relay may have an optional internal modem Connection to this is via the relay s Port 118 RJ 11 receptacle A standard telephone extension cable is to be used The relay accepts both modulated and unmodulated IRIG B standard time sig nals with or without the IEEE 1344 extensions The IRIG B connector on the back of the relay is BNC type T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix A IED Specifications General T PRO Model 4000 Specifications Quantity Specifications Note Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Operate Time 12 2
17. IA 3 PB 3 B Ip lt laz2Ib Ic pg Ic Ip la Ib 21c jp Ib la 3 3 B IC la Ib 2Ic IC ez 1a Ic 22la t Ib Ic jc le lb 3 B 3 B The process of correcting current angles mathematically creates virtual Delta connections from the current inputs Another benefit of this process is the elim T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications ination of zero sequence current leaving only positive sequence and negative sequence currents as operating quantities We will refer to these compensated currents as Delta Compensated Currents as we progress through the example 3 Magnitude Mismatch Corrections The next step is to correct the ratio mismatch of each current input There are three ratio corrections required CT Ratio Mismatch Correction CT Connection Correction Transformer Ratio Correction The Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor is applied on each current input referenced to the first CT input on the transformer reference side as follows Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor i 3 PhysicalCTRoot3Factor i x VoltageLevel i x CTRatio i PhysicalCTRoot3 REF x Voltage REF x CTRatio REF where i current input being considered PhysicalCTRoot3Factor i 1 0 for a Y connected CT 1 43 for Delta connected CT VoltageLevel i Voltage level of the input being considered CTRatio i CT ratio of the input being considered Voltage REF
18. Primary voltage level of the reference PT side CTRatio REF CT ratio of the first current input on the ref erence PT side After the three corrections steps are complete the phase and mismatch correc tions have been performed The Delta Compensated Currents can now be summed on a single phase basis to arrive at the HV LV and TV winding cur rents that shall be used in the differential function For our example HV has A B C inputs from two CTs connected to T PRO current input sets I1 and I2 LV has A B C inputs from two CTs connected to T PRO current input sets I3 and I4 TV has A B C current from one CT connected to T PRO current input set I5 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 7 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The relay calculates the HV LV and TV Delta Compensated Currents for use in the 87 function of our example as follows IHVa IlA DA ILVa BA I4A ITVa ISA IHVb I1B DB ILVb I3B MB ITVb I5B IHVe I1C 2C ILVc BC MC ITVc ISC Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T PRO functions Overcurrent OC and Overload OL Functions 50 51 67 49 and TOEWS also may or may not use Delta Compensated Currents de pending on which of the following CT connections apply If any of the CTs associated with the particular OC or OL function are connected in Delta then the relay uses Delta Compensated Currents in the function elf all of
19. 2 5 kV Common 0 kV Diff IEC EN 61000 4 16 Mains frequency voltage Signal ports 30 V continuous 300 V for 1s ac power port 30 V continuous 300 V for 1s IEC EN 61000 4 17 Ripple on dc power supply dc power port 10 Note The T PRO 4000 is available with 5 or 1 amp current input All current specifications change accordingly 1TOEWS and Transformer asset monitoring require the optional temperature inputs D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 5 Appendix A IED Specifications A 1 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves Figure A 2 Time delay Error at 2 Seconds Figure A 3 Time Delay Error at 1 Second and Figure A 4 Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds show operating times for the T PRO frequency rate of change elements at different time delay set tings and rate of change settings The diagrams show operating times at each test point including output contact operate time Operating times are the same for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz Time Delay Error 0 2s 0 0 1 Hz s li Hz s 90 10 Hz s Delay error ms Hz s Pickup Multiple Figure A 2 Time delay Error at 2 Seconds Time Delay Error 1s 180 165 150 135 120 105 mp 0 1 Hz s 1 Hzis Is 10 Hz s Time Delay Error ms Multiple of Ha s P
20. Figure 6 16 SCADA Settings Summary This screen provides a summary of the current SCADA settings as set in the working setting file This includes SCADA Communication parameters and if the SCADA mode is set to DNP Binary Input Binary Output and Analog In put information including Deadband and Scaling factors This SCADA Summary screen is scrollable and can be printed Record Length Fault Sample Rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle Fault Record Length 05 s Prefault Time 020 s Thermal Logging Enabled Trend Sampling 3 minutes sample Event Auto Save Figure 6 17 Record Length Define the fault recording record length and the Output Matrix characteristics T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Fault record sampling rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle Record length is settable between 0 2 and 10 seconds Prefault time is settable from 0 10 to 2 00 seconds Thermal logging rate is settable between 3 and 60 minutes per sample Table 6 13 Record Length Fault Prefault time is configurable between 0 10 to 2 00 seconds Sample Rate fixed at 96 samples per cycle Fault Record Length seconds 0 2 to 10 0 Thermal Logging Settable between 3 and 60 minutes Trend Sampling minutes sample 3 to 60 Event Auto Save Enable Disable Setting Groups D02705R01 21 C Connections m FA 3 t T PRO Offliner Settings Docume
21. GL 11 Group Logic 11 Group Logic 11 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 GL 12 Group Logic 12 Group Logic 12 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 05 Operator 2 Input B lt Unused 0 gt D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 29 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 05 Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt GL 13 Group Logic 13 Group Logic 13 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 GL 14 Group Logic 14 Group Logic 14 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Opera
22. IA T PRO 4000 User Manual IB IC _ 2la Ib Ic 3 la 2Ib Ic 3 Ia Ib 2lc 3 D02705R01 21 Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Adaptive Overcurrent Relay Pickup Level Feature D02705R01 21 Insulation The loss of life calculation equation is based on IEEE Standard C57 91 1995 The per unit rate of loss of life is called the aging acceleration factor F44 giv en by 15000 15000 110 4273 0 4273 per unit Eq 2 of C57 91 1995 where 05 is the hot spot temperature in degrees celsius For example if 0 7 110 C then Fa 1 if Oy 117 C then Faa 2 The definition of normal lifetime for a transformer was 65 000 hours 7 42 years in C57 115 1991 In C57 91 1995 options were given including 65 000 hours but suggesting that 180 000 20 55 years hours was more reasonable This is really a judgment call Since the 65 000 hour 7 42 years figure appears in both versions of the Standard it was decided to use 7 42 years in the T PRO software until a more definitive statement appears The above equation is the same regardless of which end of life value is cho sen For example if Fa a is on average equal to 0 2 not unusual over a period of 20 years then the loss of life over that period would be 0 2 x 20 years 7 42 years 5496 The equation in the previous standard C57 115 1991 is written differently but is identical mathematically
23. Inverse Overcurrent Timers 2 5 or 1 cycle of selected curve T PRO Model 4000 Specifications Detailed Environmental Tests Description Test Test Level Type Test Test Points FCC Part 15 RF emissions Enclosure ports Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted emissions ac dc power ports Class A 0 15 30 MHz IEC EN 60255 25 RF emissions Enclosure ports Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted emissions ac dc power ports Class A 0 15 30 MHz IEC EN 61000 3 2 Power line harmonics ac power port Class D max 1 08 2 3 0 43 1 14 0 3 0 77 0 23 A for 2nd to nth harmonic dc power port N A IEC EN 61000 3 3 Power line fluctuations ac power port THD 3 Pst lt 1 Pit lt 0 65 dc power port N A IEC EN 61000 4 2 ESD Enclosure contact 6 kV IEC EN 60255 22 2 Enclosure air 8 kV IEEE C37 90 3 ESD Enclosure contact 8 kV Enclosure air 15 kV IEC EN 61000 4 3 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 10 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC EN 60255 22 3 IEEE C37 90 2 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 35 V m 25 1000 MHz IEC EN 61000 4 4 Burst fast transient Signal ports 4 kV 92 5 kHz IEC EN 60255 22 4 Appendix A 4 ac power port T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 kV D02705R01 21 Appendix A IED Specifications T PRO Model 4000 Specifications Detailed Environmental Tests IEEE C37 90
24. 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 00001 160 Sc 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 00001 161 PFa 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 NA 0 01 0 001 162 PFb 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 NA 0 01 0 001 163 PFc 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 NA 0 01 0 001 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 27 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile a The minimum and maximum transmitted values are the lowest and highest values that the outstation will report in DNP analog input objects These values are integers if the outstation transmits only integers If the outstation is capable of transmitting both integers and floating point then integer and floating point values are required for the minimums and maximums For example a pressure sensor is able to measure 0 to 500 kPa The outstation provides a linear conversion of the sensor s output signal to integers in the range of 0 to 25000 or floating point values of 0 to 500 000 The sensor and outstation are used in an application where the maximum possible pressure is 380 kPa For this input the minimum transmitted value would be stated as 0 0 0 and the maximum transmitted value would be stated as 19000 380 000 b The scaling information for each point specifies how data transmitted in integer variations 16 bit and 32 bit is converted to engineering units when received by the Master i e scaled according to the equation scaled value multiplier r
25. 0 1 or 0 1 10 0 4 26 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 50 51 Overcurrent D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 20 81 Frequency Setting Ranges Pickup Delay seconds 50 Hz Fixed Level 0 05 10 99 93 Pickup Delay seconds 50 Hz Rate of Change 2p 0 99 99 Pickup 14 T TMS B A 1 is Reset 15 T I TMS 1 There are non directional Phase Time Overcurrent 51 and Phase Instanta neous Overcurrent 50 elements available for each of the HV LV and TV windings and they may be used in combination as required The 50 51 provides backup to the primary 87 protection and should be coordinated with any down stream protection Depending on the associated CT connections either the Wye current or the Delta Compensated Currents could be used in the 50 51 functions When CTs on a winding are exclusively wye connected the 50 51 will use the uncompen sated currents i e zero sequence will not be eliminated However if any of the winding s CTs are connected Delta then the Delta Compensated Currents are used Delta Compensated Currents are described in the description of the 87 function on 87 Differential Protection on page 4 1 Each of the 51 functions are provided with 3 IEC inverse time curves 3 IEEE inverse time curves as well as 1 user defined custom inverse time curve Each winding s 51 operates on the per unit sum of all inpu
26. A B Cc eN AB BC CA ABC 27 1 Trip on ABC 27 2 Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC 1t Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is A eB eC N AB BC CA ABC ProLogic Name PLn ProLogic outputs names are user assigned Where n 1 to 24 External Input Name Eln High External input names are user assigned Where n 1 to 20 External Input Name Eln Low External input names are user assigned Where n 1 to 20 Output Contacts name Out n Open Output contact names are user assigned Where n 1 to 21 Output Contacts name Out n Closed Output contact names are user assigned Where n 1 to 21 Virtual Input 1 VI1 Low Virtual Input names are user assigned Where n 1 to 30 Virtual Input 1 V11 High Virtual Input names are user assigned Where n 1 to 30 Self Check DC Ch n Alarm Continuous dc level on Ch n where n 1 to 18 Self Check DC Alarm Reset Continuous dc level condition has reset Self Check DC Ch n O P Block Continuous dc level on Ch n where n 1 to 18 Through Fault Peak Value Through Fault I2t Value New Setting Loaded Logic Setting Group Change User Setting Group Change T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix D Event Messages Manual settings load request compl
27. D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 LEDGGIO7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node LEDGGIO7of the logical device System Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Data Name Description LEDGGIO7 ST Ind1 stVal Target LED 1 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind2 stVal Target LED 2 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind3 stVal Target LED 3 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind4 stVal Target LED 4 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind5 stVal Target LED 5 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind6 stVal Target LED 6 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind7 stVal Target LED 7 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind8 stVal Target LED 8 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind9 stVal Target LED 9 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind10 stVal Target LED 10 State LEDGGIO7 ST Ind11 stVal Target LED 11 state LEDGGIO7 ST Ind12 stVal Alarm LED state LEDGGIO7 ST Ind13 stVal Service Required LED state SChAImGGIO8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node SChAlmGGIO8of the logical device System Data Name Description SChAlmGGIO8 ST Ind stVal TSAImGGIO9 This section defines logical node data for the logical node TSAlmGGIO9of the logical device System Self Check Fail Alarm Data Name Description TSAIMGGIO9 ST Ind stVal Time Synchronization Alarm T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 45 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 46 SUBSCRGGIOI This section defines logical node data for the
28. Direct Serial Link Modem Link D02705R01 21 The baud rate is available on the LCD screen from the top level menu selecting System then Relay Comm Setup For a direct serial connection both the relay and the computer must be set to the same baud rate To change the baud rate of a relay serial port 1 The user needs to log into the relay as Change any port or Service USB port only using RCP 2 Then choose Utilities gt Communication tab Unlike a direct serial link the baud rates for a modem link do not have to be the same on the computer and on the relay The modems automatically nego tiate an optimal baud rate for their communication The baud rate set on the relay only affects the rate at which the relay commu nicates with the modem Similarly the baud rate set in HyperTerminal only af fects the rate at which the computer communicates with its modem Details on how to set these respective baud rates are described above except that the user modifies the Port 123 baud rate on the relay and the properties of the modem in HyperTerminal T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 17 2 Setup and Communications 2 12 Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services The relay supports DNP3 Level 2 and Modbus SCADA protocols as a stan dard feature on all ERLPhase relays DNP3 is available through a direct serial link Port 122 or the Ethernet LAN on top of either TCP or UDP protocols The Modbus implementation supports both Remote Terminal
29. Firmware Update in Chapter 2 section 2 10 3 6 Relay Control Panel D02705R01 21 RCP is used for all user interface A short description ofthe RCP configuration to connect to a relay is given here Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User Manual for details Follow this sequence to configure RCP for USB link to the relay 1 Execute Relay Control Panel exe Execute T PRO 4000 Offliner exe Install Null Modem Driver Please refer to the Relay Control Panel User Manual for details Run Relay Control Panel Go to Start gt All Programs gt ERLPhase gt Relay Control Panel gt Relay Control Panel First time RCP is run Hit Add New Add New Relay Choose Communication 5 Direct Serial Link Hit Get Information From Relay Then RCP will communicate with the TPRO 4000 and retrieve in formation to fill required fields When this is done hit Save Relay If the window Relay already exists pops up you may need to re name the relay changing the Relay Name in the Relay Definition category before saving After first time in Select Relay choose relay and hit Connect In Relay Password Prompt Choose desired access level enter appropriate password Note Default passwords are listed below remove the quotation marks View Access view Change Access change Service Access service T PRO 4000 User Manual 3 7 3 Using the IED Getting Started
30. ICD for IED Capability Description IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IED Intelligent Electronic Device IP Internet Protocol IP address IRIG B Inter range instrumentation group time codes LED Light emitting Diode LHS Left Hand Side LOCB L PRO Output Contact Board LOCBH L PRO Output Contact Board HCFI MPB Main Processor Board MPC Micro Processor T PRO 4000 User Manual Acronyms vi PLC Programmable Logic Controller RAIB Relay AC Analog Input Board RASB Relay AC Analog Sensor Boards RHS Right Hand Side ROCOD Rate of Change of Differential RPCB Rear Panel Comm Board RTOS Real Time Operating System RTU Remote Terminal Unit SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition SG Setting Group TUI Terminal User Interface UI User Interface VI Virtual Input T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Table of Contents D02705R01 21 Pre lace s maa NA naaa AA ier iT eI A iL ete i Contact Information ssssssssseH Hee i Using This Guide erento en Yel e etat erts Do d dee deve iii Table of Contents u s V Aron maan a edes e ee ree en nee bes drei KANA mang ix PC System Requirements and Software Installation xi Version Comnpatbilily 2 2 oce need tede eee aede den treo iret Meee xiii T OVErVieW eC 1 1 WMMTOGUCTION eee E A ETT 1 1 Front View tis GANANG ANAN 1 3 Back VIGeW 3 45 i ederent maana ee Mr Naga ue dox PRA IRR 1 4 Mo
31. Off inactive On active ProLogic4 823 Off inactive On active ProLogic5 824 Off inactive On active ProLogic6 825 Off inactive On active ProLogic7 826 Off inactive On active ProLogic8 827 Off inactive On active ProLogic9 828 Off inactive On active ProLogic10 829 Off inactive On active 81 1 Trip 830 Off inactive On active 81 2 Trip 831 Off inactive On active 81 3 Trip 832 Off inactive On active 81 4 Trip 833 Off inactive On active 27 1 Trip 834 Off inactive On active 27 2 Trip 835 Off inactive On active 12t Alarm 836 Off inactive On active Instantaneous Overexcitation 24DEF 2 837 Off inactive On active Trip D59 1 Trip 838 Off inactive On active D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 3 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol D59 2Trip 839 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input1Trip1 840 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input1Trip2 841 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input2Trip1 842 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input2Trip2 843 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input3Trip1 844 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input3Trip2 845 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input4Trip1 846 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input4Trip2 847 0 Off inactive 1 On a
32. The LOCBH provides the following output contacts for relaying alarms and control One normally closed relay inoperative indicator normal output contact 6 user defined normal output contacts with both normally open and nor mally closed terminals made available to the user e 4 user defined high current fast interrupting HCFTI output contacts The LOCBH interfaces to the MPB The DIGIO provides 11 digital input channels Inputs are optically isolated ex ternally wetted and factory preset to the customer s requested voltage level of 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc The DIGIO also provide 7 normally open contact outputs for relaying alarms and control This board interfaces to the MPB Each relay has 3 RASBs One RASB has 3 voltage transformer inputs and 3 current transformer inputs while the other two RASBs have 6 cur rent transformer inputs These boards provide 15 current and 3 voltage ac analog measurement inputs The RASBs interface to the RAIB The RAIB provides the analog to digital conversion ofthe 15 ac analog current inputs and the 3 ac analog voltage inputs The sample rate is fixed at 96 sam ples cycle Each channel is simultaneously sampled using 16 bit analog to dig ital converters The digitized data is sent to the MPB for processing and implementation of the protection algorithms The GFPCB provides the front panel USB and Ethernet ports the front panel status LEDs and interfaces the MPB to the FPDB The MPB controls t
33. Ty VBasePri B CT pertaFactor a CTRatio ise 502 x 1 0 x 5757 1 0044 T PRO 3 Phase 87 High Mismatch Slope Testing Three phase testing is to be performed by applying a balanced 3 phase current into one input configured for HV and a second input configured for LV The 87 High Mismatch slope characteristic is typically proven on a simulated through fault where the current is into the transformer on the source side and out of the transformer on the faulted side For the example of Figure 7 31 on page 7 43 the HV shift is 0 Let the HV be the reference where current into HV 0 We inject 3 Phase HV current at angles Ph A Z0 Ph B 120 Ph C Z120 The LV shift of Figure 7 31 on page 7 43 is 30 from the HV side For through fault simulation we shift the LV current by an additional 180 Ph A Z 09 30 180 PhA Z 150 Ph B Z 120 30 180 Ph B 4730 Ph C Z 120 30 180 Ph C Z 270 The calculations to perform the 87 High Mismatch points in Figure 7 33 on page 7 46 shall be demonstrated D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 45 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 46 Dev 87 Differential Protection Figure 7 33 High Mismatch Test Points First Test Point lOmin 0 3 per unit IR 0 15 per unit The following equations 2 and 3 are used to determine the operating currents for the 87 Mismatch slope characteristic IO 4h Q8 or for an ideal through 10 I I j 29 fault
34. o ERL Appendix G 1 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings dp 5 P P e P e 8 r MU Uw MEE T ce LES PES es w as 35 as NG ge a Lo M 1 b H a g D o pa MG g Ea a a 4 o ks 5 D eo e 2 g g x 5 8 e o e 1 H j t ol E d E H 5 5 i z Ri 7 b uk amp o o o AA Lo ha S 3 Figure G 2 Mechanical Drawing 4U Appendix G 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings D02705R01 21 amp amp E amp pag ra amp _ ae ae IS Ig LI o x amp amp amp S Prang LS pa amp sIA s IB s ele MYM 0 0 Figure H 1 Rear Panel 3U T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix H 1 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings Contacts S eO dC Is2
35. 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 1 Binary Input Packed format 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 2 0 Binary Input Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event Without time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 1 2 2 Binary Input Event With absolute 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 1 I resp 2 3 Binary Input Event With relative 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 430 unsel resp 10 0 Binary Output Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 10 2 Binary Output Output Status with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1d 12 1 Binary Command Control relay 3 select 17 28 index 129 response Echo of request output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack Appendix F 30
36. 16 Virtual Input 8 1 Inactive Active 17 Virtual Input 9 1 Inactive Active 18 Virtual Input 10 1 Inactive Active 19 Virtual Input 11 1 Inactive Active 20 Virtual Input 12 1 Inactive Active 21 Virtual Input 13 1 Inactive Active 22 Virtual Input 14 1 Inactive Active 23 Virtual Input 15 1 Inactive Active 24 Virtual Input 16 1 Inactive Active 25 Virtual Input 17 1 Inactive Active 26 Virtual Input 18 1 Inactive Active 27 Virtual Input 19 1 Inactive Active 28 Virtual Input 20 1 Inactive Active 29 Virtual Input 21 1 Inactive Active 30 Virtual Input 22 1 Inactive Active 31 Virtual Input 23 1 Inactive Active D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 13 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 32 Virtual Input 24 Inactive Active 33 Virtual Input 25 Inactive Active 34 Virtual Input 26 Inactive Active 35 Virtual Input 27 Inactive Active 36 Virtual Input 28 Inactive Active 37 Virtual Input 29 Inactive Active 38 Virtual Input 30 Inactive Active 39 87 Trip Inactive Active 40 87 Restrain Inactive Active 41 87 Unrestrained Inactive Active 42 51 HV Trip Inactive Active 43 51 HV Alarm Inactive Active 44 50 HV Trip Inactive Active 45 51 LV Trip Inactive Active 46 51 LV Alarm Inactive Active 47 50 LV Trip Inactive Active 48 51 TV Trip Inactive Active 49 51 TV Alarm Inactive Active 50 50 TV Trip Inactive Ac
37. 3KB E v3 sample tps 20 04 2011 9 54 PM T PRO Settings D 7KB JE v4 sampletps 20 04 2011 9 53PM T PRO Settings D 8 KB E v5 sample tps 20 04 20119 53 PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB E v6 sample tps 20 04 2011 9 53 PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB E v7 sample tps 20 04 2011 9 53 PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB Evs sample tps 20 04 2011 9 53PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB Ev sample tps 20 04 20119 53 PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB Evo sample tps 21 11 2011 3 31 PM T PRO Settings D 9 KB Flename Documents 00 Save Saveastype TPROSetings FlesCips II J 0999 Figure 6 3 Converting Setting Files T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 7 6 Offliner Settings Software Sending a New Setting File to the Relay Creating a Setting File from an Older Version 6 8 1 Make sure the settings version and the serial number of the relay in the set ting file match The relay will reject the setting file if either the serial number or the settings version do not match A serial number discrepancy message may appear if the serial number of setting file does not match the serial number stored in the relay This is to ensure the relay receives the intended settings If this occurs confirm the relay serial number that you can view in Relay Control Panel matches the serial number in the Offliner Identification Serial No box Alternately you may check the Ignore Serial Number check box to bypass serial number supervision 2 Check the s
38. BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 50N LV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG BCG CAG ABCG 51N TV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix D Event Messages 50N TV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 67 Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A eB eC eN AB BC CA ABC 67N Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 24INV Trip 24DEF 1 Trip 24DEF 2 Trip 59N Trip 60 Alarm 51 HV Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is A eB eC eN AB BC CA ABC 51 LV Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is A eB eC eN AB BC CA ABC D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D 3 Appendix D Event Messages 51 TV Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is A B Cc eN AB BC CA ABC 51N HV Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 51N LV Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 51N TV Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information
39. C57 91 1995 is under review as of November 2001 A new version may be is sued in the year 2002 There are two basic ideas here based on ANSI IEEE Standards C57 92 1981 and C57 115 1991 for Mineral Oil Immersed Power Transformers 1 When the ambient temperature is low a transformer can carry more load when high less load 2 Itis OK to exceed the transformer rated hot spot winding temperature for a limited time The T PRO Relay implements these ideas as follows When Ambient Temperature Adaptation is selected the pickup level of the overcurrent protection follows the Allowed Loading curves below which are calculated in accordance with the Standards An ambient temperature probe feeds information into the back ofthe relay Five different cooling types are ac commodated in accordance with the Standard T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix M 1 Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation Example 1 Suppose the transformer is 65 C rise cooling is type 5 Forced Air Cooled ONAN ONAF ONAF and a relative rate of loss of life of 1 has been se lected Then the overload characteristic pickup will automatically be one per unit when the Ambient Temperature is 30 C because that is the design condi tion for the transformer As the ambient temperature deviates from 30 C the relay pickup will track the lower curve in the diagram so that for example at 30 C the overcurrent relay pickup is automatically changed to 1 4 pe
40. Ch8 B3 Ch9 Ic3 Ch 10 As Ch 11 IB4 Ch 12 Ic4 Ch 13 Ias A Uncalibrated reading was 0 00 must be within the range 4 00 to 6 00 Ch 14 IBS Ch 16 VA Ch17 VB Ch 18 vc Ch 19 Ambient Ch 20 Top Oil 4 4 gt XV Un ldenticaton _Communicaton A Time A Analog Input Calibration Exiemal Inout A Vruslinpus AA Toggle Oupus AA Sesngs Group A Passwords Close Main Menu Config Mar Metering Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current Relay TPRO TPRO Connected Figure 7 2 Calibration error out of range Only the magnitude gain and offset are calibrated not the angle When an analog input channel is calibrated you can verify the quantity mea sured by selecting the Metering menu and the Analog Quantity submenu T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 3 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 2 Testing the External Inputs 7 4 External Inputs are Polarity Sensitive To test the external inputs login to the T PRO using Relay Control Panel at any access level and select the Metering External Inputs tab which displays the status of all External Inputs either High or Low Placing 125 Vdc across each external input in turn will cause the input to change status from Low to High The external inputs metering screen in Relay Control Panel has approx imately 0 5 second update rate T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 3 Testing the Output Re
41. Correction Table these Operating Appendix L Phase s i 30 30 CPC1 CZ0 amp BZ180 ii 60 60 CPC2 BZ180 iii 90 90 CPC3 AZ0 8 BZ180 iv 120 120 CPC4 AZ0 v 150 150 CPC5 AZ0 amp CZ180 vi 180 180 CPC6 CZ180 vii 210 210 CPC7 BZ0 amp CZ180 viii 240 240 CPC8 BZ0 ix 270 270 CPC9 B0 amp AZ180 x 300 300 CPC10 AZ180 xi 330 330 CPC11 CZ0 amp AZ180 xii 0 360 CPC12 CZ0 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Step 4 Determine the additional Magnitude Correction Factor Using the 2 operating phase method you only need to remember two single phase Magnitude Correction Factors 1 0 and V3 The values in the Table 7 5 on page 7 63 can be proven by manually calculating the phase shift resultants using the Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L Multiply the 3 phase current values determined in your 3 phase test calcula tions by the correction factor in the right column of the Table 7 5 on page 7 63 Table 7 5 relates the Net Transformer Shift angle to the applicable Magnitude Correction Factor Table 7 5 Single Phase Correction Factor Table Transformer Net Phase Shift Additional Magnitude degrees Correction Factor Multiplier 309 N3 60 1 0 90 N3 120 1 0 150 N3 180 1 0 210 N3 240 1 0 270
42. High 4 Slowly ramp down Source 2 At Source 2 0 19 to 0 21 A expect 0 20 A 87 Trip High 87 Restraint Low 5 End of 2nd harmonic restraint test 7 38 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 87 High Current settings Setting Test e High Current Setting 5 0 per unit IO pu IOH High Setting IOmin IR pu IRmin IRs Figure 7 28 IOH High Current Setting 87 High Current Test Procedure This test proves that when the High Current Setting is exceeded the 87 will op erate and 2nd Harmonic has no restraint affect 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor for pickup 87 Restraint 87 Unrestrained Zone 3 Apply parallel currents to Terminals 300 302 as follows Jumper 301 303 Source 1 Fundamental 60 Hz 4 0 A Z0 Terminals 300 302 Source 2 2 4 Harmonic 120 Hz 4 0 A Z0 also Terminals 300 302 4 Ramp Source 1 fundamental up At 4 90 to 5 10 A expect 5 0 A 87 Restraint High 87 Unrestrained Zone High 5 Remove test currents 6 End of 87 High Current Test D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 39 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide THD Alarm Test 7 40 50 I1A THD 50 11B THD 50 11C THD 50 I2A THD 50 I2A THD 50 I2A THD 50 I3A THD 50 I3A THD 50 I3A THD 50 I4A THD 50 I4A THD 50 I4A THD 50 I5A THD 50 I5A THD 50 ISA THD Set
43. Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 87 Trip 3 Connect current source to T PRO terminals 300 301 Slowly ramp the current up T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide At 0 44 to 0 46 A expect 0 45 A 87 Trip High 4 Turn current off 87 Trip Low 5 End of HV 87 IO min Single Phase Test Testing 87 LV Minimum Operate Single Phase To test single phase perform the same process as on the HV side again use Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L The HV Side in the our test settings has HV net Shift of 0 HVNet Shift HV Winding Shift 0 HV CT Shift 0 0 0 0 The LV Side in our test settings has LV net Shift of 30 LV Net Shift LV Winding Shift 30 LV CT Angle 0 30 0 30 The 30 angle must be corrected to be 0 therefore find the 30 compensa tion in CPC There is an equation for each of A B and C phases If you inject 1 0 A on Phase A only on the LV side the following equations show how much current the relay will see on all 3 phases If you inject 1 0 A in LV side Phase A only la 1b 0 0 1 16 IA 0 5774 PE 18 B Ib Ic 0 0 0 17 IB tas 0A 3 B iB Ic lc la OA 1 18 4 B Wa 0 577A Note that the strongest phases are IA and IC so they will operate first IB in this case sees no current and
44. Phone and Modem Options Hit Cancel Hyperterminal will show initially Connection Description Enter a name for the relay e g TPRO4000 Hit OK In the window Connect To Connect using Choose COM where was obtained previously in Section 2 5 USB Link after installing the USB driver Let s assume in this case it is COM3 In the window COM3 Properties choose 115200 ago None PE Hardware Hit Apply then hit OK At this time the connection should already be established Hit Enter in the terminal window To initiate a connection with the relay use HyperTerminal s Cal 5 Connect function 2 14 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications When the connection is established press Enter in the terminal window At the login prompt enter maintenance in lower case which will bring up the menu shown in Figure 2 13 Maintenance Menu on page 2 15 TPRO 4000 HyperTerminal File Edit View Cal Transfer Help Dg 56 08 gf T PRO 4000 System Utilities ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com 1 Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable 2 View system diagnostics 3 Retrieve system diagnostics 4 Restore ALL default settings including calibration 9 Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings 6 Restore only default sy
45. Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF OFF Hot Spot Top Oil Pickup 120 0 c 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 7 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF on Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 c 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 8 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF E Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 9 Thermal Overload
46. Port 119 or 120 Computer with TCP IP T PRO Port 119 RJ 45 Network Figure 2 6 Network Link DNP3 SCADA services can also be accessed over the LAN for details see Ta ble 2 4 Communication Port Details on page 2 20 Connect to the Ethernet LAN using a CAT 5 cable with an RJ 45 connector or 100BASE FX 1300 nm multimode optical fiber with an ST style connector By default the Port 119 1s assigned with an IP address of 192 168 100 80 Port 120 is assigned with an IP address of 192 168 101 80 If this address is not suit able it may be modified using the relay s Maintenance Menu For details see Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance Menu on page 2 13 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 7 2 Setup and Communications 2 7 Direct Serial Link 2 8 To create a serial link between the relay and the computer connect the com puter s serial port and Port 123 on the relay s rear panel provided the port is not configured for modem use When connected run Relay Control Panel to establish the communication link Computer Direct Serial esses to T PRO Port 123 RS 232 Figure 2 7 Direct Serial Link The serial ports are configured as EIR RS 232 Data Communications Equip ment DCE devices with female DB9 connectors This allows them to be con nected directly to a computer serial port with standard straight through male to female serial cable For pin out details see Table 2 4 Communication Port Details on page 2 2
47. SCADA Communication rt 20000 rt 20000 rt 20000 The relay has configurable SCADA communication parameters for both Serial and Ethernet TCP and UDP For DNP3 Level 2 TCP up to 3 independent Masters are supported D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 23 6 Offliner Settings Software DNP DNP Configuration Class Data Configuration T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 T D as m se a Identification C Relay Analog Inputs Point Change Event Class Deadband Reported External Inputs Group Index none 1 2 2 Deadband Units Units Output Contacts z 506F Initiated H x Virtual Inputs a 506F initisted LY X O O Setting Groups R SOBF Initiated L V x Nameplate Data 3 IRIG B Signal Loss C Connections C Winding CT PT Analog Inputs Temperature Scaling Ig Main Ya Magnitude C SCADA Communication Ig Main va Angle i _ DNP Configuration E F Main Vb Magnitude T Point Map 1 Main Vb Angle H Class Data Main Vc Magnitude SCADA Setting Summary Main vc Angle if Record Length Positive Sequence Voltage 0 Setting Group 1 Setting Positive Sequence Current E Protection Functions Instantaneous Watts 187 Instantaneous VARs IN 87N Na Magnitude 49 Ma Angle O Toews Mb Magnitude 124 Mb Angle 59N Hc Magnitude 27 He Angle 60 I2a Magnitude 81 I2a Angle 50BF 12b Magnitude O 50 51 12b Angle O 50N 51N I2c Magnitude 59 12c Angle 67 I3a Magnitude THD Alar
48. The RCP displays the following metering parameters HV LV amp TV Residual current magnitude and angle 310 derived values REF 87N Operating amp Restraining current for all the windings HV REF Operating Current LV REF Operating Current TV REF Operating Cur rent HV REF Restraint Current LV REF Restraint Current TV REF Re straint Current 3 phase apparent power MVA 3ph Power factor pf 3ph All sequence voltages All sequence currents in all the windings Single phase real power reactive power apparent power Power factor 2nd amp 5th harmonic current value for all the current inputs Directional status of 51 67 51N 67N amp 46 51 67 The metering display in RCP has a resolution of three decimals for both mea sured and calculated analog values The basic structure of the Relay Control Panel information including basic ac tions available is given below 3 8 Table 3 6 Relay Control Panel Structure View Change Service Relay Control Panel Records Trigger Fault Trigger Fault Trigger Swing Trigger Swing Trigger Event Trigger Event Faults Clear Faults Clear Faults Events Erase Erase Metering Analog IO IR Harmonics Trend D49 External T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 3 Using the IED Getting Started Logic 1 Table 3 6 Relay Control Panel Structure Logic 2 ProLogic
49. expect 0 67 Alarm Low Return current angles to 90 150 30 Ramp current angle in negative direction from 90 At 179 to 181 expect 180 67 Alarm Low 10 Turn currents OFF Keep voltage On for the timing test 67 Alarm Low NO 00 67 Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 67 Trip Contact Output Contact 5 in the settings 2 Set timer start from 3 phase currents at default angles 0 A to 3 60 A transi tion 3x pickup Time Delay 8 TMS 0 0228 go ES F 8 0 0228 4 ass 3 89 5 anus 1 Bi M 3 End of 67 test 7 18 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 67N Directional Earth Fault Test D02705R01 21 Alpha Line Angle Alpha Beta Alpha Line Angle Alpha Beta 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Settings 67N Pickup 1 2 A LI Alpha 180 This is the positive sequence current angle start point with respect to positive sequence voltage angle Beta 180 This is the operating Window In this case the 67 element should operate between Alpha to Alpha Beta 180 to 180 180 180 to 360 Time Curve IEEE Moderately Inverse A 0 0103 B 0 0228 p 0 02 TMS 8 0 As shown in for details see Figure 7 12 Logic Directional Overcurrent 67 on page 7 17 map elements to outputs in the Output Matrix LI 67N Pickup mapped to Out 4 67N Trip mapped to Out 5 PT LV Side ILV 310 A PT HV
50. hrs East of Greenwich ve numbered hrs Daylight Savings Time March 2nd Sunday 2 00 AM November 1st Sunday 2 00 AM L Uni Identification Communication A Time External Input A Settings Group A Virtual Inputs Loss of Life A_Through Fault A Clear Trend Log Close Main Menu Metering Utilities Relay Control Panel v0 7 post 1 2 2 2 Current Relay TPRO TPRO4000 Figure 2 2 Relay Control Panel Date Time Settings T PRO 4000 User Manual Connected D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications 2 4 Communicating with the T PRO Relay Connect to the relay to access its user interface and SCADA services by Front USB 2 0 Service port Port 150 front Ethernet and 1 rear copper or optical Ethernet network links Port 119 Additional optical Ethernet port Port 120 Direct user interface and SCADA serial links Ports 122 and 123 nternal Modem RJ 11 Port 118 RIG B Time Synchronization Port 121 FX Figure 2 3 T PRO Rear Ports Aside from Maintenance and Update functions which will use a VT100 e g Hyperterminal connection all other functions access the T PRO user interfac es through ERLPhase Relay Control Panel software D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 3 2 Setup and Communications 2 5 USB Link 2 4 The PC must be appropriately configured for USB Serial communi cation USB Direct Connect to Por
51. mg E lI j 30 For the HV IO test no LVcurrent is injected so Ij y 0 The IO in setting 0 3 per unit Using Equation 28 on page 7 46 0 3 pu Ipy ly 0 3 pu Ipy 0 Igy 0 3 pu Ty Sec Amps 0 3 pu x Igy Base Sec 0 3 x 1 004 A 0 301 A For LV IO test no HV current is injected so Iyy 0 IO min Setting 0 3 per unit Using Equation 28 on page 7 46 0 3 pu Iy Igy T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 0 3 pu hy 0 Ty 0 3 pu It v sec Amps 20 3 Pu X ILy pase seo 0 3 x 1 004 A 0 301 A Figure 7 34 on page 7 47 shows the summary ofthe IO min calculation for each side of the transformer High Side 230 kV Low Side 115 kV Inject HV Current Only I I I I i Inject LV Current Only 0 3 per unit x 1 004 i I I I i I 0 3 per unit x 1 004 Minimum Pickup 0 301 Amps Minimum Pickup 0 301 Amps i OR Eo ro Ea EO i I Ea X ee Figure 7 34 Summary of Minimum Operating Current of the Differential Element lOmin Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic Logic Protections 2 Monitor for pickup 87 High Mismatch 87 Trip 2 HV lOmin Test Connect balanced 3 phase current to terminals A 300 301 B 302 303 C 304 305 Slowly ramp the current up from zero until 87 High
52. should be selected for LV winding and I5C 328 329 for TV winding inputs 87N IOmin Neutral Test Procedure 1 Connect current source to T PRO Terminals 324 325 ISA HV 2 Slowly ramp current up At 0 74 to 0 77 A expect 0 753 A 87N HV Trip High 3 Turn current off 4 End of 87N test 7 42 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 5 T PRO Differential Slope Test Example 100MVA 1250 5 230kV 115kv 2500 5 eo Delta 30 Wye 0 Input 1 Figure 7 31 T PRO Differential Slope Test Example Testing T PRO Transformer Relay 87 Relay Differential Element Settings for the 87 differential element e TO nin 0 3 per unit e IRS 5 0 per unit SI 20 e 2 4096 Calculations to be performed prior to T PRO testing Establish base load current for transformer reference side i e side where the VT is located For this example the VT is located on the 230 kV HV side winding KVA 22 AB x kV TpasePri i i 23 lvBaseSec lvBasepri X CT peltaFactor CTRatio Equation Notes e 9 H L or T depending on the winding on which the base is being calculated Delta factor 1 0 for wye connected CTs N3 for delta connected CTs We start with determining the base quantities which will give us the 3 phase secondary currents at transformer nominal load Figure 7 32 on page 7 44 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 43 7 Accept
53. the variation of the response object repre sents the length of the string The string represents the ASCII values of the event text T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 29 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Implementation Table The following implementation table identifies which object groups and varia tions function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and re sponses The Request columns identify all requests that may be sent by a Master or all requests that must be parsed by an Outstation The Response col umns identify all responses that must be parsed by a Master or all responses that may be sent by an Outstation NOTE The implementation table must list all functionality required by the device wheth er Master or Outstation as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Pro cedures Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by highlighted rows Any Object Groups not provided by an outstation or not processed by a Master are indicated by strikethrough note these Object Groups will still be parsed DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var PAGE Function Codes KA Function Codes P Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response
54. we found that when we put 1 0 A into CPC1 formulas for LV in Step 3 we got only 0 577 A out i e 1 V3 Therefore we need to correct the current by N3 on the LV side to get back to the 1 0 A that we injected That is the single phase magnitude correction factor for CPC1 is N3 so we multiply by 3 as stated in Single Phase Correction Factor Table on page 7 63 for a 30 connection In Step 1 we noted our calculated 3 Phase operating currents for IR min The HV 3 Phase Test Current for IR 1 69 A The LV 3 Phase Test Current for IR min 1 39 A For Single Phase testing we will apply the magnitude correction factors from Single Phase Correction Factor Table on page 7 63 Our HV Single Phase Current 3 Phase Ijy Single Phase MCF 1 69 1 0 1 69 A Our LV Single Phase Current 3 Phase Ij y Single Phase MCF 1 39 A 3 241A From our calculations the T PRO differential should operate if we inject 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Input 1 1 694 Z0 into A B and Input 2 2 41AZ180 into B We should get target 87 AB Simplified Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions In order to simplify the single phase testing we provide the following test con nections which will always produce A B operating currents in the T PRO You may use these diagrams instead of always performing single phase testing Steps 3 and 4 You will still need to perform Step 1 to obtain your 3 phase test currents and Step 2 to
55. we will call fi The current reference direction is always into the transformer on the side where the PT is connected The settings Alpha and Beta define the operating range of the 67 element and both represent the osangie relative to the V sangle reference For setting con sider Vposangle to be a fixed reference at 0 The current operating range starts at the Alpha angle and ends at the Alpha Beta angle For Directional Power Domain Considerations The MW and MVAr operating range can be directly derived from angles cov ered by the Alpha to Alpha Beta settings range For the operating character istic see example in Figure 4 15A and note the power quadrants defining MW and XMV Ar 4 32 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications For Impedance Domain Considerations Although the Alpha and Beta settings are always set in the power domain they can be set to cover an angle range in a desired impedance domain In this case it s important to recognize that the impedance plane is the complex conjugate of the power domain since the Positive Sequence Impedance Angle Zp ocangle Vbosangle Iposangle For an example see Figure 4 16B Same settings as Fig ure 4 16A but phasors represented in the Impedance domain on page 4 34 and note the impedance quadrants defining R and X In terms of an impedance angle the 67 Operating Range in degrees can be defined a
56. 0 67ampZ 180 je a taie 0amp Camp 2 0enp Big 0 33amp 0 337180 We now have proof that for a 0 connection if we inject Phase B only at 1 amp Z0 we will get operating current in phase B phase only Since we know that we need B to be at 180 for A B we simply reverse the test set current to in ject into the non polarity of B Phase input We have established how to get individual Operating phases A and B on our HV Input 1 However we need to get two Operating phases A B at once from a single source so we will put our findings together into CPC12 again and en sure that we get only HV A B Operating currents Simultaneously insert 1 0 A into Ia and 1 0 A into Ib _ 2la Ib Ic a UMEN MPO 0 67amp 36 IA 3 0 67ampZ 0 IB citi senpi 3tempy emp lamp 0 33amp 37 0 33ampZ 180 IC Camp Camp em lap 0 33amp 38 0 332180 HV Operating phases are A B We can now determine our test connections for Input 2 7 66 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Determine Input 2 Injection Find required inject to obtain A B on the LV 30 side In NAT Column 5 we find LV Input2 net shift is 30 Lookup 30 in the left column of SPST which we find in row i We are seeking which one or two SPS Tables we will need to utilize to get only Operating phases A and B in row 66599 1 We find that Phases A and B appear
57. 01 18 12b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 19 12b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 20 2c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 21 2c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 22 3a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 23 13a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 24 I3b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 25 I3b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 26 3c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 27 13c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 28 4a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 29 14a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 30 14b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 31 4b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 32 4c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 Appendix F 24 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Transmitted Value Scaling 3 avant o Multipli Resolution Name SE nts o Minimum Maximum detau rangei Offset Units default Des
58. 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 54 TV IB Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 55 TVIB Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 56 TV IC Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 57 TVIC Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 58 a Operating 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 59 b Operating 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 60 c Operating 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 61 a Restraint 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 62 b Restraint 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 63 c Restraint 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 64 Frequency 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 001 1 0 0 0 Hz 0 01 0 001 65 DC1 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 00001 1 0 0 0 mA 0 01 0 00001 66 DC2 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 00001 1 0 0 0 mA 0 01 0 00001 67 49HV Current 2 0 200 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 p u 0 01 0 01 68 49 LV Current 2 0 200 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 p u 0 01 0 01 69 49 TV Current 2 0 200 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 p u 0 01 0 01 70 Ambient Temperature 2 500 400 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 C 0 1 0 1 71 Top Oil Temperature 2 300 2000 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 C 0 1 0 1 72 Hot Spot Temperature 2 300 2500 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 C 0 1 0 1 73 Loss of Life 2 0 10000 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 0 01 0 01 74 51 Pickup Level 2 0 250 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0
59. 1 0 A Z0 Ph B 302 303 1 0 A Z 120 Ph C 304 305 1 0 A 7 120 Observe 49 1 Trip Low 7 24 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 49 TOEWS Test D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 4 Ramp current up At 1 15 to 1 25 A expect 1 20 A 49 1 Trip asserts 5 Decrease Top Oil Temperature to 16 mA 49 Trip De asserts 6 Ramp Top Oil Temperature input up to 17 0 to 17 6 mA 49 Trip Asserts 7 Remove mA from Top Oil Temperature input Currents from HV input 8 End of 49 test The Transformer Overload Early Warning System warns and trips for condi tions of either excessive hot spot temperature or excessive loss of life during any single overloading occurrence Settings Transformer MVA 100 Transformer Cooling Method Self cooled Transformer Temperature Rise 65 C Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temperature 110 C THS Trip Setting 150 C THS to start LOL Calculation 150 C LOL Trip Setting 1 day Top Oil Calculated As shown in Figure 7 17 on page 7 25 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix TOEWS Trip mapped to Out 11 IHVA Select IHV Max pu IHVB Maximum IHVC Phase Current I 15 min alarm TOEWS I 30 min alarm m TOEWS Trip Ta Trend Hot Spot or LOL Ouantities Ou Ttop Calculationt T Hot Spot Figure 7 17 Logic Transformer Overload Early Warning System 49TO
60. 1 e instanta neous to 99 99 seconds Gate Switch Setting Figure 4 11 59 Overvoltage Table 4 16 59 Overvoltage Setting Functions Pickup volts Minimum level that operates device 59 Pickup Delay seconds Operating time of the 59 Gate Switch Allows either single phase or three phase operation Table 4 17 59 Overvoltage Setting Ranges 59 1 59 2 Enable disable Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup volts 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay sec 0 00 to 99 99 onds T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 60 AC Loss of Potential 81 Over Under Frequency D02705R01 21 59 VA fixed 0 5 pu 59 VB fixed 0 5 pu 206 59 VB fixed 0 5 pu 4 Protection Functions and Specifications mp 10s Loss of Potential O Figure 4 12 AC Loss of Potential Logic AC Loss of Potential issues an alarm if it detects the loss of one or two phases of the PT voltage source If the 60 is mapped to an output an alarm or annun ciation can be obtained The delay is fixed at 10 seconds Table 4 18 60 Loss of Potential Setting Ranges 60 Loss of Potential Enable disable Pickup Time Delay 10 seconds fixed The T PRO has four frequency devices available Each frequency element can be set to operate in the following modes Fixed level of under frequency Fixed level of over frequency Specified rate of change level of frequency df dt The df dt function ca
61. 10 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 24 Virtual Input 11 Y Y Y NY Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 25 Virtual Input 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 26 Virtual Input 13 Y Y Y NG Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 27 Virtual Input 14 Y Y Y Y M Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 28 Virtual Input 15 Y Y Y L Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 29 Virtual Input 16 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 30 Virtual Input 17 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 31 Virtual Input 18 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 32 Virtual Input 19 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 33 Virtual Input 20 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 34 Virtual Input 21 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 35 Virtual Input 22 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 36 Virtual Input 23 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 37 Virtual Input 24 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 38 Vi
62. 180 Net Winding IB Ia Ib Connection LN p Ree IB la 2Ib Ic NG Y E 3 SHIFT 150 74802 reum Nu Moe o latlb 2ke IC 3 JB CPC7 for 210 or 150 Net Winding Connection CPC8 for 240 or 120 Net Winding Connection 210 or 150 Shift Y Ib Ia 240 or 120 Shift i ps Ia 21b Ic 3 180 Net Winding 43 240 Net Winding Connection IB Ic Ib Connection IB la 2Ic HNPER LLLA 3 2 a Ib Ic Ic Ee 0 Reference Hee 3 SHIFT 150 J3 SHIFT 240 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix L 1 Appendix L Current Phase Correction Table CPC9 for 270 or 90 Net Winding Connection CPC10 for 300 or 60 Net Winding Connection 270 or 90 Shift 270 Net Winding Connection 0 Reference eee gt SHIFT 270 IA IB IC Ib Ic gt lt a 300 or 60 Shift 300 Net Winding Connection 0 Reference dis gt SHIFT 300 IA IB IC _ la Ib 2Ic 3 _ 2la Ib Ic 3 la 21b Ic 3 CPC11 for 330 or 30 Net Winding Connection CPC12 for 0 or 360 Net Win ding Connection 330 or 30 Shift 330 Net Winding Connection 0 Reference vat IIIIT a Na m Appendix L 2 IA IB IC 0 or 360 Shift aa Reference a 40 Net Winding Connection SHIFT 360
63. 3 Trip frequency Protection D81PTOF1 Overfrequency D81 O F 1 81 O F 1 Trip Protection D81PTOF2 Overfrequency D81 O F 2 81 O F 2 Trip Protection D81PTOF3 Overfrequency D81 O F 3 81 O F 3 Trip Protection D81PTOF4 Overfrequency D81 O F 4 81 O F 4 Trip Protection D81PTUF1 Underfrequency D81 U F 1 81 U F 1 Trip Protection D81PTUF2 Underfrequency D81 U F 2 81 U F 2 Trip Protection D81PTUF3 Underfrequency D81 U F 3 81 U F 3 Trip Protection D81PTUF4 Underfrequency D81 U F 4 81 U F 4 Trip Protection D87TPDIF1 Differential D87T 87 Trip Protection D87NHVPDIF2 Differential D87N HV 87N HV Trip Protection D87NLVPDIF3 Differential D87N LV 87N LV Trip Protection D87NTVPDIF4 Differential D87N TV 87N TV Trip Protection PTFuseGGIO1 Generic process I O PT Fuse Failure operation System EIGGIO1 Generic process O External Inputs 1 to 20 System OCGGIO2 Generic process I O Output Contacts 1 to 21 System PLGGIO3 Generic process I O ProLogic functions 1 to 24 System XFMRGGIO4 Generic process O TOEWS Alarms and Trip THD Alarm Ambient Top Oil Alarms Through Fault Alarm System SGGGIO5 Generic process I O Active setting group System VIGGIO6 Generic process I O Virtual Inputs 1 to 30 System LEDGGIO7 Generic process I O Target LED 1 to 11 Alarm LED Service required LED System SChAlmGGIO8 Generic process I O Self Check Fail Alarm System TSAlmGGIO9 Generic process I O Time Synchronization Alarm Virtuallnputs SUBSCRGGIO 1 Generic process I O External GOOSE Virtual Inp
64. 30 00 to 200 00 Neutral CT Turns Ratio 200 00 i 1 00 to 50000 00 49 1 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF ent Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Appendix B 8 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 2 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF eu Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 3 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch
65. 50 0 10 to 100 00 27 Undervoltage 27 1 Disabled Gate Switch AND OR AND Pickup 25 0 V 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 27 2 Disabled Gate Switch AND OR AND Pickup 25 0 V 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 60 Loss of Potential Alarm 60 Disabled 81 Over Under Frequency 81 1 Disabled Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 57 600 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 2 Disabled Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 57 000 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 3 Disabled Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 61 800 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 81 4 Disabled Disabled Fixed Level Rate of Change Pickup 62 400 Hz 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 99 99 50BF Breaker Failure 50BF 1 Disabled Pickup Delay1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 13 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 14 Breaker Status Disabled Disabled El 1 to El 9 PL 1 to PL 24 50BF 2 Disabled Pickup Delay1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to
66. 50 00 Breaker Status Disabled Disabled El 1 to El 9 PL 1 to PL 24 50BF 3 Disabled Pickup Delay1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 Breaker Status Disabled Disabled El 1 to El 9 PL 1 to PL 24 50BF 4 Disabled Pickup Delay1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 Breaker Status Disabled Disabled El 1 to El 9 PL 1 to PL 24 50BF 5 Disabled Pickup Delay1 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Pickup Delay2 0 20 s 0 01 to 99 99 Breaker Current Pickup 1 00 A 0 10 to 50 00 Breaker Status Disabled Disabled El 1 to El 9 PL 1 to PL 24 50 51 Phase Overcurrent HV 50 HV Disabled Pickup 0 00 pu 0 10 to 100 00 Pickup Delay 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 51 HV Disabled Pickup 50 pu 0 05 to 5 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 j B 0 0000 p 0 02 amp TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 51ADP Disabled Multiple of Normal Loss of Life 1 0 0 5 to 512 0 50 51 Phase Overcurrent LV 50 LV Disabled Pickup 10 00 pu 0 10 to 100 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 51 LV Disabled Pickup 1 50 pu 0 05 to 5 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0
67. 771 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51HV Trip 772 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51HV Alarm 773 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50HV Trip 774 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51LV Trip 775 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51LV Alarm 776 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50LV Trip 777 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51TV Trip 778 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51TV Alarm 779 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50TV Trip 780 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51N HV Trip 781 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51N HV Alarm 782 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50N HV Trip 783 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51N LV Trip 784 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51N LV Alarm 785 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50N LV Trip 786 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51N TV Trip 787 0 Off inactive 1 On active D51N TV Alarm 788 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50N TV Trip 789 0 Off inactive 1 On active Directional Overcurrent 67 Trip 790 0 Off inactive 1 On active Directional Overcurrent 67 Alarm 791 0 Off inactive 1 On active Volts Hertz 24INV Trip 792 0 Off inactive 1 On active Volts Hertz 24INV Alarm 793 0 Off inactive 1 On active Instantaneous Overexcitation 24DEF trip 794 0 Off inactive 1 On active D59N Trip 795 0 Off inactive 1 On active D59N Alarm 796 0 Off inactive 1 On active Loss of Potential 60 Alarm 797 0 Off inactive 1 On active Total Harmonic Distortion Alarm 798 0
68. A 300 301 0 8A 20 Ph B 302 303 0 8A Z 120 Ph C 304 305 0 8A 2 120 7 22 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Checking Ambient Temperature Alarm Checking the Top Oil Temperature Alarm D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 4 Slowly ramp the 3 phase currents up At 0 95 to 1 05 A expect 1 0 A 5 Alarm High 5 Turn currents off 51 Alarm Low 6 End of 51ADP test 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing gt Logic gt Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor for pickup Ambient Alarm 3 With 18 mA being injected into Ambient Temperature input Ambient Alarm Low Note The Ambient Temperature Alarm will activate if the Ambient Tempera ture is outside of the Setting Range 4 Slowly ramp the mA input up from 18 mA At Approximately 21 mA Ambient Alarm High 5 Remove mA input from Ambient Temperature input Ambient Alarm High since 0mA is out of the setting range 6 End of Ambient Alarm test Switch mAdc from Ambient Temperature input to Top Oil Temperature input terminals 232 233 Top Oil Settings Top Oil Temperature Scaling 4 0 mAdc 40 C and 20 0 mAdc 200 C To simulate a Top Oil Temperature of 170 C inject 18 0 mAdc into the Top Oil Temperature Input 232 233 In Relay Control Panel or Front HMI access Metering Analog Trend Top Oil Temp DegC confirm a 170 C reading Top Oil Alarm Test 1 Access Relay C
69. A phsA cVal mag f 14 phase A magnitude IMMXU4 MX A phsA cVal ang f I4 phase A angle IMMXU4 MX A phsB cVal mag f I4 phase B magnitude IMMXUA SMXS ASphsB cVal ang f I4 phase B angle IMMXU4 MX A phsC cVal mag f I4 phase C magnitude IMMXU4 MX A phsC cVal ang f IMMXUS I4 phase C angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMMXUS of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMMXU55MXSASphsAScVal5magst 15 phase A magpnitude IMMXUS MX A phsA cVal ang f 15 phase A angle IMMXU5 MX A phsB cVal mag f 15 phase B magnitude IMMXUS MX A phsB cVal ang f 15 phase B angle IMMXU5 MX A phsC cVal mag f I5 phase C magnitude IMMXU5 MX A phsC cVal ang f T PRO 4000 User Manual I5 phase C angle D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 IMSQI1 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMSQI1 of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMSQI1 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f I1 positive sequence current IMSQI1 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f I1 negative sequence current IMSQI1 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 11 zero sequence current IMSQI2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMSQD of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMSQI2 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f I2 positive sequen
70. C Rise Transformer Type 3 Cooling Allowed Loading 65 degC rise Transformer Type 4 cooling 2 1 8 1 6 214 12 2 5 1 c 3 0 8 Relative rate of loss of life g 64 top curve 32 3 0 6 16 8 4 4 2 0 2 1 bottom curve 0 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Ambient Temp deg C Figure M 6 Allowed Loading 65 C Rise Transformer Type 4 Cooling T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix M 5 Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation Appendix M 6 Allowed Loading 65 degC rise Transformer Type 5 cooling zx co ok ou N KB OD ea 0 ed o Allowed Loading per unit o P gt N o 40 35 30 25 20 15 Figure M 7 Allowed Loading 65 C Rise Transformer Type 5 Cooling Relative rate of loss of life 64 top curve 32 16 10 5 0 5 10 15 Ambient Temp deg C 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 The above curves are for 65 C rise transformers Curves for 55 C rise trans formers can be supplied on request Each Relative rate of loss of life curve is related directly to a specific hot spot temperature as follows 65 C Rise Transformer Relative Rate of Loss of Life 1 2 4 8 16 32 Hot Spot Temperature C 110 116 123 130 137 145 55 C Rise Transformer Relative Rate of Loss of Life 1 2 4 8 16 32 Hot Spot Te
71. Clock IRIG B to T PRO BNC Port 121 The T PRO is equipped to handle IRIG B modulated or unmodulated signals and detects either automatically The IRIG B time signal is connected to the Port 121 BNC connector on the back of the relay When the IRIG B signal is healthy and connected to the relay the IRIG B Functional LED on the front of the relay will illuminate and the relay s internal clock will be synchronized to this signal Modulated or Unmodulated IRIG B GPS Satellite Clock IRIG B Figure 2 1 T PRO IRIG B Clock Connection In order to set the time in the T PRO relay access the setting in Relay Control Panel under the Utilities 5 Time tab which is shown in Figure 2 2 on page 2 2 The Use IEEE 1344 setting allows the T PRO to utilize the year extension If itis received in the IRIG B signal If the available IRIG B signal has no year extension this setting should be disabled DoR Time Relay Time is displayed as C Wg C Local Time Local Time with DST Fri 2012 Mar 16 13 44 46 Incoming IRIG Time Signal Properties Use IEEE 1344 If Present C Do not use IEEE 1344 IRIG Source is C ure C Local Time Local Time with DST DST start Month DST start DST start Hour DST end Month DST end DST end Hour Manually Set Relay Time enabled when IRIG is not present omes sre Relay Time Zone Setting e nrs West of Greenwich ve numbered
72. Compatibility Guide z Compatible T PRO Firmware RCP Version getting compatible RecordBase IC Elle Version Offliner Settings Version View v1 2 v2 5 or greater 403 v1 3 or greater v3 0 or greater 3 0 v1 1 v2 4 or greater 402 v1 2 or greater v3 0 or greater 2 0 v1 0a v2 0 or greater 401 v1 0 or greater v3 0 or greater 2 0 v1 0 v2 0 or greater 401 v1 0 or greater v3 0 or greater 2 0 Please contact ERLPhase Customer Service for complete Revision History T PRO 4000 User Manual xiii 1 Overview 1 1 Introduction The T PRO 4000 is a numerical relay providing protection monitoring log ging and recording for a Transformer A patented Transformer Overload Early Warning System TOEWS algorithm based on IEEE C57 91 Loss of Life de sign standards determines safe transformer loading conditions and issues early warning on over loading and aging conditions The Relay Control Panel RCP is the Windows graphical user interface soft ware tool provided with all 4000 series and new generation ERL relays to com municate retrieve and manage records fault logs event logs manage settings identification protection SCADA etc and display real time metering values view analyze The primary protection is percent restrained current differential The restraint is user definable 2nd and 5th harmonic restraint are provided as well as a high current unrestrained setting To provide a complete package of protection a
73. Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 91 2 negative 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 92 3 positive 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 93 3 zero 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 94 3 negative 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 95 4 positive 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 96 4 zero 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 97 4 negative 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 98 5 positive 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 99 5 zero 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 100 15 negative 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 101 HV 310 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 102 HV 310 Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 degrees 1 0 0 01 103 LV 310 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 104 LV 310 Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 degrees 1 0 0 01 105 TV 310 Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 106 TV 310 Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 degrees 1 0 0 01 107 HV REF IO 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 108 LV REF IO 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 109 TV REF IO 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 110 HV REF IR 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 111 LV REF IR 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 112 TV REF IR 2 0 Configurable 0 0
74. Connections 3 Enable 59 Overvoltage protection for fault and breaker failure initiation 59 Overvoltage 59 1 59 2 V Enabled IV Enabled Gate Switch OR m Gate Switch AND h Pickup 700 wy Pickup 500 y Pickup Delay 200 g Pickup Delay 200 s Figure 7 25 59 Functional Settings 4 Assign protection functions to output contacts to initiate breaker fail initi ate trigger fault recording and to illuminate target LEDs D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 31 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 32 JE T PRO Offliner Settings T PRO4000 aceptance test 60Hz 5A 3windings tps Fe Jer js 53 File Edit Tools Window Help Dg m se Bal S Be Pa iii Gob LS a os Device 7727374 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 14 15 16 17 88 19 20 21 BET BF L BFLH Recording TargetLED SIN HV Trip gm x Oo O O x 51N HV Alarm O x ml B Alarm LED SON LV Trip Oo O O o 51N LV Trip 1 o 51N1VAam M E E E El o a E E uim o Alarm LED SON TV Trip o o 1 SIN TV Trip 1 1 o SIN TV Alarm O 1 B Alarm LED smeo D Di m m BOBO BB BAT BIT BO x x x x ums 59 2 Trip x X X TargetLEDS 1 67 Tri
75. Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF OFF Hot Spot Top Oil Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 10 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF on Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 c 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 11 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 11 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 12 Temperature Input Switch OFF E Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00
76. F Trip Inactive Active 193 81 2 U F Trip Inactive Active 194 81 2 ROC Trip Inactive Active 195 81 3 O F Trip Inactive Active 196 81 3 U F Trip Inactive Active 197 81 3 ROC Trip Inactive Active 198 81 4 O F Trip Inactive Active 199 81 4 U F Trip Inactive Active 200 81 4 ROC Trip Inactive Active Appendix F 18 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 2 Binary Output Status And Control Relay uiis Capabilities Current Value ir eile Sile list methods 2 2 1 Minimum pulse time I Fixed at 0 000 ms hardware may limit this allowed with Trip further Close and Pulse On Based on point Index add column to table commands below 2 2 2 Maximum pulse time I Fixed at 0 000 ms hardware may limit this allowed with Trip further Close and Pulse On Based on point Index add column to table commands below 2 2 8 Binary Output Status I Always included in Class 0 Never response Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 2 4 Reports Output IX Never Not supported Command Event Only upon a successful Control Objects Upon all control attempts 2 2 5 Event Variation Variation 1 without time Not supported T PRO Offliner reported when variation Variation 2 with absolute time See Note 2 0 requested Based on point Index add column to table below below 2 2 6 Command Eve
77. Fault Recorder 4 47 Trend Recorder eeeeereeerreerrerrrennrennrrrnrrnnrrnnrrnnnensrnnnh 4 48 Event Ee c PA NAA 4 49 Fault Og uta IR t o telum 4 50 Output Matrix ssssssse Ree 4 51 5 Data Communications a 5 1 Introd ctlOn t e E rte HE Red DENS 5 1 SCADA Protocol ssssssee m 5 1 IEC61850 Commiunicallon ete etus 5 7 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 1 Introduction SS gas eee 6 1 Offliner FeatureS eeeeeeeeeeerrrerrrrrneeesre einne einne esrr m 6 3 Offliner Keyboard Shortcuts essesessssssss 6 6 Handling Backward Compatibility 6 7 Main Branches from the Tree View ss 6 9 RecordBase View Software esessses 6 33 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 1 Relay Testing er 7 1 Testing the External Inputs sss 7 4 Testing the Output Relay Contacts 7 5 T PRO Test Procedure Outline 7 6 T PRO Differential Slope Test Example 7 43 T PRO Single Phase Slope Test 7 56 8 Installation cies cod e romam ex Eee du RH 8 1 Introduction rmm 8 1 Physical MOUNTING tecto anan manas 8 1 AG and DC WANG ouis oM patei HR De ditio Rees 8 1 Communic
78. FaultData Data Name Description D87NTVMMXN3 MX Amp1 mag f 87N TV fault operating current magnitude D87NTVMMXN3 MX Amp2 mag f 87N TV fault restraint current magnitude D24DEFMMXU1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMMXU lof the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D24DEFMMXU1 MX Hz mag f 24DEF 1 fault frequency D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 47 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 48 D24DEFMMXU2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMMXU2 of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D24DEFMMXU2 MX Hz mag f 24DEF 2 fault frequency D24InvMMXU3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24InvMMXU3o0f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D24InvMMXU3 MX Hz mag f 24INV fault frequency D50NHVMMXUA This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50NHVMMXU4of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D50NHVMMXU4 MX AS phsA cVal mag f 50N HV phase A fault current magnitude D50NHVMMXUA MX AS phsA cVal ang f 50N HV phase A fault current angle D531NHVMMXUS This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51NHVMMXUSof the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D51NHVMMXU5 MX A phsA cVal mag f 51N HV phase A fault current magnitude D5
79. Guide IrvAmps IryBaseSec X ILVpu 1 004 A x 1 35 pu 1 36 Substitute the Ij y per unit value back into Part1 to solve for ly 10 Iny ly 1 0 pu Ipy 1 35 pu Igy 1 65 pu InvAmps InvBaseSec X Invpu 1 004 A x 1 65 pu 1 66 A Summary of IRmin Calculations High Side 230 kV Low Side 115 kV HV Current Value 1 35 per unit HV Current Value 1 65 per unit Convert to Amps 1 65 x 1 004 Convert to Amps 1 35 x 1 004 LV Test Current 1 356 Amps HV Test Current 1 657 Amps Figure 7 35 Summary of IRmin Calculations Rmin Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic Logic Protections 2 Monitor for pickup 87 High Mismatch 2 Connect 1st set of balanced 3 phase currents to LV terminals Ph A Terminals 306 307 1 36A 7150 Ph B Terminals 308 309 1 36A 7430 Ph C Terminals 310 311 1 36A 7 90 Connect 2nd set of balanced 3 phase current to HV terminals 90 of 1 yy pickup Ph A Terminals 300 301 90 x 1 66A 1 49A Z0 Ph B Terminals 302 303 90 x 1 66A 1 49A Z430 Ph C Terminals 304 305 90 x 1 66A 1 49A Z 90 Observe 87 High Mismatch Low D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 49 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 50 3 Slowly and simultaneously ramp up the 3 phase magnitudes of the HV cur rents At 1 60 to 1 75 A expect 1 66 A 87 High Mismatch High 4 End of IRmin Test Third Test P
80. Left Middle and Right T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 59 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 60 The Left column of each SPST shows the net angle for a particular trans former winding associated with a particular T PRO input Note that SPST Left column also corresponds to Column 5 of our NAT The Middle column of SPST corresponds to the angle nulling equations of the Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L Note that SPST Mid dle column also corresponds to Column 6 of our NAT The Right column of SPST shows which phase s ofthe T PRO will have Operating current if you inject Only the specified input phase A or B or C By Operating current we are referring to the phase or phases inside the T PRO 87 element that have the greatest current magnitude once all in ternal corrections have been applied thus the phases that would exceed IOmin and trip first To give an example of how the phases in Right column are obtained here is an example using the Wye 0 connection From SPST Table 7 2 inject Only Ia at 0 Since the connection is 0 use CPC12 formulas in Appendix L I4 ae dh de semp enp emp 2aMP 0 61amp 36 0 67ampZ 0 IB HU He ee 0 33am O 0 33ampZ180 IC Camp Camp 20amp er 0 33amp 38 0 332180 IA at 0 67 A is the strongest phase twice as strong as IB and IC which are 0 33 A Therefore we would expect that the T PRO Phase A differential will operate first Note t
81. N3 300 1 0 330 N3 0 1 0 Example of the Single Phase Testing Calculation Steps Step 1 See the example transformer in Figure 7 33 High Mismatch Test Points on page 7 46 these are the T PRO settings MVA 100 e Windings 2 HV kV 230 Y 0 LV kV 115 Delta 30 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 63 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 64 HV CT 250 1 Y 0 LV CT 500 1 Y 0 PT Location High Side TO min 0 3 per unit IRs 5 0 per unit Slope 1 2096 Slope 2 4096 For this example we will choose the IR min 3 phase test currents In the First Test Point IOmin on page 7 46 Equation 28 and 30 we cal culated IR 1 50 per unit In the Second Test Point IRmin on page 7 48 we calculated the LV 3 phase test currents 1 35 A and the HV 3 phase test currents 1 66 A Step 2 Determine the net phase shift for each input In our example only Input 1 and Input 2 are used We create our Net Angle Table accordingly Table 7 6 Net Angle Table Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Tota damn T PRO Associated Winding CT Angle Angle Appendix L Input Winding Angle Column 3 E Column 4 Correction 1 x Column 5 Input 1 HV Wye 0 Wye 0 0 0 CPC12 Input 2 LV Delta 30 Wye 0 30 30 CPC1 Input 3 NA Input 4 NA Input 5 NA B Step 3 Always obt
82. PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50 51 Settings Instantaneous e 50HV Pickup 1 5 per unit and Time 51HV Pickup 1 2 per unit Overcurrent 3 Time Curve IEEE Very Inverse Phase Test A 3 92 B 0 0982 p 2 TMS 4 0 As shown in Figure 7 14 on page 7 21 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix 50HV mapped to Out 14 51HV Alarm mapped to Out 7 51HV Trip mapped to Out 2 50HV Enabled Tp Out 14 0 CT Ratio SAN Maximum Phase Current IHVB for Out 7 310 mm s0 Element IHVC 51 Element Out 2 ao 51HV Enabled C Ipickup adjusted by 51ADP if enabled IHVA Magnitude Correction Figure 7 14 Logic Phase Overcurrent 50 51 50 51 3 Phase Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 51HV Alarm 3 Apply balanced 3 phase currents to the T PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 1 0 A Z0 Ph B 302 303 1 0 A Z 120 Ph C 304 305 1 0 A 4120 4 Slowly ramp the 3 phase currents up At 1 15 to 1 25 A expect 1 20 A 5 Alarm High 5 Continue to raise currents At 1 45 to 1 55 A expect 1 50 A 50 Trip High 6 Turn currents off D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 51 Alarm L
83. T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var ant Function Codes ta Function Codes Tn Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 20 0 Geunter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 1 Gounter 32_bitwithflag 129 response 00 04 start step 20 2 Geunter 16 bit with flag 129 response 00 04 start step 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 129 response 00 04 start step 20 6 Gounter 16 bit witheutilag 129 response 00 04 start step 21 0 Frezen Gounter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bitwith flag 129 response 00 04 start stop 21 2 Frezen Gounter t6 bitwith fag 129 response 00 04 start step 21 9 Frezen Counter 32 bit witheut Hag 129 response 00 01 start stop 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit without flag 129 response 00 04 start stop 22 0 Counter Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Geunter Event 32 bit with Hag 129 response 428 ndex 430 unsel resp 22 2 Geunter Event 16 bit wi
84. Trip 27 2 Trip Ft Alarm 59 2 Trip 24DEF 2 Trip IRIG B Signal Loss 59 1 Trip Ki DIR Analog 10 RA Harmonics Trend D49 Extemal Logic 1A Logic 2 A Prologic A Outputs GroupLogic A Virtual Zoom Level ba Freeze Close Metering o Main Menu Config Mar Metering Relay Control Panel v1 3 Current Relay TPRO T PRO4000 Connected Figure 7 20 59 Functional Test Settings 2 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages 66 4 V to the T PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4V Z 0 Ph B 331 66 4V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4V Z 120 Ph N 333 Observe 59 1 Trip Low 59 2 Trip Low 3 Increase A phase voltage At 70 0 to 74 0 V expect 72 V Observe 59 1 Trip High Out 3 Closed Observe 59 2 Trip remains low Out 4 Open 4 With A phase voltage still at about 72 V increase both B and C phase volt ages At 70 to 74 V expect 72 V Observe 59 1 Trip High Observe 59 2 Trip High Out 4 Closed End of 59 test 7 28 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 50BF 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide External Input Method Current Detection Method Functional Test 50BF Breaker Failure D02705R01 21 Input 1 Pickup Delay 1 Pickup Delay 2 Current Detection Breaker Current Pickup 52 Breaker Status Input 3 Pickup Delay 1 Pickup Delay 2 Current Direction Breaker Current Pickup 52 4 Breaker Status Input 5 Pickup Delay 1 Pickup Delay 2
85. Unit RTU in binary or ASCII modes and is available through a direct serial link The SCA DA communication settings are made in T PRO Offliner which can be ac cessed and uploaded to the T PRO from Relay Control Panel T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Tools Window Help ojala elel m 2 C Identification Relay SCADA Communication Analog Inputs Serial External Inputs IED Address 1 enm Parity Output Contacts Mods Baud Rate 19200 h Odd Virtual Inputs Setting Groups Serial Data Link Timeout ms Oto disable Even C Nameplate Data Modbus ASCII None Connections c WindingiCT PT Modbus RTU ETE C Temperature Scalinc DNP3 Level 2 ISCADA Communication Keep Alive Timeout s 0 to disable DNP Configuration Ethernet UDP Response Point Map C DNP3 Level 2 TCP pa p O Class Data C DNP3 Level 2 UDP O SCADA Setting Summar amp C Record Length 1 Setting Group 1 Setting i mm Connection Based On Protection Functions Pana BEETS LOI 187 c 87N 049 Master 1 TOBWS 124 IP Address Port O 59N 127 Master 2 60 E 081 IP Address Port O 50BF o 50 51 Master 3 O SON 51N 059 IP Address Port 167 O THD Alarm C Through Fault Mi xy a i m T PRO Offliner Settings v401 Figure 2 14 SCADA Communication T PRO Offliner Settings Screen T PRO Port 122 is
86. and 5 Issue Number D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 13 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol The T PRO IED model number is 4000 Version and issue will each be positive integers say X and Y The T PRO is defined as Model 4000 Version X Issue Y Accessing T PRO Event Information The following controls are available All T PRO detector event messages displayed in the Event Log are available via Modbus This includes fault location information Refresh Event List Function Code 6 address 40769 Fetches the latest events from the relay s event log and makes them available for Modbus access The most recent event becomes the current event available for reading Acknowledge Current Event and Get Next Event Function Code 6 address 40770 Clears the current event from the read registers and places the next event into them An acknowledged event is no longer available for reading Get Next Event Function Code 6 address 40771 Places the next event in the read registers without acknowledging the current event The current event will reappear in the list when Refresh Event List is used Size of Current Event Message Function Code 3 address 40772 Indicates the number of 16 bit registers used to contain the current event Event data is stored with 2 characters per register A reading of zero indicates that there are no unacknowledged events available in the current se
87. and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 4 23 Group Logic Setting Screen Table 4 34 Group Logic Setting Functions Name Give the Group Logic a meaningful name Setting Group to Activate Select which Setting Group should become active when your logic output goes high Pickup Delay Time that the pickup must remain active to produce a function output A B C D E Selection of External Inputs ProLogic Outputs or Virtual Inputs as input statements Operators Boolean type logic gates D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 45 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 3 Recording Functions Record Initiation Record Storage Record Retrieval and Deletion 4 46 The T PRO Relay provides numerous recording and logging functions includ ing a fault recorder a trend log and an event log to analyze faults to know the performance of the relay and to observe the status of the protected device Recording can be initiated automatically by the relay when a fault or abnormal condition is detected You can set the relay to initiate a fault recording on ac tivation of any of its trip or alarm functions or on assertion of any external in puts or outputs The assignment of fault record initiation to the various relay functions is done in the relay s Output Matrix settings A recording can also be initiated manually through the Relay Control Panel in terface in the Records tab The T PRO compre
88. be assigned a Deadband and Scaling factor 6 24 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software DNP Configuration Point Map T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Tools Window Help osla lees EC Identification Li Relay Mapped To W L Analog Inputs Group Name Point List L External Inputs 12 Output Contact 4 nam Sm Output Contacts 1 2 Output Contact 5 C Virtual Inputs TE Output Contact 6 jm m L Setting Groups 1 2 Output Contact 7 Nameplate Data 1 2 Output Contact 8 m _ Connections To Output Contact 9 C Winding CT PT 1 2 Output Contact 10 n an Temperature Scaling Ta Output Contact 11 SCADA Communication a _ DNP Configuration a ms ran ae is 5 lll Point Map 12 OdptCoteti4 O C Class Data mas Output Contact 15 O SCADA Setting Summary 4 2 Output Contat16 Record Length zr Output Contact 17 O AC setting Group 1 Setting Gro gai Output Contact 18 mm EIC Protection Functions tal Output Contact 19 187 NECI Output Contact 20 m _ 87N Ta Output Contact 21 nag Aaah External Input 10 H TOEWS 42 External Input 1 1 24 al imir rj Figure 6 15 DNP Configuration Point Map The relay has configurable DNP point mapping On the Point Map screen any of the configurable points may be added or removed from the Point List by clic
89. current Protection D50TVPIOC3 Instantaneous over D50 TV 50 TV Trip current Protection D50NHVPIOC4 Instantaneous over D50N HV 50N HV Alarm and Trip current Protection D50NLVPIOC5 Instantaneous over D50N LV 50N LV Alarm and Trip current Protection D50NTVPIOC6 Instantaneous over D50N TV 50N TV Alarm and Trip current Protection D51HVPTOC1 Time overcurrent D51 HV 51 HV Trip Protection D51LVPTOC2 Time overcurrent D51 LV 51 LV Trip Protection D51TVPTOC3 Time overcurrent D51 TV 51 TV Trip Protection D51NHVPTOC4 Time overcurrent D51N HV 51N HV Alarm and Trip Protection D51NLVPTOC5 Time overcurrent D51N LV 51N LV Alarm and Trip Protection D51NTVPTOC6 Time overcurrent D51N TV 51N TV Alarm and Trip Protection D67PTOC7 Time overcurrent D67 67 Alarm and Trip Protection D67NPTOC8 Time overcurrent D67N 67N Alarm and Trip Protection D59NPTOV1 Overvoltage D59N 59N Alarm and Trip D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 11 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Protection D59 1PTOV2 Overvoltage D59 1 59 1 Trip Protection D59 2PTOV3 Overvoltage D59 2 59 2 Trip Protection D81PFRC1 Rate of change of D81ROC 1 81 ROC 1 Trip frequency Protection D81PFRC2 Rate of change of D81ROC 2 81 ROC 2 Trip frequency Protection D81PFRC3 Rate of change of D81ROC 3 81 ROC 3 Trip frequency Protection D81PFRC4 Rate of change of D81ROC 4 81 ROC
90. current detection functionality Breaker Current Pickup Minimum level that operates device 50BF 52A Breaker Status Enables and selects input used for 52A status Pickup Delay 1 Sets the delay of the breaker fail timer 1 Pickup Delay 2 Sets the delay of the breaker fail timer 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 37 4 Protection Functions and Specifications THD Alarm 4 38 Current Detection Enable Table 4 30 50BF Breaker Fail Setting Ranges Enable Disable Breaker Current Pickup 0 02 to 10 0 Amps 1 A 0 10 to 50 0 Amps 5 A 52A Breaker Status Disable or Any External Input or Any ProLogic Statement Pickup Delay 1 0 01 to 99 99 seconds Pickup Delay 2 0 01 to 99 99 seconds 11a THD 11b THD 11c THD 12a THD 12b THD 12c THD I3a THD 13b THD Max 13c THD 14a THD 14b THD 14c THD I5a THD 15b THD I5c THD es i Level 40 0 eve F Detector 7 m THD Alarm 10 0 Figure 4 18 Total Harmonic Distortion Function The THD Alarm function alerts you to the degree of current waveform distor tion and therefore harmonic content For example a THD setting of 10 means that the THD function operates if the total harmonic distortion exceeds 10 of the fundamental in any of the fun damental protection currents T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and S
91. dedicated for use with Modbus or DNP3 serial protocols Port 122 uses standard RS 232 signaling An external RS 232 lt gt RS 485 con verter can also be used to connect to an RS 485 network For details on connecting to serial Port 122 see Communicating with the T PRO Relay on page 2 3 and Communication Port Details on page 2 20 The DNP3 protocol can also be run across the optional Ethernet LAN Both DNP over TCP and DNP over UDP are supported For details on connecting to the Ethernet LAN see Network Link on page 2 7 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Protocol Selection Communication Parameters Diagnostics D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications Complete details on the Modbus and DNP3 protocol services can be found in the Appendices For details see Modbus RTU Communication Protocol in Appendix E and DNP3 Device Profile in Appendix F To select the desired SCADA protocol go to T PRO Offliner SCADA commu nications section Select the protocol and set the corresponding parameters The Port 122 communication parameters are set using the 7 PRO Offliner gt SCADA Communication gt Serial menu in relay s user interface Both the baud rate and the parity bit can be configured The number of data bits and stop bits are determined automatically by the selected SCADA protocol Modbus ASCII uses 7 data bits Modbus RTU and DNP Serial use 8 data bits All pro tocols use 1 stop bit except when eit
92. defines logical node data for the logical node HBFGGIO4 of the logical device Measurements Data Name Description HBFGGIO4 MX AnIn1 mag f 14 phase A 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO4 MX AnIn2 mag f 14 phase B 2 d harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO4 MX AnIn3 mag f 14 phase C 2 4 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO4 MxX AnIn4 mag f 14 phase A 5th harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO4 MXS AnIn5 mag f 14 phase B 5th harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO4 MXS AnIn6 mag f T PRO 4000 User Manual 14 phase C 5th harmonic magnitude Appendix Q 15 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation HBFGGIO5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node HBFGGIOS of the logical device Measurements Data Name Description HBFGGIOS5SMXSAnIn1 mag f I5 phase A 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGI055MXSAnln25magsf I5 phase B 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIOS5SMXSAnIn3 mag f I5 phase C 2 4 harmonic magnitude HBFGGI055MXSAnln45magsf I5 phase A 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGI055MXSAnln55magsf I5 phase B 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGI055MXSAnln65magsf I5 phase C 5 harmonic magnitude IMMXUI This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMMXUI of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMMXU1 MX A phsA cVal mag f I1 phase A magnitude IMMXU1 MX A phsA cVal ang f 11 phase A angle IMMXU1 MX A phsB cVal mag f I1 phase B magnitude IMMXU1 MX A phsB cVal a
93. disable Pickup A 0 25 to 50 00 5A 0 05 to 10 00 1A Pickup Delay seconds 0 00 to 99 99 51N HV LV TV Enable disable Pickup pu 0 25 to 50 00 5A 0 05 to 10 00 1A Curve Type See Table 4 11 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 22 Tms Time Multiplier Setting 0 01 to 10 0 A 0 0010 to 1000 0 B 0 0000 to 10 00 p 0 01 to 10 0 TR 0 10 to 100 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 31 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 67 Directional 180 lt Alpha s180 Positive sequence Ove rcurrent 0 Beta 360 voltage and current Alpha la Beta TA V1 reference LV Side HV Side Reference Reference a n n 3 Figure 4 15 Directional Overcurrent Protection Characteristic The 67 directional overcurrent function in T PRO can be applied to either the HV or LV winding whichever has the Potential Transformer connected to it The 67 has a flexible directional characteristic that can be easily adapted to the desired directional application For example the 67 may be applied for direc tional fault detection 1 e as in an Impedance domain or it is commonly used to detect an abnormal operating condition where Watts and VARS are flowing in the undesired direction 1 e as in a Power domain In the case of either domain the 67 direction is defined by the difference be tween the Positive Sequence Voltage angle we will call V and the Pos posangle itive Sequence Current angle
94. iH i Convert to Amps 7 9 x 1 004 Convert to Amps 6 1 x 1 004 A HV Test Current LV Test Current 6 124 A Figure 7 36 Summary of IRs Calculations T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 51 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide IRs Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor for pickup 87 High Mismatch 3 Connect 1 set of balanced 3 phase currents to LV terminals Ph A Terminals 306 307 4 52A 7150 Ph B Terminals 308 309 4 52A 7 30 Ph C Terminals 310 311 4 52AZ 90 Connect 2 set of balanced 3 phase currents to HV terminals 90 of Ipv pickup Ph A Terminals 300 301 90 x 5 52A 4 97A 40 Ph B Terminals 302 303 90 x 5 52A 4 97A 7 30 Ph C Terminals 304 305 90 x 5 52A 4 97A 7 90 Observe 87 High Mismatch Low 4 Slowly and simultaneously ramp up the 3 phase magnitudes of the HV cur rents At 5 40 to 5 65 A expect 5 52 A 87 High Mismatch High 5 End of IRs Test Fourth Test Point IR IRs IO 1 8 pu IR 7 0 pu The fourth test point shown in Figure 7 31 on page 7 43 is an arbitrary point in Slope 2 We chose IR 7 0 per unit We find IO at IR 7 0 from the IRs Slope 1 and Slope 2 settings in Equation 32 on page 7 50 _ S2xIR S1 52 rp 35 100 100 IO IRs setting 5 0 pu Slope 1 setting 20 Slope 2 setting 40 40 x 7 0 2
95. in a similar fashion to the current settings with pickup and hysteresis lev els and pickup and dropout delay settings In this manner the temperature based portion of the 49 device monitors the internal temperatures of the transformer and tolerates them for a specified time A Gate Switch setting provides two logical states where the Current and Tem perature elements can be combined using AND OR logic to monitor different parts of the transformer under different loading and temperature conditions You can set each individual 49 device to provide a simple Alarm LED or one of the 11 programmable target LEDs Additional 49 operating information is available on the HMI display in Relay Control Panel and recording Note that the current used in the 49 function may be the uncompensated Wye currents or Delta Compensated currents For more information see Note re garding delta compensated currents used in other T PRO functions on page 4 8 Table 4 7 49 Thermal Overload Setting Ranges Current Input Switch Off HV LV TV Pickup per unit 0 10 to 20 00 Hyteresis per unit 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 seconds 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 seconds 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch Off Hot Spot Top Oil T PRO 4000 User Manual Pickup degrees Celsius 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis degrees Celsius 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2
96. log ical device System Data Name Description VIGGIO6 ST Ind1 stVal Virtual Input 1 VIGGIO6 ST Ind2 stVal Virtual Input 2 VIGGIO6 ST Ind3 stVal Virtual Input 3 VIGGIO6 ST Ind4 stVal Virtual Input 4 VIGGIO6 ST Ind5 stVal Virtual Input 5 VIGGIO6 ST Ind6 stVal Virtual Input 6 VIGGIO6 ST Ind7 stVal Virtual Input 7 VIGGIO6 ST Ind8 stVal Virtual Input 8 VIGGIO6 ST Ind9 stVal Virtual Input 9 VIGGIO6 ST Ind10 stVal Virtual Input 10 VIGGIO6 ST Ind11 stVal Virtual Input 11 VIGGIO6 ST Ind12 stVal Virtual Input 12 VIGGIO6 ST Ind13 stVal Virtual Input 13 VIGGIO6 ST Ind14 stVal Virtual Input 14 VIGGIO6 ST Ind15 stVal Virtual Input 15 VIGGIO6 ST Ind16 stVal Virtual Input 16 VIGGIO6 ST Ind17 stVal Virtual Input 17 VIGGIO6 ST Ind18 stVal Virtual Input 18 VIGGIO6 ST Ind19 stVal Virtual Input 19 VIGGIO6 ST Ind20 stVal Virtual Input 20 VIGGIO6 ST Ind21 stVal Virtual Input 21 VIGGIO6 ST Ind22 stVal Virtual Input 22 VIGGIO6 ST Ind23 stVal Virtual Input 23 VIGGIO6 ST Ind24 stVal Virtual Input 24 VIGGIO6 ST Ind25 stVal Virtual Input 25 VIGGIO6 ST Ind26 stVal Virtual Input 26 VIGGIO6 ST Ind27 stVal Virtual Input 27 VIGGIO6 ST Ind28 stVal Virtual Input 28 VIGGIO6 ST Ind29 stVal Virtual Input 29 VIGGIO6 ST Ind3O stVal T PRO 4000 User Manual Virtual Input 30
97. logical node SUBSCRGGIO lof the logical device VirtualInputs Data Name Description SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 1 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind2 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 2 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind3 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 3 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind4 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 4 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind5 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 5 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind6 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 6 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind7 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 7 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind8 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 8 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind9 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 9 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind10 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 10 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST ind11 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 11 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind12 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 12 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind13 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 13 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind14 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 14 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind15 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 15 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind16 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 16 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 17 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind18 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 18 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind19 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 19 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind20 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 20 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind21 stVal S
98. never stop in case the pickup setting is set improperly so that the through fault event might be triggered under some load conditions Pickup delay Tp1 and dropout delay Tdl are set to zero by default however they can be set to other values based on the user s needs The2nd harmonic restraint logic output from device 87 is used to block the cre ation of through fault events on magnetizing inrush The pickup and dropout timer Tp2 and Td2 are used to distinguish between the 2nd harmonics caused by the fault transient and 2nd harmonics caused by transformer energization in rush 2nd harmonics in the fault current only last for a very short period of time e g 1 cycle or shorter and 2nd harmonics in the inrush current last for quite a long time e g a second or even longer 2nd Harmonics Content in Fault Current on page 4 41 shows an example of 2nd harmonics existing for a short time on load to fault transition 4 40 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Tp2 setting default to 20ms is used to ensure that the 2nd harmonic blocking will be only applied on the inrush current Td2 setting is used to stretch the 2nd harmonics blocking signal once it picks up ensure that cannot reset too soon after the onset of inrush Time Graph m Bk1 Fdrs IB 40 41 X 2 25262 A 041220034 A A 4445296 A 0 080 0 060 0 040 d 0 020 b 0 000 0 020 0 040 0060 X 002827s 0 001281 s 4 E
99. o Ica as 020 Afo IBS Ea 244 So Bj 4 4 gt gt h Analog A IO IR Harmonics A Trend D49 A External A Logic 1 Logic 2 A _ ProLogic A Outputs GroupLogic A Virtual Show As Primary X Zoom Level 100 v Freeze Close Metering o Main Menu Metering Relay Control Panel v0 7 post 1 2 Current Relay TPRO TPRO4000 Connected Figure 7 38 Analog Input Metering T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 57 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide kan Relay Control Panel Metering HV IA HV IB HY IC LV IA LV IB LV IC TV IA TV IB TV IC la Operating la Restraint Ib Operating Ib Restraint Ic Operating Ic Restraint SETI Analog 10 IRA Harmonics A Trend D49 External A Logic 1 A Logic 2 A ProLogic A Outputs A GroupLogic A Virtual Metering O Show As Secondary v ZoomLevel 100 vj Freeze Close Main Menu Metering Relay Control Panel v0 7 post 1 2 Current Relay TPRO TPRO4000 Connected Figure 7 39 HV LV TV Compensated Operating Currents Step 1 Perform the 3 phase calculations for each slope point to be tested You must perform the 3 phase slope calculations prior to attempting the fol lowing Single phase slope test procedure This is because single phase test quantities for any point on the slope are adapted from your 3 phase test quan tities See the 3 Phase High Mismatch Slope test section for the procedure to obtain the 3 phase test cur
100. off if there are no inputs to the relay If the Alarm LED is on check the event log messages or Meter ing gt Logic gt Protection Logics from the front display or on your com puter in Relay Control Panel Target LEDs Descriptions 1 11 Each of the 11 target LEDs is user configurable for any combina tion of Protection trips or ProLogic element operation Phase segregated Trip LED Indications user configurable are available for the following functions Differential 87 Backup Over current 50 51 e Backup Earth fault 50N 51N Directional Over current 67 Directional Earth fault 67N Overvoltage amp Undervoltage 27 59 T PRO 4000 User Manual 3 5 3 Using the IED Getting Started Push Buttons Table 3 4 Identification of Push Buttons Up Down Right Left Enter Escape Used to navigate the front panel screens Display View Event Log 2011 Aug 31 08 02 43 110831 02 21 14 51HY AB Trip 101204 13 36 58 Unit Restarted Event Log Figure 3 2 Display Examples Table 3 5 T PRO Front panel Display Messages See full list of display items in Table 3 2 T PRO Front Panel HMI Menu on page 3 3 3 6 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 5 Terminal Mode The terminal mode is used to access the relay for maintenance and firmware upgrade functions See Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s User Interface in Chapter 2 section 2 9 and
101. protection fea tures of the relay The control processor manages the user interface and system control features of the relay Both subsystems operate independently of each other and will continue to function even if the other sub system fails The MPB provides the following functionality DSP processor subsystem which interfaces to the RAIB the DIB and the OCB and manages the protection features of the relay with The floating point DSP to provide fast capture and manipulation of data RAM and reprogrammable non volatile Flash memory Allows op eration independent of the control processor and supports field software updates A control processor subsystem which manages the user interface and sys tem control features of the relay with RAM and reprogrammable non volatile Flash memory Allows op eration independent of the DSP processor and supports field soft ware upgrades Settings and recordings stored in non volatile memory Runs a Real Time Operating System RTOS Provides Ethernet ports and RS 232 ports for modem SCADA COM and USB interfaces A time synchronism processor with automatic detection of modulated and unmodulated IRIG B A high speed link is provided between the DSP and control processor sub systems Sophisticated fault detection and watchdog recovery hardware The MPB also provides the power supply for the entire unit The power supply operating range is 43 275 V dc 90
102. rated top oil rise over ambient in C UO top oil rise time constant in hours Tw hot spot winding rise time constant in hours R ratio of full load rated copper loss to rated iron loss dimension less m exponent relating load level to hot spot rise dimensionless n exponent relating load level to top oil rise dimensionless The newest version of this Standard at the time of writing 1998 is C57 91 1995 The only numerical difference in the new table is for Non Directed OFAF or OFWF cooling n 0 9 rather than 1 0 Also in the new standard it is recommended that all parameters in the table except m and n should be found from test Of course this is not usually pos sible especially if the transformer is already in service The temperature calculation equations are most concisely described in block diagram form for details see Figure N 1 Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation Method Inputs per unit load and Ambient Temperature and Figure N 2 Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Tem perature Calculation Method Inputs per unit load and Top Oil Temperature The two situations are 1 Top Oil temperature not sensed For this case the Top Oil temperature is calculated as a rise above the Ambient temperature and the Hot Spot tem perature as a rise above Top Oil temperature 2 Top Oil temperature is sensed an electrical analog input to the relay For this case the Hot Spot t
103. report control O YES M7 1 Sequence number YES M7 2 Report time stamp YES M7 3 Reason for inclusion YES M7 4 Data set name YES M7 5 Data reference YES M7 6 Buffer overflow YES M7 7 Entry id YES M7 8 Buf Tm YES M7 9 IntgPd YES M7 10 GI YES M8 Unbuffered report control O YES M8 1 Sequence number YES M8 2 Report time stamp YES M8 3 Reason for inclusion YES M8 4 Data set name YES M8 5 Data reference YES M8 6 IntgPd YES M8 7 GI YES M9 Log control O NO T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation M9 1 IntgPd NO M10 Log O NO M11 Control M YES If GSE B31 B32 is supported GOOSE O YES M12 1 EntryID M12 2 DataReflnc M13 GSSE O NO If SVC B41 B42 is supported M14 Multicast SVC O NO M15 Unicast SVC O NO M16 Time M YES M17 File Transfer O YES M Manda tory C2 shall be M if support for LOGICAL NODE model has been declared c3 shall be M if support for DATA model has been declared c4 shall be M if support DATA SET Substitution Report Log Control or Time model has been declared c5 shall be M if support for Report GSE or SV model has been declared ACSI service conformance statement The ASCI service conformance statement shall be as defined in Table Q 3 ACSI service Conformance Statement Table Q 3 ACSI service Conformance Statement Services AA Server Remarks TP MC Publis
104. s 3 1 Front display of time alarms relay target metering and settings 2 LEDs indicating status of relay 3 USB Port 150 for maintenance interface setting changes and calibration 4 Push buttons to manipulate information on display and to clear targets 5 11 programmable target LED s 6 Ethernet Port 119 Figure 1 2 T PRO Front View 3U T PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY sooner Ves fERL 1 Front display of time alarms relay target metering and settings 2 LEDs indicating status of relay 3 USB Port 150 for maintenance interface setting changes and calibration 4 Push buttons to manipulate information on display and to clear targets 5 11 programmable target LED s 6 Ethernet Port 119 Figure 1 3 T PRO Front View 4U T PRO 4000 User Manual 1 3 1 Overview 1 3 Back View Extemai 40 us sm V a tas 20 V aa ta 20 V o ta soo V 40 tas aun V 49 as O V 49 can 200 V ao t00 28o V 40 aw a0 V 7 iuis 151 NG 2 AWG 3 VG 4 5 NG 6 NG 7 NG 8 NGg9 7 Ports 100 117 9 External Programmable Inputs 8 Ports 200 201 Relay inoperative contact Ports 202 229 14 programmable output contacts Ports 230 235 Unused 9 Port 118 Internal modem 10 Port 119 120 100BASE T or 100BASE FX Ethernet Ports 11 Port 121 External clock IRIG B modulated or unmodulated
105. the current input circuits has polarity marks A complete schematic of current and voltage circuits is shown for details see AC Schematic Drawing in Appendix I and DC Schematic Drawing in Appendix J The T PRO relay has 9 programmable external inputs in the standard 3U model 20 external inputs in the optional 4U model External dc voltage of either 48 Vdc 110 125 Vdc or 220 250 Vdc nominal are possible depending on the range requested Selection of specific voltage is fac tory selectable To guarantee security from spurious voltage pulses the T PRO has an external input pickup filter setting This setting is made in Relay Control Panel under Utilities gt External Inputs The setting is an integer number representing the number of samples in a packet of 12 that must be recognized by the DSP as high before an External Input status is changed from low to high See specifi T PRO 4000 User Manual 1 5 1 Overview Temperature Inputs Output Relay Contacts Relay Inoperative Alarm Output cations for External Input Pickup Filter in IED Specifications in Appendix A The T PRO 4000 is capable of receiving 2 sets of isolated 4 20 mA current loops for ambient and top oil temperatures This optional feature has to be specified while ordering The T PRO Relay has 14 configurable output relay contacts in the standard 3U model 21 configurable outputs in the optional 4U model Each contact is programm
106. the input line The output of ProLogic 1 can be nested into ProLogic 2 ProLogic 1 and Pro Logic 2 can be nested into to ProLogic 3 and so forth The ProLogic may be mapped to one ofthe user configurable LED s in the Output Matrix screen The operations of the ProLogic statements are logged in the events listing ProLog ic high and low states are also shown in the fault recordings The Figure 6 20 on page 6 29 shows possible ProLogic settings to produce a lockout output In the example operation of device 87 receipt of Fast Gas Trip operation of device 87N or TOEWS trip results in a lockout trip where an output contact is held closed until a lockout reset input is received This lockout reset quantity could be an external input virtual input or another function with in the relay T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 29 6 Offliner Settings Software Output Matrix 6 30 T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 CJ File Edit Tools Window Help DoH B Nameplate Data B Connections C Winding C TPT C Temperature Scaling C SCADA Communication C DNP Configuration C Point Map C Class Data SCADA Setting Summar Record Length TJ Setting Group 1 Setting O Protection Functions 87 1O0 JOOOOOOCL THD Alarm C Through Fault Mi ProLogic Group Logic ETIAM O Settings Summary Setting Group 2 Setting Setting Group 3 Setting C Setting Group 4 Setting _ Setting Group 5 Setting O Setting Group 6 Se
107. using Control Panel s Classic View Start gt Control Panel gt System gt Hardware 5 Device Manager 5 Ports In Windows 7 small icons view go to Start Control Panel Device Manager Ports Look for the port number associated to this device ERLPhase 4000 Series Device Look for a COME where can be 1 2 3 etc Leave the default set tings for this port It is recommended to restart the PC after the USB driver installation The default baud rate for the relay USB Port 150 is 115200 however to double check it login to the relay display and go to Main Menu gt System gt Relay Comm Setup Relay Password Prompt 1 Access Level Required View Access Change Access Service Access Relay Control Panel v0 33 Current Relay TPRO TPRO Disconne 7 Figure 2 5 Logging into the Service Port 150 in Relay Control Panel T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications 2 6 Network Link D02705R01 21 Access the relay s user interface and DNP3 SCADA services simultaneously with the Ethernet TCP IP Internet Protocol LAN link through the rear net work ports Port 119 and Port 120 Ports 119 and 120 are either 100BASE T copper interface with an RJ 45 connector or 100BASE FX optical interface with an ST style connector Each port is factory configurable as a copper or op tical interface The front Port 119 is 100BASE T copper interface with an RJ 45 connector
108. ware on page 6 1 Details on downloading a completed settings file to the re lay are available in Sending a New Setting File to the Relay on page 6 8 Open the Offliner application per the instructions found in the indicated section and highlight the SCADA Communication selection The screen appears as follows T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Tools Window Help pleja x amp e e BB IM SCADA Communication Analog Inputs n C External Inputs IED Address 1 Sca Parity O Output Contacts Mods Baud Rate 19200 h G Odd Virtual Inputs Setting Groups Serial Data Link Timeout ms 0 to disable C Even Nameplate Data e i C None Connections C Winding CT PT C Temperature Scaling C DNP3 Level 2 SCADA Communication Keep Alive Timeout s 0 to disable INP Configuration Ethernet T Point Map 1 C DNP3 Level 2 TCP Class Data DNP3 Level 2 UDP CI SCADA Setting Summary f Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting Group T Connection Based On L PER rak zzril Cc 87 IG C Modbus RTU Network UDP Response o 48 Master 1 IP Address Port Master 2 IP Address Port Master 3 IP Address Port CJ THD Alarm 4 T PR0 Offliner Settings v401 Figure 5 3 SCADA Communications The configuration of SCADA communication parameters via the Offliner ap plication is very intuitive Several settings opti
109. 0 150 90 30 Turns Ratio 100 00 1 00 to 50000 00 External Input Selection Not Used Not Used El 1 to El 9 Current Input 2 Winding LV HV LV TV NC Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 Y connection 0 60 120 180 120 60 Delta connection 30 90 150 150 90 30 Turns Ratio 200 00 1 00 to 50000 00 External Input Selection Not Used Not Used El 1 to El 9 Current Input 3 Winding TV HV LV TV NC Connection X Delta or Y Phase 0 Y connection 0 60 120 180 120 60 Delta connection 30 90 150 150 90 30 Turns Ratio 200 00 1 00 to 50000 00 External Input Selection Not Used Not Used El 1 to El 9 Current Input 4 Winding NC HV LV TV NC Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 Y connection 0 60 120 180 120 60 Delta connection 30 90 150 150 90 30 Turns Ratio 450 00 1 00 to 50000 00 External Input Selection Not Used Not Used El 1 to El 9 Current Input 5 Winding NC HV LV TV 51N 87N 87N Auto NC Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 Y connection 0 T PRO 4000 User Manual 60 120 180 120 60 Delta connection 30 90 150 150 90 30 Appendix B 5 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 6
110. 0 40 100 100 IO x5 05 2 8 02 x 5 1 8pu We then use the mathematical elimination and substitution methods on Equa tions 28 and 30 on page 7 46 to determine the Ipy and Ij y test currents Solve for Igy and Ij y at IO 1 8 and IR 7 0 per unit 7 52 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Use above Formulas 28 and 30 on page 7 46 to solve for IO and IR 10 Iyy lyy 1 8 Ipy 1 y Part 1 IR Iy Iry 2 20 Cay Tun 7 0x2 FT abby 14 0 InytIpy Part 2 Solve for Ij y by eliminating Iyy by subtracting the equation Part 2 from Part 1 Substitute the Ij y per unit value back into Part 1 to solve for Igy l 8pu Igy liy Part 1 14 0pu Iyy Ijy Part2 Total 122pu 0 21 B3pu jy 6 10pu ItvAmps IrvBaseSec X ILvpu 1 004 A x 4 50 pu 6 12 A Substitute the Ij y per unit value back into Part1 to solve for Igy 10 Iny Iyy 1 8pu Igy 6 10pu Iy 7 90pu InvAmps TuvBaseSec x THvpu 1 004 A x 7 90 pu 7 93 A D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 53 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 54 Summary of IR gt IRs Calculations High Side 230 kV Low Side 115 kV HV Current Value LV Current Value 7 9 per unit 6 1 per unit a Convert to Amps 7 9 x 1 004 Convert to Amps 6 1 x 1 004 g HV Test Current 7 93 A LV Test Current 6 124 A Figure 7 37 Summary of IR gt IRs Calculations IR gt I
111. 0 AC Loss of Potential 24INV Time Inverse Overexcitation v f 24DEF Definite Time Overexcitation 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage 27 Undervoltage 81 1 Set to fixed Over Frequency 81 3 Set to fixed Under Frequency 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent 67 Directional Overcurrent 67N Directional Earth Fault 50 51 Phase Overcurrent 51 ADP Adaptive Overcurrent Top Oil Temperature Alarm Ambient Temperature Alarm 49 Thermal Overload 49 TOEWS 59 Overvoltage 50BF Breaker Fail 87 Differential Single and Three Phase THD Alarm 87N Neutral Differential T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Settings and Transformer Connections D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide In order to clarify the expected relay action for each test the settings are pro vided in the test examples Alternately you could substitute the settings in this procedure with your own settings and modify the test accordingly using the de scribed calculation processes The Nameplate and Connection settings for tests that follow are MVA 100 Windings 2 HV kV 230 Y 0 LV kV 115 Delta 30 HV CT 250 1 Y 0 LV CT 500 1 Y 0 PT Location HV Side Base Frequency 60 Hz 1 0 per unit frequency Calculated Values The PT location is on the HV side therefore the reference side is HV Nominal secondary phase to phase HVkV _ 230kV 1 115 0V voltage E PTratio 2000 Nominal seconda
112. 0 19200 38400 and 57600 Configurable other describe 1 2 4 Hardware Flow Control None Handshaking RS 232 V 24 V 28 Options Describe hardware sig Before Tx Asserts RTS naling requirements of DTR the interface Before Rx Asserts RTS Where a transmitter or DTR receiver is inhibited until Always Asserts Ii RTS a given control signal is k DTR asserted it is consid Before Tx Requires Asserted Deasserted ered to require that sig CTS nal prior to sending or DCD receiving characters DSR Where a signal is RI asserted prior to trans Rx Inactive mitting that signal will Before Rx Requires Asserted Deasserted be maintained active CTS until after the end of DCD transmission DSR Where a signal is RI asserted to enable Always Ignores reception any data sent k CTS to the device when the k DCD signal is not active kl DSR could be discarded B RI Other explain RS 422 V 11 Options Requires Indication before Rx Asserts Control before Tx Other explain RS 485 Options Requires Rx inactive before Tx Other explain 1 2 5 Interval to Request Link Not Supported Status Fixedat A seconds Configurable range to seconds Configurable selectable from seconds Configurable other describe 1 2 6 Supports DNP3 I No Collision Avoidance Yes explain D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 3 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 2 Serial Connections 1 2 7 X Receiver Inter character
113. 0 Off inactive On active External Input 8 Change of state latch 10264 0 Off inactive On active External Input 9 Change of state latch 10265 0 Off inactive On active External Input 10 Change of state latch 10266 0 Off inactive On active External Input 11 Change of state latch 10267 0 Off inactive On active External Input 12 Change of state latch 10268 0 Off inactive On active D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 5 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol External Input 13 Change of state latch 10269 Off inactive On active External Input 14 Change of state latch 10270 Off inactive On active External Input 15 Change of state latch 10271 Off inactive On active External Input 16 Change of state latch 10272 Off inactive On active External Input 17 Change of state latch 10273 Off inactive On active External Input 18 Change of state latch 10274 Off inactive On active External Input 19 Change of state latch 10275 Off inactive On active External Input 20 Change of state latch 10276 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 1 10513 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 2 10514 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 3 10515 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 4 10516 Off inactive On active
114. 0 Rear Port 122 is for SCADA and Port 123 can be used for direct serial access and external modem Ensure the relay port and the computer port have the same baud rate and communications parameters T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications nel Utilities Figure 2 8 Port 123 Direct Serial Configuration in Relay Control Panel D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 9 2 Setup and Communications 2 8 Modem Link External Modem Access the T PRO s user interface through a telephone link between the relay 2 10 and the computer by using an external modem Baao w L Modem to PRO pneus Figure 2 9 Modem External Link Connect the serial port of the external modem to the Port 123 on the T PRO rear panel Both devices are configured as RS 232 DCE devices with female connectors so the cable between the relay and the modem requires a crossover and a gender change Alternatively use the ERLPhase modem port adapter provided with the relay to make Port 123 appear the same as a computer s se rial port A standard modem to computer serial cable can then be used to con nect the modem to the relay For pin out details see Communication Port Details on page 2 20 Connect the modem to an analog telephone line or switch using a standard RJ 11 connector In Relay Control Panel configure the relay s Port 123 to work with a modem Go to Utilities 5 Communication and select Port 123 Set the Baud Ra
115. 0 to 100 00 59 Overvoltage 59 1 Disabled Gate Switch OR OR AND Pickup 70 0 V 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 59 2 Disabled Gate Switch OR OR AND Pickup 70 0 V 1 0 to 138 0 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 67 Directional Overcurrent 67 Disabled Pickup 1 50 pu 0 05 to 5 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 5 E TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 Alpha 135 0 deg 179 9 to 180 0 Beta 150 0 deg 0 1 to 360 0 67N Directional Earth Fault 67N Disabled Pickup 5 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 Alpha 135 0 deg 179 9 to 180 0 Beta 150 0 deg 0 1 to 360 0 THD Total Harmonic Distortion THD Disabled Pickup 10 0 Yo 5 0 to 100 0 Through Fault Monitor Through Fault Monitor Disabled nput Current HV HV LV TV Pickup Level 1 20 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 t Alarm Limit 1000 0 kA kA s 0 1 to 9999 9 2nd Harmonics Blocking Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 PL 1 ProLogic 1 ProLogic 1 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operato
116. 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 113 HV IA 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 114 HV IB 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 115 HV IC 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 116 LV IA 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 117 LV IB 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 118 LV IC 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 119 TV IA 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 120 TV IB 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 121 TV IC 2nd Harmonic 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 Magnitude 122 11a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 123 I1b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 Appendix F 26 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Transmitted Value Scaling 3 avant ines Multipli Resolution Name SE nts o Minimum Maximum deti range Offset Units default Description 1 2 3 or none maximal 124 11c 2nd
117. 05R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 05 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 6 ProLogic 6 ProLogic 6 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 7 ProLogic 7 ProLogic 7 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 19 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 20 PL 8 ProLogic 8 ProLogic 8 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Opera
118. 0Hz sys tems 0 2083 ms for 50 Hz sys tems 1 8 8 Maximum Event Time tag error for local I O other than Binary and Double bit data types ms 0 1736 ms for 60Hz sys tems 0 2083 ms for 50 Hz sys tems D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 11 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Capabilities and The following tables identify the capabilities and current settings for each Current DNP3 data type Each data type also provides a table defining the data points Settings for available in the device default point lists configuration and a description of Device how this information can be obtained in case of customized point configura Database tion 2 1 Single Bit Binary Inputs 1 Capabilities Current Value if configurable list methods 2 1 1 Static Variation reported I Variation 1 Single bit Packed format when variation 0 Variation 2 Single bit with flag requested Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 2 Event Variation Variation 1 without time reported when variation I Variation 2 with absolute time 0 requested Variation 3 with relative time Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 8 Event reporting mode Only most recent All events 2 1 4 Binary Inputs included Always T PRO Offliner in Class 0 response Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 1 5 Definition of Bina
119. 1 dc power port 4 kV Earth ground ports 4 kV IEC EN 61000 4 5 Surge Communication ports 1 kV L PE IEC EN 60255 22 5 Signal ports 4 kV L PE 2 kV L L ac power port 4 kV L PE 2 kV L L dc power port 4 kV L PE 2 kV L L IEC EN 61000 4 6 Induced conducted RFI Signal ports 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz IEC EN 60255 22 6 ac power port 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz dc power port 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz Earth ground ports 10 Vrms 0 150 80 MHz IEC EN 60255 22 7 Power frequency Binary input ports Class A Differential 150 Vrms Common 300 Vrms IEC EN 61000 4 8 Magnetic leld Enclosure ports 40 A m continuous 1000 A m for 1 s IEC EN 61000 4 11 Voltage dips amp interrupts ac power port 30 for 1 period 60 for 50 periods 100 for 5 periods 100 ods for 50 peri dc power port 30 for 0 1 s 60 for 0 1 S 100 for 0 05 s IEC 60255 11 Voltage dips amp interrupts dc power port 10096 reduction for up to 200 ms IEC EN 61000 4 12 Damped oscillatory Communication ports 1 0 kV Common 0 kV Diff IEC EN 60255 22 1 Signal ports 2 5 kV Common 1 kV Diff ac power port 2 5 kV Common 1 kV Diff dc power port 2 5 kV Common 1 kV Diff IEEE C37 90 1 Oscillatory Signal ports 2 5 kV Common 0 kV Diff ac power port 2 5 kV Common 0 kV Diff dc power port
120. 12 Port 122 SCADA 13 Port 123 Direct Modem RS 232 Port 14 Ports 330 333 AC voltage inputs 15 Ports 300 329 AC current inputs 16 Ports 334 335 Unused 17 Ports 336 337 Power supply 18 Port with GND symbol Chassis Ground Figure 1 4 T PRO Back View 3U 1 4 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 1 Overview a usu V ao tas aun V 48 as sn V a tas OY 6 7 9 TEE eee f 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 AC Current and Voltage Inputs External Inputs D02705R01 21 Ports 100 117 400 421 20 External Programmable Inputs Port 118 Internal modem Port 119 120 100BASE T or 100BASE FX Ethernet Ports Port 121 External clock IRIG B modulated or unmodulated Port 122 SCADA Port 123 Direct Modem RS 232 Port Port 200 229 422 435 21 programmable output contacts Port 330 333 AC voltage inputs Port 334 335 unused Port 336 337 Power supply Port 300 329 AC current inputs Port with GND symbol Case ground Figure 1 5 T PRO Back View 4U T PRO is provided with terminal blocks for up to 15 ac currents and 3 phase to neutral voltages Each of
121. 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 5 TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 50 51 Phase Overcurrent TV 50 TV Disabled Pickup 0 00 pu 0 10 to 100 00 Pickup Delay 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 51 TV Disabled Pickup 50 pu 0 05 to 5 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 a TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent HV 50N HV Disabled Pickup 5 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 51N HV Disabled Pickup 1 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 3 TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent LV 50N LV Disabled Pickup 5 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 51N LV Disabled Pickup 1 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 15 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 16 T PRO 4000 User Manual TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 z TR 13 50 0 10 to 100 00 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent TV 50N TV Disabled Pickup 5 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Pickup Delay 1 00 s 0 00 to 99 99 51N TV Disabled Pickup 1 00 A 0 25 to 50 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 S TR 13 50 0 1
122. 141 12b 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 142 12c 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 143 13a 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 144 13b 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 145 13c 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 146 14a 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 01 0 01 147 14b 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 148 14c 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 149 15a 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 150 15b 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 151 ISc 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 152 Pa 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MW 0 1 0 00001 153 Pb 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MW 0 1 0 00001 154 Pc 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MW 0 1 0 00001 155 Qa 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 00001 156 Qb 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 00001 157 Qc 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 00001 158 Sa 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 00001 159 Sb 2 0 Configurable
123. 180 180 to 360 Time Curve IEEE Moderately Inverse A 0 0103 B 0 0228 p 0 02 TMS 8 0 Asshownin Figure 7 12 on page 7 17 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix 67 Pickup mapped to Out 4 67 Trip mapped to Out 5 PT LV Side Alpha lt Line Angle lt Alpha Beta H ILVMax pu PT HV Side Alpha lt Line Angle lt Alpha Beta JH IHVMax pu Figure 7 12 Logic Directional Overcurrent 67 J gt H MNL ous D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 17 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 67 Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 67 Alarm 3 Following are the default test quantities future tests will refer to these de fault test quantities Apply balanced 3 phase currents to the T PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 1 0 A Z 90 Ph B 302 303 1 0 A Z 150 Ph C 304 305 1 0 A 2730 in the test when we refer to ramping Ph A angle we mean ramp all 3 phase balanced angles simultaneously 4 Apply single phase polarizing voltage to Ph A 330 333 66 4 V Z0 5 Slowly ramp the 3 phase currents magnitudes up At 1 15 to 1 25 A expect 1 20 A 67 Alarm High 6 Increase currents to 2 0 A Observe 67 Alarm High 7 Ramp 3 phase current angles in positive direction from 90 At 1 0 to 11 0
124. 1NHVMMXU5 MX A phsA cVal ang f 51N HV phase A fault current angle T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D50NLVMMXU6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DONLVMMXU60f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D50NLVMMXU65MXSASphsB5cVal5magsf 50N LV phase B fault current magnitude D50NLVMMXUG MXS AS phsB cVal ang f 50N LV phase B fault current angle DSINLVMMXUT7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D5SINLVMMXUTof the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D51NLVMMXU7 MX A phsB cVal mag f 51N LV phase B fault current magnitude D51NLVMMXU7 MX A phsB cVal ang f 51N LV phase B fault current angle DS50NTVMMXUS This section defines logical node data for the logical node D ONTVMMXU80f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D50NTVMMXU8 MXS AS phsC cVal mag f 50N TV phase C fault current magnitude D50NTVMMXU8 MXS AS phsC cVal ang f 50N TV phase C fault current angle DSINTVMMXU9 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D5INTVMMXUO9of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D51NTVMMXU9 MXS AS phsC cVal mag f 51N TV phase C fault current magnitude D51NTVMMXU9 MXS AS phsC cVal ang f 51N TV phase C fault current angle D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 49 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation
125. 2 IB2 D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 6 RecordBase View Software Im R P File View Graph Measure Scale Options Help se f T ERI ES tal t Bea S lt Defauit gt aja Ela x eel t a A s mej 2 3 bank 3 ricorso nce n bank 8 r19851 991101 105947781 tpr E igh Speer annels eus m PTUMI PTIMI PTIN2 mPT1 V2 y PT1N3 Ay CTLIAHS PTA V3 CT11BHS Ay CTILICHS Ay CT21A HS m IHV Aphase y CT21BHS HV Bphase Ay CT21CHS CT31ALS HV Cphase Ay CT3 1BLS CT31CLS CT41ALS mILV Aphase Ay CT4BLS P A CTA1CLS BE a y CT51ATS MILY Cphase CT5 1B TS A CT5C1S Ay la Operating m ITV Aphase Ay Ib Operating y Ic Operating m ITV Bphase y la Restraint amp V mITV Cphasi y Ib Restraint Ic Restraint H External m Dev 87 Trip H Summation m Dev 87 Restraint CC Dev 87 in Trip Zone m Dev 51 Alarm n Seconds 0100 0 075 0050 0025 0 dio 0025 0050 0075 0400 in 4 Herm A Symcom jy Harmonics cy Scale Secondary A Figure 6 23 RecordBase View Use RecordBase View to store and analyze the records from a relay 1 Set the data storage location on your hard drive from within Relay Control Panel Select File and Set Data Location dialog box will appear The relay Records and Setting Files will be saved in your chosen path in your compu ter 2 Select one or more records
126. 240 PA 30 e O S ee NONC NONC NONC NONC IZSIZSIZSIZSIZSIZSIZSE O Gi NO SII Se HOHE NO inputs s 19 2 4 20 gt 15 1 16 17 18 19 1 20 214 S NO o eo eco eu eo dere v External 46125220 V 48 125 200 V ee SS SS ee e IV zN z z SIZSIZSIZSIZSIZSI Made in Canada Figure H 2 Rear Panel 4U Appendix H 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix AC Schematic Drawing pepunoJ g 48493950 peuous eq pinoys sdu jueuno pasnun Sesodind BuipJoo8J JO seounos Jeuyo 0 pajeuuoo eq ue G pue p g syndu peunbej eue syndur jueuno z uey asau ou J eje ay uium euop eie sjuawysnipe apnjubaw pue eseug Z pepeeu se G pue we sindut LO 0 pepeuuoo eq pow sindur ew Jo ejep peuinbeu ee syndul jueuno z uey eiu JJ Appendix l 1
127. 265 Vac 50 60 Hz This wide operating range provides easier installation by eliminating power supply ordering options Digital ppu This board provides 9 digital input channels Inputs are optically isolated ex Board D B ternally wetted and factory preset to the customer s requested voltage level of 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc This board interfaces to the MPB D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix C 1 Appendix C Hardware Description Rear Panel Comm Board RPCB Output Contact Board LOCB Output Contact Board LOCBH Digital Input mA Board DIGIO Relay AC Analog Sensor Boards RASB Relay AC Analog aput Board RAIB Graphics Front Panel Comm Board GFPCB Graphics Front Panel Display Board GFPDB Appendix C 2 The RPCB provides the relay with two RS 232 ports Ports 122 and 123 DB9F IRIG B time synchronization input Port 121 male BNC internal modem connection Port 118 RJ 11 and two Ethernet ports Ports 119 and 120 RJ 45 or 100BASE FX MM 1300nm ST depending upon order specifi cation The RPCB interfaces to the MPB Port 119 is the exception in that it interfaces to the GFPCB where it shares an internal switch with the front panel LAN port The switch then interfaces to the MPB The LOCB provides 14 normally open contact outputs for relaying alarms and control It also provides one normally closed output contact for relay inopera tive indication This board interfaces to the MPB
128. 300 CPC10 BZ180 xi 330 4330 CPC11 AZ0 amp BZ180 xii 0 360 CPC12 AZ0 Table 7 3 Single Phase Selection Table Inject Phase B only at 0 Left Middle Right Select the Winding Net Phase Angle degrees Use Formulas from CPC Appendix L Injecting only T PRO Phase B at 0 shows these Operating Phase s i 30 30 CPC1 BZ0 amp AZ180 ii 609 60 CPC2 A180 iii 90 90 CPC3 CZ0 amp AZ180 iv 1209 120 CPC4 CZ0 V 150 150 CPC5 CZ0 amp BZ180 vi 1809 180 CPC6 BZ180 vii 2109 210 CPC7 AZO0 amp BZ180 viii 2409 240 CPC8 AZ0 ix 2709 270 CPC9 AZO0 amp C2180 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 61 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 62 Table 7 3 Single Phase Selection Table Inject Phase B only at 0 Left Middle Right Select the Winding Net Use Formulas from Phase Angle degrees CPC Appendix L Injecting only T PRO Phase B at 0 shows these Operating Phase s x 300 300 CPC10 CZ180 xi 330 330 CPC11 BZO0 amp CZ180 xii 0 360 CPC12 BZ0 Table 7 4 Single Phase Selection Table Inject Phase C only at 0 Left Middlle Right Use Formulas from Injecting only T PRO Select the Winding Net Current Phase Phase C at 0 shows Phase Angle degrees
129. 5 ms typical Including relay output operation Power Supply Range 43 275 Vdc 90 265 Vac Power Consumption 25 30 VA ac 25 30 W dc Memory Settings and records are stored in non Records are stored in a circular buffer volatile memory Protection Functions IEEE Device 87 87N 49 50 51 60 81 THD 27 67 Temperature Control and TOEWS 50N 51N 24INV DEF 50BF 59N 59 2 or 3 winding transformer with 5 sets of 3 phase current inputs 1 set of 3 phase voltage inputs 2 optional temperature inputs 4 20 mA dc Breaker and a half and ring bus configu ration fault protection monitoring fault temperature and trend recording ProLogic 24 statements per setting group 5 inputs per ProLogic statement Group Logic 8 16 group logic statements per setting 5 inputs per group logic statement group Recording Transient fault 96 s c oscillography of all analog and external input digital channels User configurable 0 2 to 10 seconds record length and 0 1 to 2 0 seconds pre trigger record length Trend 3 60 minute sample logging of MW MVAR I ambient temperature and loss of life Trend recording from 30 up to 600 days When trend auto save is enabled a compressed trend record is created once the trend period is completed Sequence of Events Recorder 250 events circular log with 1ms resolu tion When event auto save is enabled a compressed e
130. 50016675 Seconds Harmonic Magnitude RMS 14 0 E THO Pus 40 63180 96 D02705R01 21 pe ggg gd A 5 10 15 20 25 30 Harmonics Order W Mag A RMS WPhase 0 9 03872 0 a 1 1241741 80 m 2 443115 131 3 0 86008 105 4 123408 113 5 0 49328 113 6 0 76291 108 7 0 44941 118 8 046737 95 Bn Figure 4 20 2nd Harmonics Content in Fault Current An alarm will be issued when the total accumulated I t value of any phase ex ceeds the preset threshold When this occurs some maintenance to the trans former should probably be scheduled After that is completed the total accumulated I t value should be reset The I t alarm limit threshold may also need to be adjusted accordingly after successive accumulated Pt values have been reached The through fault events and the associated monitored quantities can be viewed in the Event Log The values are Through Fault Peak and Through Fault I 144 in Relay Control Panel They can also be retrieved to RecordBase View and exported to MS Excel CSV format refer to RecordBase View User Manual for T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 41 4 Protection Functions and Specifications details To avoid data loss ofthe through fault events Event Auto Save feature in the Record Length settings should be enabled Table 4 32 Through Fault Monitor Setting Ranges Through Fault Monitor Enable Disable Input Current HV LV OR TV Pickup Level pu 0 10 t
131. 50LVMMXU 12 MXSAS phsA cVal magSf 50 LV phase A fault current magnitude D50LVMMXU12 Mx A phsA cVal ang f 50 LV phase A fault current angle D50LVMMXU12 MX A phsB cVal mag f 50 LV phase B fault current magnitude D50LVMMXU12 MX A phsB cVal ang f 50 LV phase B faul tcurrent angle D50LVMMXU12 Mx A phsC cVal mag f 50 LV phase C fault current magnitude D50LVMMXU12 MX A phsC cVal ang f D51LVMMXU13 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSI1LVMMXU 130f the logical device FaultData 50 LV phase C fault current angle Data Name Description D51LVMMXU13 MX A phsA cVal mag f 51 LV phase A fault current magnitude D51LVMMXU13 MX A phsA cVal ang f 51 LV phase A fault current angle D51LVMMXU13 MX A phsB cVal mag f 51 LV phase B fault current magnitude D51LVMMXU13 MX A phsB cVal ang f 51 LV phase B fault current angle D51LVMMXU13 MXSAS phsC cVal mag f 51 LV phase C fault current magnitude D51LVMMXU13 MX A phsC cVal ang f T PRO 4000 User Manual 51 LV phase C fault current angle Appendix Q 51 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D50TVMMXU14 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DOTVMMXU 1 40f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D50TVMMXU14 MX A phsA cVal mag f 50 TV phase A fault current magnitude D50TVMMXU14 MX A phsA cVal ang f 50 TV phase A fault current ang
132. 59 2PTOV3 ST Str dirGeneral 59 2 Direction set to unknown D59 2PTOV3 ST Op general 59 2 Trip D59 2PTOV3 ST Op phsA 59 2 Trip phase A D59 2PTOV3 ST Op phsB 59 2 Trip phase B D59_2PTOV3 ST Op phsC 59 2 Trip phase C T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual D81PFRCI Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PFRCIof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PFRC1 ST Str general 81 1 ROC Trip D81PFRC1 ST Str dirGeneral 81 1 ROC Direction set to unknown D81PFRC1 ST Op general 81 1 ROC Trip D81PFRC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PFRC2 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PFRC2 ST Str general 81 2 ROC Trip D81PFRC2 ST Str dirGeneral 81 2 ROC Direction set to unknown D81PFRC1 ST Op general 81 2 ROC Trip D81PFRC3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PFRC3 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PFRC3 ST Str general 81 3 ROC Trip D81PFRC3 ST Str dirGeneral 81 3 ROC Direction set to unknown D81PFRC3 ST Op general 81 3 ROC Trip Appendix Q 35 Appendix Q 36 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D81PFRC4 Thi
133. 5STSOpSgeneral 49 9 Operates T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 25 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 26 D49PTTR10 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR10of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR10 ST Op general 49 10 Operates D49PTTR11 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR11 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR11 ST Op general 49 11 Operates D49PTTR12 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR12of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR12 ST Op general 49 12 Operates D50BFRBRF1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF 1 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 1 Trip 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D50BFRBRF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF2 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF2 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 1 Trip 2 D50BFRBRF3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF3 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF3 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 2 Trip 1 D50BFRBRF4 This section defines logical node data for t
134. 67MMXU20 MX A phsA cVal ang f 67 phase A fault current angle D67MMXU20 MX A phsB cVal mag f 67 phase B fault current magnitude D67MMXU20 MX A phsB cVal ang f 67 phase B fault current angle D67MMXU20 MX A phsC cVal mag f 67 phase C fault current magnitude D67MMXU20 MX A phsC cVal ang f 67 phase C fault current angle D87MMXU2I This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87MMXU21 ofthe logical device FaultData Data Name Description D87MMXU21 MX A1 phsA cVal mag f 87 phase A fault operating current magnitude D87MMXU21 MX A1 phsB cVal mag f 87 phase B fault operating current magnitude D87MMXU21 MX A1 phsC cVal mag f 87 phase C fault operating current magnitude D87MMXU21 MX A2 phsA cVal mag f 87 phase A fault restraint current magnitude D87MMXU21 MX A2 phsB cVal mag f 87 phase B fault restraint current magnitude D87MMXU21 MX A2 phsC cVal mag f 87 phase C fault restraint current magnitude D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 55 Appendix Q 56 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D67NMMXU22 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D97NMMXU220f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D67NMMXU22 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 67N phase A fault voltage magnitude D67NMMXU22 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 67N phase A fault voltage angle D67NMMXU22 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 67N phase B faul
135. ADA Interface T PRO Model 4000 Specifications IEC 61850 DNP3 RS 232 or Ethernet or Modbus RS 232 Rear port Time Sync IRIG B BNC connector B003 B004 B123 and B124 Time Codes Modulated or unmodulated auto detect Self Checking Relay Inoperative 1 contact Closed when relay inoperative Environmental Ambient Temperature Range 40C to 85C for 16 hours 40C to 70C continuous IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2 LCD contrast impaired for temperatures below 20C and above 70 C Humidity Up to 95 without condensation IEC 60068 2 30 Insulation Test Hi Pot Power supply analog inputs external inputs output contacts 2 kVrms 50 60 Hz 1 minute IEC 60255 5 ANSI IEEE C37 90 Electrical Fast Transient Tested to level 4 4 0 kV 2 5 5 kHz on power and I O lines ANSI IEEE C37 90 1 IEC EN 60255 22 4 IEC 61000 4 4 Level 4 Oscillatory Transient Test level 2 5 kV ANSI IEEE C37 90 1 IEC EN 60255 22 1 IEC61000 4 12 Level 3 RFI Susceptibility 10 V m modulated 35 V unmodulated ANSI IEEE C37 90 2 IEC 60255 22 3 IEC 61000 4 3 Level 3 Conducted RF Immunity 150 kHz to 80 MHz IEC 60255 22 6 IEC 61000 4 6 Level 3 Shock and Bump 5gand 15g IEC 60255 21 2 IEC EN 60068 2 27 Class 1 Sinusoidal Vibration 1g 10 Hz to 150 Hz 1 0 octave min 40 sweeps IEC EN 60255 21 1 IEC EN 60068 26 Class 1 Voltage Interruptions 200 m
136. AnIn3 mag f 11 phase C 2 9 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO1 MX AnIn4 mag f 11 phase A 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO1 MX AnIn5 mag f 11 phase B 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO1 MX AnIn6 mag f 11 phase C 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node HBFGGIO2 of the logical device Measurements Data Name Description HBFGGIO2 MX AnIn1 mag f I2 phase A 274 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO2 MX AnIn2 mag f I2 phase B 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO2 MX AnIn3 mag f I2 phase C 2 49 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO2 MX AnIn4 mag f I2 phase A 5th harmonic magnitude HBFGGI025MXSAnlIn55magsf I2 phase B 5th harmonic magnitude Appendix Q 14 HBFGGIO2 MX AnIn6 mag f T PRO 4000 User Manual I2 phase C 5th harmonic magnitude D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation HBFGGIO3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node HBFGGIO3 of the logical device Measurements Data Name Description HBFGGI035MXSAnln15magsf 13 phase A 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO3 MX AnIn2 mag f 13 phase B 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGI035MXSAnln35magsf 13 phase C 29 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO3 MX AnIn4 mag f 13 phase A 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO3 MX AnIn5 mag f 13 phase B 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO3 MX AnIn6 mag f 13 phase C 5 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO4 This section
137. Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 5 How Deadbands are set A Global Fixed B Configurable through DNP C Configurable via other means D Other explain Based on point Index column specifies which of the options applies B C or D T PRO Offliner 2 3 6 Analog Deadband Algorithm simple just compares the difference from the previous reported value Simple Integrating Other explain 2 3 7 Definition of Analog Input Point List Fixed list shown in table below Configurable Other explain Complete list is shown in the table below points excluded from the default configuration are marked with T PRO Offliner D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 23 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 Analog Inputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution 2 Nominal values in calculations for the following table are based on 69V sec ondary voltage PT ratio for voltage channels and either 1 A or 5A secondary current CT ratio for current channels dependent upon the format of CT installed NOTES in the T PRO 3 Analog Input data points are user selectable the data points available in the device for any given Analog Input point selection can be obtained through the T PRO Offliner sof
138. CADA connec tion Modbus is available exclusively via a direct serial link Serial Modbus communications can be utilized exclusively via serial Port 122 Port 122 is an RS 232 DCE DB9F port located on the back of the relay An ex ternal RS 232 to RS 485 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS 485 network For details on connecting to serial Port 122 see Communicating with the T PRO Relay on page 2 3 and Communication Port Details on page 2 20 The data points available for Modbus SCADA interface are selectable by the user Complete details regarding the Modbus protocol emulation and data point lists can be found in Modbus RTU Communication Protocol in Appendix E The relay supports a DNP3 Level 2 SCADA connection DNP3 is available via a direct serial link or an Ethernet LAN connection using either TCP or UDP Serial DNP communications can be utilized exclusively via serial Port 122 Port 122 is an RS 232 DCE DB9F port located on the back of the relay An ex ternal RS 232 to RS 485 converter can be used to connect the relay to an RS 485 network For details on connecting to serial Port 122 see Communicating with the T PRO Relay on page 2 3 and Communication Port Details on page 2 20 Network DNP communications can be utilized via physical LAN Port 119 or Port 120 Port 119 is available as a RJ 45 port on the front of the relay and as an RJ 45 or ST fiber optic port on the rear Port 120 located on the rear
139. Correction Factor 1 0 Single Phase Correction Factor 1 0 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 69 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 70 120 Connection T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor 1 0 Table 7 7 Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions for A B 180 Connection T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor 1 0 120 Connection AC T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor 1 0 60 Connection T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor 1 0 30 Connection T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor V3 90 Connection AC Current Source T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor V3 150 Connection AC T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor v3 T PRO 4000 User Manual 150 Connection AC e Current Source T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor V3 D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 90 Connection T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Correction Factor V3 Table 7 7 Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions for A B 30 Connection AC e Current Source T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase Corre
140. Current Detection Breaker Current Pickup 52 4 Breaker Status 1 00 s M Enabled 11 50 A Disabled ba 0 20 s 11 00 M Enabled 11 50 A Disabled Y 10 01 E 11 00 s M Enabled 150 A EI 3 Spare 3 Input 2 Pickup Delay 1 n 20 3 Pickup Delay 2 1 00 s Current Detection Breaker Current Pickup 52 Breaker Status Input 4 Pickup Delay 1 M Enabled 1 50 A lt Disabled gt 0 01 s Pickup Delay 2 1 00 s Current Detection Breaker Current Pickup 52 4 Breaker Status M Enabled p EI 9 Spare 3 o This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 7 21 50BF Functional Test Settings Breaker Fail Initiating Element s From Output Matrix Current Detection Enable A B C Imax m S i Current Pickup Setting pg 52A Detection Enable 52A Status A FU i e 50BF Input 1 Trip m2 yr gt 50BF Input 2 Trip Figure 7 22 50BF Breaker Fail Functional Test Settings and Logic Mapped to Output 15 Note Requires a minimum of 1 5 A on any phase to arm the Breaker Fail T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 29 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50BF Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access Metering gt Outputs Monitor normally open Out 15 50BF ius Relay Control Panel Metering 24 DEF Trip 87 trip 59N Al
141. D50HVMMXU10 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D OHVMMXU 100f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D50HVMMXU10 MX A phsA cVal mag f 50 HV phase A fault current magnitude D50HVMMXU10 MX A phsA cVal ang f 50 HV phase A fault current angle D50HVMMXU10 MX A phsB cVal mag f 50 HV phase B fault current magnitude D50HVMMXU 10 MXS AS phsB cVal ang f 50 HV phase B fault current angle D50HVMMXU10 MX A phsC cVal mag f 50 HV phase C fault current magnitude D50HVMMXU10 MX A phsC cVal ang f 50 HV phase C fault current angle D51HVMMXUII This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSIHVMMXU 1 lof the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D51HVMMXU11 MX A phsA cVal mag f 51 HV phase A fault current magnitude D51HVMMXU11 MX A phsA cVal ang f 51 HV phase A fault current angle D51HVMMXU11 MX A phsB cVal mag f 51 HV phase B fault current magnitude D51HVMMXU11 MX A phsB cVal ang f 51 HV phase B fault current angle D51HVMMXU11 MX A phsC cVal mag f 51 HV phase C fault current magnitude D51HVMMXU11 MX A phsC cVal ang f 51 HV phase C fault current angle Appendix Q 50 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 D50LVMMXU12 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DJOLVMMXU 120f the logical device FaultData Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Data Name Description D
142. Device T PRO logical device identifications Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation T PRO 4000 has the following IEC 61850 logical devices defined in its ICD file Measurements Protection Records System VirtualInputs FaultData T PRO logical nodes Table Q 18 T PRO Logical Devices defines the list of logical nodes LN for the T PRO logical devices Note System logical nodes group L are not shown here Table Q 18 T PRO Logical Devices LD Name LN Name LN Description Protection Comments Function Measurements HBFGGIO1 Measurement 11 20d and 5 harmonic metering data Measurements HBFGGIO2 Measurement 12 2 d and 5 harmonic metering data Measurements HBFGGIO3 Measurement 13 2nd and 5 harmonic metering data Measurements HBFGGIO4 Measurement 14 294 and 5 harmonic metering data Measurements HBFGGIO5 Measurement 15 2nd and 5 harmonic metering data Measurements IMMXU1 Measurement 11 3 phase metering data Measurements IMMXU2 Measurement 12 3 phase metering data Measurements IMMXU3 Measurement 13 3 phase metering data Measurements IMMXU4 Measurement 14 3 phase metering data Measurements IMMXU5 Measurement 15 3 phase metering data D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 9 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Measurements PwrVoIMMXU6 Measurement voltage 3 phase metering data A
143. Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 12 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF OFF Hot Spot Top Oil Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR TOEWS Transformer Overload Early Warning System TOEWS Disabled THS Temperature Hot Spot Trip Setting 150 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 THS To Start LOL Loss of Life Calculation 140 0 SG 70 0 to 200 0 LOL Trip Setting 2 0 days 0 5 to 100 0 24INV Inverse Time 24INV Disabled K 0 10 0 10 to 100 00 Pickup 1 20 pu 1 00 to 2 00 Reset Time 50 00 s 0 05 to 9999 99 24DEF Definite Time Delay 24DEF 1 Disabled Pickup 1 10 pu 1 00 to 2 00 Pickup Delay 2 00 s 0 05 to 9999 99 24DEF 2 Disabled Pickup 1 20 pu 1 00 to 2 00 Pickup Delay 5 00 s 0 05 to 9999 99 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage 59N Disabled 3V0 Pickup 10 00 V 5 00 to 150 00 Curve Type IEC standard inverse T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges TMS 1 00 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 1400 B 0 0000 p 0 02 TR 13
144. EWS T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 25 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide TOEWS Test Procedure 1 Apply balanced 3 phase currents to the T PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 1 00 A 20 Ph B 302 303 1 00 A 120 Ph C 304 305 1 00 A 24120 2 Apply 16 mAdc 20 C to Ambient Temperature input terminals 4230 231 Re boot the T PRO cycle power to reset the steady state condition other wise the T PRO only assumes a new steady state after hours of settling in Note When the T PRO is installed this is not a problem and is the correct way to respond 3 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 4 Monitor the following elements for pickup TOEWS 30min Alarm TOEWS 15min Alarm TOEWS Trip Low Observe HV current 1 00 per unit as per current being injected at step 1 Ambient Temperature 20 C Top Oil Temperature 75 C Hot Spot Temperature 100 C 5 Increase current to simulate an overload condition e g 18096 Load Over a period of time hours observe in order 30 min Alarm High 15 minutes later 15 min Alarm High 15 minutes later TOEWS Trip High Hint If you set the T PRO to trigger a recording on each of these events you can ensure that you will retain records of when these elements operate Checking the warning and trip times can only be properly done by comparing heat runs made on software an MS Excel sprea
145. F Initiated LV 1 Inactive Active 122 50BF Initiated TV 1 Inactive Active 123 IRIG B Signal Loss 1 Inactive Active 124 Output contact 1 1 Open Closed 125 Output contact 2 1 Open Closed 126 Output contact 3 1 Open Closed 127 Output contact 4 1 Open Closed 128 Output contact 5 1 Open Closed 129 Output contact 6 1 Open Closed 4130 Output contact 7 1 Open Closed 431 Output contact 8 1 Open Closed 132 Output contact 9 1 Open Closed 133 Output contact 10 1 Open Closed 134 Output contact 11 1 Open Closed 135 Output contact 12 1 Open Closed Appendix F 16 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 136 Output contact 13 Open Closed 137 Output contact 14 Open Closed 138 Output contact 15 Open Closed 139 Output contact 16 Open Closed 140 Output contact 17 Open Closed 141 Output contact 18 Open Closed 142 Output contact 19 Open Closed 143 Output contact 20 Open Closed 144 Output contact 21 Open Closed 145 External Input 10 Inactive Active 146 External Input 11 Inactive Active 147 External Input 12 Inactive Active 148 External Input 13 Inactive Active 149 External Input 14 Inactive Active 150 External Input 15 Inactive Active 151 External Input 16 Inactive Active 152 External Input 17 Inactive Active 153 External Input 18 Inactive Active 154 Ex
146. Frequency or Df Dt 200 ms Vpos gt 0 25 pu or 5 V 4 81 4 Frequency or Df Dt Vpos gt 0 25 pu or 5 V 4 Figure 7 10 Logic Over Under Rate of Change of Frequency 81 81 Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering 5 Logic 1 or Front HMI Metering 5 Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following elements for pickup 81 1 Trip 81 3 Trip 3 Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltages at nominal frequency to the T PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 7120 Ph N 333 4 Slowly ramp at 0 1 Hz second e g 0 05Hz second the 3 phase voltage frequency up towards 61 Hz At 60 99 61 01 Hz observe 81 1 High 5 Slowly ramp gt 0 1 Hz second e g 0 05 Hz second the 3 phase voltage frequency down towards 59 Hz At 58 99 59 01 Hz observe 81 3 High D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 15 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 50N 51N Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Test 7 16 6 Turn voltages off 81 1 Low 81 3 Low 7 End of 81 test Settings SON Pickup 5 0 A e SIN Pickup 2 0 A Time Curve IEEE Extremely Inverse A 5 64 B 0 0243 p 2 TMS 5 0 As shown in Figure 7 11 on page 7 16 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix 50N HV mapped to Out 13 51N HV Pickup mapped to Out 8 51N HV Trip mapped to Out 3 50NHV Ena
147. Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 125 12a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 126 12b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 127 12c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 128 13a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 129 13b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 130 13c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 131 14a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 132 14b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 133 14c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 134 15a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 135 15b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 136 ISc 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 137 11a 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 138 11b 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 139 11c 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01 140 12a 5nd Harmonic Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 Yo 0 01 0 01
148. Hot Spot Temp Exponent m 0 80 Top Oil Temp Exponent n 0 80 Figure 6 10 Nameplate Data The transformer in the example of Figure 6 10 Nameplate Data on page 6 16 has a maximum rating of 100 MVA and that value becomes the per unit base quantity for the relay Any reference to per unit in the settings is related to the Base MVA The temperature rise value and the cooling method provided form the basis for loss of life calculations of the transformer When User Defined is selected as transformer cooling method the seven transformer temperature parameters be come editable If you select other cooling methods these parameters are no longer editable and the default values based on IEEE standards are used for the transformer temperature calculation Table 6 9 Nameplate Data Transformer 3 phase Capacity MVA 1 to 2000 Transformer Windings 20r3 Tap Changer Range percent 100 to 100 Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temperature degrees 70 0 to 200 0 Transformer Temperature Rise degrees 55 or 65 6 16 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 9 Nameplate Data Transformer Cooling Method Self cooled Forced air cooled ONAN ONAF rated 13396 or less of self cooled rating Forced air cooled directed flow ODAF ODWF ONAN ODAF ODAF Forced air cooled ONAN ONAF ONAF rated over 133 of self cooled rating Forced air co
149. I D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual ix PC System Requirements and Software Installation D02705R01 21 Hardware The minimum hardware requirements are 1 GHz processor e 2 GB RAM e 20 GB available hard disk space USB port Serial communication port Operating System The following software must be installed and functional prior to installing the applications Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Service Pack 1 Software Installation The CD ROM contains software and the User Manual for the T PRO Trans former Protection Relay Software is installed directly from the CD ROM to a Windows PC Alterna tively create installation diskettes to install software on computers without a CD ROM drive The CD ROM contains the following T PRO Offliner Settings Offliner settings program for the T PRO relay T PRO Firmware Firmware and installation instructions T PRO User Manual T PRO manual in PDF format Relay Control Panel software Relay Control Panel User Manual manual in PDF format USB Driver To Install Software on your Computer Insert the CD ROM in your drive The CD ROM should open automatically Ifthe CD ROM does not open automatically go to Windows Explorer and find the CD ROM usually on D drive Open the ERLPhase exe file to launch the CD ROM To install the software on your computer click the desired item on the screen The installation p
150. Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 59N Alarm 3 Apply 3 phase prefault voltages all in phase to the T PRO terminals as fol lows Ph A 330 20 V Z0 Ph B 331 20 V Z0 Ph C 332 20 V Z0 Ph N 333 Note The above prefault 3V VA VB VC 20V Z0 20V Z0 20V Z0 60V Z0 4 Slowly ramp the 3 phase voltage up At 24 5 25 5 V per phase expect 25 0 V 59N Alarm High 5 Turn voltage off 59N Alarm Low Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 59N Trip Contact Output Contact 6 in our settings 2 Set timer start from 3 phase 0 0 V to 50 0 V transition all at 0 3V 5020 50 40 50Z0 150 V This equates to 2x pickup 7 12 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Time 6 Delay A 0 14 ana TMS Gy 02 Bc 02 9014 295 Pickup 7 75 7 3 End of 59N test 27 27 1 Single For this example testing only 27 2 is utilized configured as a 3 Phase Under Phase OR 27 voltage 2 3 Phase Testing 27 1 with the settings specified below is just a matter of enabling 27 AN D Test 1 and reducing only one phase voltage Settings 27 1 Gate OR single phase 27 1 Pickup 50 V secondary e 27 1 Delay 0 5 seconds 27 2 Gate AND 3 phase 27 2 Pickup 50 V secondary 27 2 Delay 0 6 seconds As shown in Figure 7 9 on page 7 13 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix Map 27 2 to Out 4 27 1 Under
151. Mismatch changes from Low to High At 0 29 to 0 31 A Expect 0 301 A 87 High Mismatch High 87 Trip High 3 LV IO nin Test Connect balanced 3 phase currents to terminals A 306 307 B 308 309 C 310 311 Slowly ramp the currents up from zero until 87 High Mismatch changes from Low to High At 0 29 to 0 31 A Expect 0 301 A 87 High Mismatch High 87 Trip High D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 47 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 48 4 End of 87 IO Test Second Test Point IRmin IO 0 3 per unit IR 1 50 per unit IR nin from Figure 7 33 on page 7 46 is determined from the IO min and Slope 1 settings in 31 on page 7 48 IO setting 0 3 pu Slope 1 setting 20 _ 100x10 31 IR min S1 IR min 100 0 3 20 1 5 pu We will then use the mathematical elimination and substitution methods on Equations 2 and 3 to determine the I and I y test currents Solve for Inv and ILv at IO 0 3 per unit and IRmin 1 5 per unit Use above Formulas 29 on page 7 46 and 30 on page 7 46 to solve for IO and IR IO Igy lpy 03 Igy lgy Part 1 IR gy t liy 2 15 gy t liy 15x22 Iyyt liy 3 0 Iyy t Liy Part 2 Solve for ILV by Subtracting the equation Part2 from Part1 0 3 pu Ipy Ij y Part 1 30pu Igy lyy Part 2 Total 2 7pu 0 2ljy 2 7 pu Ipy 1 35 pu 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test
152. NA octets Transmitted in an Configurable range to Application Layer Configurable selectable ffrom cd Fragment containing Configurable other describe File Transfer 1 5 3 Maximum number of I Fixed at 2048 2048 octets that can be Configurable range to Received in an Configurable selectable from Application Layer Configurable other describe Fragment 154 Timeout waiting for None 2 000 ms Complete Application Fixed at 2 000 ms Layer Fragment Configurable range to ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 5 5 Maximum number of Kl Fixed at 16 16 objects allowed in a Configurable range to single control request Configurable selectable from cd for CROB group 12 Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 5 6 Maximum number of Fixed at _ Analog Outputs objects allowed in a Configurable range to not supported single control reguest Configurable selectable ffrom for Analog Outputs Configurable other describe group 41 Variable explain 1 5 7 Maximum number of Fixed at Data Sets not objects allowed in a Configurable range to supported single control request Configurable selectable ffrom s s for Data Sets groups Configurable other describe 85 86 87 Variable explain 1 5 8 Supports mixing object Not applicable controls are not supported Analog Outputs groups AOBs CROBs Yes not supported and Data Sets in t
153. OFF OFF Hot Spot Top Oil Pickup 120 0 c 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 4 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF eis Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 C 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 9 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 10 49 5 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00 Pickup Delay Tp1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Dropout Delay Td1 0 00 s 0 00 to 1800 00 Temperature Input Switch OFF ent Hot Spot Top i Pickup 120 0 c 70 0 to 200 0 Hysteresis 1 0 C 0 0 to 10 0 Pickup Delay Tp2 0 01 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Dropout Delay Td2 0 00 hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate Switch OR AND OR 49 6 Thermal Overload Current Input Switch OFF OFF HV LV TV Pickup 1 10 pu 0 10 to 20 00 Hysteresis 0 02 pu 0 00 to 1 00
154. Off inactive 1 On active Auxiliary device failure alarm 799 0 Off inactive 1 On active Ambient out of range alarm 800 0 Off inactive 1 On active Top oil out of range alarm 801 0 Off inactive 1 On active D49 1 Trip Alarm 802 0 Off inactive 1 On active D49 2 Trip Alarm 803 0 Off inactive 1 On active Appendix E 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol D49 3 Trip Alarm 804 Off inactive On active D49 4 Trip Alarm 805 Off inactive On active D49 5 Trip Alarm 806 Off inactive On active D49 6 Trip Alarm 807 Off inactive On active D49 7 Trip Alarm 808 Off inactive On active D49 8 Trip Alarm 809 Off inactive On active D49 9 Trip Alarm 810 Off inactive On active D49 10 Trip Alarm 811 Off inactive On active D49 11 Trip Alarm 812 Off inactive On active D49 12 Trip Alarm 813 Off inactive On active D87N HV Trip 814 Off inactive On active D87N LV Trip 815 Off inactive On active D87N TV Trip 816 Off inactive On active Toews15MinAlarm 817 Off inactive On active Toews30MinAlarm 818 Off inactive On active ToewsTrip 819 Off inactive On active ProLogic1 820 Off inactive On active ProLogic2 821 Off inactive On active ProLogic3 822
155. Offliner Settings Document 1 File Edit Tools Window Help D s m sale g fg Identification mE C Analog Inputs Relay Identification Identification External Inputs C Output Contacts Settings Version 401 C Virtual Inputs Ignore Serial Number Refer to the serial number C Setting Groups onthe back of the relay Serial Number TPRO 4000 000000 01 C Nameplate Data an e Unit ID UnitiD Connections T Winding CT PT Nominal CT Sec Current 54 C Temperature Scaling Nominal System Frequency 50Hz v SCADA Communication Standard HO 5 DNP Configuration B External Inputs 14 Output Contacts T Point Map Optional UO Not installed x O Class Data O SCADA Setting Summar Comments Comments LI Record engin Software Setting Setting Group 1 Setting Protection Functions Setting Name Settings Name z gi Date Created Modified 201 0 08 28 16 14 14 87N L 49 Station Station Name Station Name 24 59N Station Number 1 E Location Location 60 81 Bank Name Bank Name O 50BF Ba Nominal System Nominal CT Sec Frequency set to Current set to either either 50 Hz or 60 Hz TAor 5A Unique relay serial number Figure 6 4 Relay Identification The first screen presents all the menu items in the left menu tree You can ac cess the menu items by clicking the tabs at the to
156. Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 24 ProLogic 24 ProLogic 24 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 05 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 1 Group Logic 1 Group Logic 1 Disabled T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 25 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 26 Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 2 Group Logic 2 Group Logic 2 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 3 Group Logic 3 Group Logic 3 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Opera
157. Output Contact 3 OCGGIO2 STS Ind4 stVal Output Contact 4 OCGGIO2 STS Ind5 stVal Output Contact 5 OCGGIO2 STS Ind6 stVal Output Contact 6 OCGGIO2 ST Ind7 stVal Output Contact 7 OCGGIO2 ST Ind8 stVal Output Contact 8 OCGGIO2 STS Ind9 stVal Output Contact 9 OCGGIO2 ST Ind10 stVal Output Contact 10 OCGGIO2 ST Ind11 stVal Output Contact 11 OCGGIO2 ST Ind12 stVal Output Contact 12 OCGGIO2 ST Ind13 stVal Output Contact 13 OCGGIO2 ST Ind14 stVal Output Contact 14 OCGGIO2 ST Ind15 stVal Output Contact 15 OCGGIO2 ST Ind16 stVal Output Contact 16 OCGGIO2 ST Ind17 stVal Output Contact 17 OCGGIO2 ST Ind18 stVal Output Contact 18 OCGGIO2 ST Ind19 stVal Output Contact 19 OCGGIO2 ST Ind20 stVal Output Contact 20 OCGGIO2 ST Ind21 stVal T PRO 4000 User Manual Output Contact 21 Appendix Q 41 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation PLGGIO3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node PLGGIO3of the log ical device System Data Name Description PLGGIO3 ST Ind1 stVal ProLogic 1 PLGGIO3 ST Ind2 stVal ProLogic 2 PLGGIO3 ST Ind3 stVal ProLogic 3 PLGGIO3 ST Ind4 stVal ProLogic 4 PLGGIO3 ST Ind5 stVal ProLogic 5 PLGGIO3 ST Ind6 stVal ProLogic 6 PLGGIO3 ST Ind7 stVal ProLogic 7 PLGGIO3 ST Ind8 stVal ProLogic 8 PLGGIO3 ST Ind9 stVal ProLogic 9 PLGGIO3 ST Ind10 st
158. PTTR10 Thermal overload D49 10 49 10 Operates Protection D49PTTR11 Thermal overload D49 11 49 11 Operates Protection D49PTTR12 Thermal overload D49 12 49 120perates Protection D50BFRBRF1 Breaker failure Input 1 Input 1 50BF 1 Trip D50BF 1 Appendix Q 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Protection D50BFRBRF2 Breaker failure Input 1 Input 1 5OBF 2 Trip D50BF 2 Protection D50BFRBRF3 Breaker failure Input 2 Input 2 5OBF 1 Trip D50BF 1 Protection D50BFRBRF4 Breaker failure Input 2 Input 2 5OBF 2 Trip D50BF 2 Protection D50BFRBRF5 Breaker failure Input 3 Input 3 5OBF 1 Trip D50BF 1 Protection D50BFRBRF6 Breaker failure Input 3 Input 3 5OBF 2 Trip D50BF 2 Protection D50BFRBRF7 Breaker failure Input 4 Input 4 5OBF 1 Trip D50BF 1 Protection D50BFRBRF8 Breaker failure Input 4 Input 4 5OBF 2 Trip D50BF 2 Protection D50BFRBRF9 Breaker failure Input 5 Input 5 5OBF 1 Trip D50BF 1 Protection D50BFRBRF 10 Breaker failure Input 5 Input 5 5OBF 2 Trip D50BF 2 Protection CBFIHRBRF 11 Breaker failure BFI HV Breaker Failure Initiation HV Protection CBFILRBRF 12 Breaker failure BFI LV Breaker Failure Initiation LV Protection CBFITRBRF 13 Breaker failure BFI TV Breaker Failure Initiation TV Protection D50HVPIOC1 Instantaneous over D50 HV 50 HV Trip current Protection D50LVPIOC2 Instantaneous over D50 LV 50 LV Trip
159. R01 21 The Smart Grid is transforming the electrical power industry by using digital technology to deliver electricity in a more intelligent efficient and controlled way Embedded control and communication devices are central to this trans formation by adding intelligent automation to electrical networks The IEC 61850 standard defines a new protocol that permits substation equip ment to communicate with each other Like many other manufacturers ERL Phase Power Technologies is dedicated to using IEC 61850 based devices that can be used as part of an open and versatile communications network for sub station automation The IEC 61850 defines an Ethernet based protocol used in substations for data communication Substations implement a number of controllers for protection measurement detection alarms and monitoring System implementation is of ten slowed down by the fact that the controllers produced by different manu facturers are incompatible since they do not support the same communication protocols The problems associated with this incompatibility are quite serious and result in increased costs for protocol integration and system maintenance Implementation Details Implementation includes the following documents Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Model Implementation Conformance Statement Tissues Conformance Statement All configurable IEC61850 parameters are available via the Maintenance in terface Note t
160. Rs Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 2 Monitor for pickup 87 High Mismatch 2 Connect 1 set of balanced 3 phase currents to LV terminals Ph A Terminals 306 307 6 12A 7150 Ph B Terminals 308 309 6 12A 730 Ph C Terminals 310 311 6 12A 7 90 Connect 2 set of balanced 3 phase currents to HV terminals 90 of Ty pickup Ph A Terminals 300 301 90 x 7 93A 7 14A Z0 Ph B Terminals 302 303 90 x 7 93A 7 14A 730 Ph C Terminals 304 305 90 x 7 93A 7 14A Z 90 Observe 87 High Mismatch Low 3 Slowly and simultaneously ramp up the 3 Phase magnitudes of the HV cur rents At 7 80 to 8 15A expect 7 93A 87 High Mismatch High 4 End of IR gt IRs Test 87 High Mismatch High 4 End of IR gt IRs Test T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Summary of Three Phase Test 1 Calculate base current for each side 2 Determine IO operating and IR restraint values to be tested 3 Calculate Ipy and Ij y per unit currents for a given IO and IR 4 Adjust angles by Current Phase Correction Current Phase Correction Ta ble in Appendix L and convert Ijy and Ij y per units to amperes 5 Apply Iy and Ij y with 3 phase sources Set reference side at zero degrees 0 0 for current into the transformer and the opposite side at the opposing a
161. Side IHV 310 A Figure 7 13 Logic Directional Earth fault 67N 67N Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering 5 Logic 1 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 67N Alarm Following are the default test quantities future tests will refer to these de fault test quantities Apply a single phase current to the T PRO terminals as follows Ph A 300 301 1 0 A Z 90 Apply single phase polarizing voltage to Ph A 330 333 66 4 V Z0 Slowly ramp the 3 phase currents magnitudes up At 1 15 to 1 25 A expect 1 20 A 67N Alarm High Increase currents to 2 0 A T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 19 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Observe 67N Trip High 7 Ramp phase A current angle in positive direction from 90 At 1 0 to 1 0 expect 0 67N Alarm Low 8 Return current angles to 90 150 30 9 Ramp current angle in negative direction from 90 At 179 to 181 expect 180 67N Alarm Low 10 Turn currents OFF Keep voltage On for the timing test 67N Alarm Low 67N Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 67N Trip Contact Output Contact 5 in the settings 2 Set timer start from 3 phase currents at default angles 0 A to 3 60 A transi tion 3x pickup Time Delay 9 TMS 8 0 0228 2 8 0 0228 Kasi F 3 895 Vm d 1 ED ceu 3 End of 67N test 7 20 T
162. T Op general 24INV Trip T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 D27 IPTUVI Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27 1PTUV lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D27_1PTUV1 ST Str general 27 1 Trip D27_1PTUV1 ST Str dirGeneral 27 1 Direction set to unknown D27_1PTUV1 ST Op general 27 1 Trip D27_1PTUV1 ST Op phsA 27 1 Trip phase A D27_1PTUV1 ST Op phsB 27 1 Trip phase B D27_1PTUV1 ST Op phsC 27 1 Trip phase C D27_2PTUV2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27 2PTUV2of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D27_2PTUV2 ST Str general 27 2 Trip D27_2PTUV2 ST Str dirGeneral 27 2 Direction set to unknown D27_2PTUV2 ST Op general 27 2 Trip D27_2PTUV2 ST Op phsA 27 2 Trip phase A D27_2PTUV2 ST Op phsB 27 2 Trip phase B D27_2PTUV2 ST Op phsC 27 2 Trip phase C D49PTTR1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR1 ST Op general 49 1 Operates T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 23 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 24 D49PTTR2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DA9PTTR2of the logical device Protec
163. Table Q 11 Reporting Clause 14 Buffered report control block BRCB 24 Report TP c6 YES 24 1 Data change dchg YES 24 2 qchg change qchg NO 24 3 Data update dupd NO 25 GetBRCBValues TP c6 YES S26 SetBRCBValues TP c6 YES Unbuffered report control block URCB S27 Report TP c6 YES S27 1 Data change dchg YES 27 2 qchg change qchg NO 27 3 Data update dupd NO S28 GetURCBValues TP c6 YES 29 SetURCBValues TP c6 YES c6 shall declare support for at least one BRCB or URCB Table Q 12 Logging clause 14 Log Control block S30 GetLCBValues TP M NO S31 SetLCBValues TP M NO Log 32 QueryLogByTime TP M NO 33 QueryLogAfter TP M NO 34 GetLogStatusValues TP M NO c7 shall declare support for at least one query log by time or Query LogAfter T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Table Q 13 Generic Substation event model GSE 14 3 5 3 4 GOOSE CONTROL BLOCK S35 SendGOOSEMessage MC c8 YES S36 GetGOReference TP c9 S37 GetGOOSEElementNum TP c9 ber 38 GetGoCBValues TP O YES S39 SetGoCBValues TP NO GSSE CONTROL BLOCK S40 SendGSSEMessage MC C8 NO S41 GetGsReference TP C9 NO S42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP C9 NO S43 GetGsCBValues TP O NO S44 SetGsCBValues TP O NO c8 shall
164. Timeout Capabilities I Not checked No gap permitted Fixed at bit times Fixed at ms Configurable range to bittimes Configurable range to ms Configurable Selectable from Configurable other describe Variable explain bit times Configurable Selectablefrom ms Current Value If configurable list methods 1 2 8 Inter character gaps in transmission None always transmits with no inter character gap Maximum bit times Maximum ms Appendix F 4 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile fire If configurable 1 3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value list methode 1 3 11 Port Name Port 119 and Port 120 1 3 2 Type of End Point TCP Initiating Master Only Not configured T PRO Offliner I TCP Listening Outstation Only for DNP TCP Dual required for Masters UDP Datagram required 1 3 3 IP Address of this 192 168 100 101 T PRO Mainte Device nance utilities 1 3 4 Subnet Mask Not set T PRO Mainte nance utilities 13 5 Gateway IP Address Not set T PRO Mainte nance utilities 1 3 6 Accepts TCP I Allows all show as in 1 3 7 Limits based on T PRO Offliner Connections or UDP I Limits based on an IP address an IP address Datagrams from Limits based on list of IP addresses Limits based on a wildcard IP address Limits based on list of wildcard IP address
165. Top Oil Temperature Temperature Probe Probe Figure O 1 T PRO A Back view Example 2 Using two top oil probes powered by two T PRO relays B and C and one am bient temperature probe powered by T PRO C D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix O 1 Appendix O Temperature Probe Connections T PRO B Back view T PRO C Back view i i 30 VDC i i Ambient Top Oil 40 mA Ambient Top Oil 30 vg z OOOOOO 230 231 232 233 234 235 230 231 232 233 234 235 Gray Orange T T T Top Oil Ambient Top Oil Temperature Temperature Temperature Probe 2 Probe Probe 1 Figure O 2 T PRO B Back view and T PRO C Back view Appendix O 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix P Failure Modes User Inputs DSP MB igi i i Laptop or Remote Digital Signal Micro Processor Processor Connection Outputs A B C D E DSP DSP DSP MPC MPC MPC System Self Comm Self System Fail check Fail check Fail Fail Fail P 1 Actions A DSP System Failure The Relay Functional LED changes from green to off The Master Relay is de energized Two of its contacts open disconnecting power to the other auxiliary relays A separate contact labeled Relay Inoperative on the rear panel closes to activate a remote alarm The watch dog repeatedly attempts to re start the DSP for diagnostic purposes The Relay Functional LED stays off and the relays remain de energized even for a successful re start Only a po
166. Transformer in Appendix M on page Appendix M 6 not a dan gerous level Suppose also that the ambient temperature is 35 C From the curves the Allowed Loading is 1 1 per unit In other words the inverse time overcurrent relay pickup will adapt to 1 1 per unit At an ambient of 25 C a 48 overload trip level would pertain What does this mean The meaning is that at just under this trip level the trans former insulation is deteriorating at just under 8 times the normal rate This is not a problem unless the situation is never balanced by lower operating lev els as is usually the case Another way of looking at this is that the adaptive feature with settings of rate of loss of life greater than normal allows temporary overloads Note that the shape of the inverse time curve above 2 per unit current is not af fected as shown in for details see Figure M 2 Adaptive Pickup Characteristic on page M 3 0 7 1 0 1 5 2 15 Current per unit od Hot day Cold day Figure M 2 Adaptive Pickup Characteristic The Trend Logging feature of the T PRO relay allows you to keep track of the accumulated loss of life to ensure that overloads are not causing a long term problem T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix M 3 Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation Overloadin Curves for Abc Rise Transformers Appendix M 4 Allowed Loading per unit Allowed Loading 65 degC rise Transformer Type 1 cooling zx o N
167. Val ProLogic 10 PLGGIO3 ST Ind11 stVal ProLogic 11 PLGGIO3 ST Ind12 stVal ProLogic 12 PLGGIO3 ST Ind13 stVal ProLogic 13 PLGGIO3 ST Ind14 stVal ProLogic 14 PLGGIO3 ST Ind15 stVal ProLogic 15 PLGGIO3 ST Ind16 stVal ProLogic 16 PLGGIO3 ST Ind17 stVal ProLogic 17 PLGGIO3 ST Ind18 stVal ProLogic 18 PLGGIO3 ST Ind19 stVal ProLogic 19 PLGGIO3 ST Ind20 stVal ProLogic 20 PLGGIO3 ST Ind21 stVal ProLogic 21 PLGGIO3 ST Ind22 stVal ProLogic 22 PLGGIO3 ST Ind23 stVal ProLogic 23 PLGGIO3 ST Ind24 stVal ProLogic 24 Appendix Q 42 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation XFMRGGIO4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node XFMRGGIO4of the logical device System Data Name Description XFMRGGIO4 ST Ind1 stVal TOEWS 15 Minutes Alarm XFMRGGIO4 ST Ind2 stVal TOEWS 30 Minutes Alarm XFMRGGIO4 ST Ind3 stVal TOEWS Trip XFMRGGIO4 ST Ind4 stVal THD Alarm XFMRGGIO4 ST Ind5 stVal Ambient Temperature Alarm XFMRGGIO4 ST Ind6 stVal Top Oil Temperature Alarm XFMRGGIO4 ST ind1 stVal I I T Alarm SGGGIOS This section defines logical node data for the logical node SGGGIOSof the log ical device System Data Name Description SGGGIOS5 STSIntIn stVal Active Settings Group D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 43 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 44 VIGGIO6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node VIGGIO6of the
168. Val mag f 59 1 phase B fault voltage angle D59_1MMXU16 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 59 1 phase C fault voltage magnitude D59_1MMXU16 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 59 1 phase C fault voltage angle D59 2MMXU17 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59 2MMXU17of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D59_2MMXU17 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 59 2 phase A fault voltage magnitude D59_2MMXU17 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 59 2 phase A fault voltage angle D59_2MMXU17 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 59 2 phase B fault voltage magnitude D59_2MMXU17 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 59 2 phase B fault voltage angle D59_2MMXU17 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 59 2 phase C fault voltage magnitude D59_2MMXU17 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f T PRO 4000 User Manual 59 2 phase C fault voltage angle Appendix Q 53 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 54 D27 1MMXU18 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27 1MMXUI8of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D27_1MMXU18 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 27 1 phase A fault voltage magnitude D27_1MMXU18 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 27 1 phase A fault voltage angle D27_1MMXU18 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 27 1 phase B fault voltage magnitude D27_1MMXU18 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 27 1 phase B fault voltage angle D27_1MMXU18 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 27 1 phase C fault voltage mag
169. Virtual Input 5 10517 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 6 10518 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 7 10519 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 8 10520 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 9 10521 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 10 10522 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 11 10523 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 12 10524 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 13 10525 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 14 10526 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 15 10527 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 16 10528 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 17 10529 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 18 10530 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 19 10531 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 20 10532 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 21 10533 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 22 10534 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 23 10535 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 24 10536 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 25 10537 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 26 10538 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 27 10539 Off inactive On active Virtual Input 28 10540 Off inactive On active Appendix E 6 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Virtual Input 29 10541 0 Off inactive 1 On active
170. ZAngle 110 In this example we have found that we require Zposangle range between 20 to 110 Since the Alpha and Beta settings are for 0 posangle remember V posang 1S reference T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 33 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Iposang Vposang Zposang 9 20 20 18 and lposang2 Vposang Zposang 9 110 110 19 Alpha setting is the smaller of the above two L osang 7 110 i e 110 is smaller than 20 The Beta setting is always the total desired operating range in this example 130 MVAr iin R MW Ls Vposangle 0 deg ref Vposangle 0 deg ref MW MVAr jX Figure 4 16A Alpha and Beta Setting example phasors rep Figure 4 16B Same settings as Figure 4 16A but phasors resented in the Power domain represented in the Impedance domain 4 34 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications General Setting Rules Alpha cannot be 179 99 and cannot be 5 180 Beta cannot be 0 1 and cannot be 5360 Beta setting of 360 makes the 67 non directional 1 e omni directional Ifthe current is greater than the 67 pickup setting in any phase and the positive sequence current angle relative to the positive sequence voltage angle is within the Alpha and Beta operating range for the duration of the 67 time characteris tic then a trip output will be issued You can select an IEC IEEE or user defined inverse time
171. able 2 1 Terminal Program Setup Baud rate Default fixed baud rate 115 200 N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control Hardware or Software Hardware flow control is recommended The relay automatically sup ports both on all its serial ports Function arrow Terminal keys and control keys Emulation VT100 Font Use a font that supports line drawing e g Terminal or MS Line Draw If the menu appears outlined in odd characters the font selected is not supporting line drawing characters To configure HyperTerminal follow this instructions In Windows 7 open HyperTerminal PE in Windows XP go to Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt HyperTerminal If Default Telnet Program windows pops up Check Don t ask me this question again Hit No First time use of HyperTerminal will ask for Location Information T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 13 2 Setup and Communications Fill with appropriate information e g What country region are you in now Choose Canada What area code or city code are you are in now Enter 306 If you need to specify a carrier code what is it Enter i e leave blank If you dial a number to access an outside line what is it Enter The phone system at this location uses Choose Tone dialing Hit OK First time use of HyperTerminal will show
172. able and has breaker tripping capability All output contacts are isolated from each other The output contacts are closed for a min imum of 120 ms after the initiating element drops out If the relay is in self check mode or becomes inoperative then the Relay Inop erative Alarm output contact closes and all tripping functions are blocked 1 4 Model Options Ordering T PRO is available as a horizontal mount for details see Mechanical Draw ings in Appendix G T PRO is available with an optional internal modem card The two rear Ethernet ports can be ordered as one copper one optical port or both optical ports or both copper ports T PRO is available with an optional two temperature inputs Ambient amp Top Oil These ports on the rear panel are available as either 100BASE T RJ 45 or 100BASE FX optical ST The CT inputs are 1 A nominal or 5 A nominal The external inputs are 48 Vdc 110 125 Vdc or 220 250 Vdc The system base frequency is either 50 Hz or 60 Hz The T PRO 4000 is available in a standard 3U rack model or as 4U model with an optional I O board as described above All of the above options must be specified at the time of ordering T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications 2 1 Introduction This chapter discusses setting up and communicating with the T PRO relay in cluding the following Power supply nter Range Instrumentation Group time codes IRIG B time input Commu
173. active this coil locks al coil input and holding register readings simultaneously at their present values When inactive coil input and holding register values will read their most recently available state Channel Type Address Value Hold Readings Read Write 01 0000 Readings update nor mal inactive FF00 Hold readings active Preset Single Registers Function Code 06 Channel Address Value Scaled Up By Event Messages Control See Below for details of use Refresh event list 40769 No Data required N A Acknowledge the current 40770 No Data required N A event and get the next event Get the next event without 40771 No Data required N A acknowledge Diagnostic Subfuctions Function Code 08 Return Query Data Subfuction 00 This provides an echo of the submitted message Restart Comm Option Subfunction 01 This restarts the Modbus communication process Force Listen Only Mode Subfunction 04 mand No response is returned IED enters Listen Only Mode This mode can only be exited by the Restart Comm Option com Report Slave ID Funciton Code 17 0x11 A fixed response is returned by the IED including system model version and issue numbers Channel Type Bytes Values Model Number Read Only 0 and 1 OXfAO 4000 decimal Version Number Read Only 2and 3 Version Number Issue Number Read Only 4
174. ain the same 2 operating phases on both sides of the transformer We demonstrate the use of our Net Angle Table NAT and Single Phase Se lection Tables SPST to determine which phase or phases to inject to have complementary phases on either side of the transformer T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Our example transformer is HV Y0 Input1 and LV Delta 30 Input2 T PRO always nulls the angle on all inputs even if they are already 0 since it also needs to eliminate zero sequence e Lookup Input1 in our NAT and find the net angle in Column 5 we find that it is 0 Lookup Input 2 in our NAT and find the net angle in Column 5 we find that it is 30 First we will obtain two operating phases on Input1 and then we ll obtain the exact same phases on Input2 We can arbitrarily choose to obtain any two Operating phases we will choose A B 1 e AZ0 amp BZ180 Determine Input 1 Injection Input 1 net angle is 0 same as 360 so we will start systematically by looking first in left column of SPST Table 7 2 Operating current if you inject only phase A We find the 0 connection in row xii The right column states that if we inject Phase A at 0 we get Operating Phase A0 This is good because phase A is one of the Operating phases we have chosen to obtain to get A B The proof of our SPST 7 2 result is found as stated in the header of in t
175. ames 1to9 And Optional 10 to 20 User defined 6 12 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Output Contacts Output Contact Names Output 1 Out Spare 1 Output 2 Out Spare2 OO Output 3 Out Spare 3 Output 4 Out Spare4 O Output 5 Out Spare 5 Output 5 Out Spare 6 Output 7 Out Spare 7 Output 8 Out Spares Output 9 Out Spareg Output 10 Out Spare 10 Output 11 OutSpared1 i Output 12 Out Spare12 OO Output 13 Out Spare 13 Output 14 Out Spare 14 Figure 6 7 Output Contacts Define meaningful names for the output contacts Table 6 6 Output Contact Names Outputs 1 to 14 And Optional 15 to 21 Usofgofn d D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 13 6 Offliner Settings Software Virtual Inputs Virtual Input Names 1 Virtual Input 1 11 virtual input 11 24 Virtual Input 21 2 Virtualinput2 42 Virtualinputi2 22 Virualmpu22 3 Virtual Input 3 13 virtual input 13 23 Virtual Input 23 4 virtual Input 4 14 virtual input 14 24 Virtual Input 24 5 Virtual Input 5 15 virtual input 15 25 Virtual Input 25 6 Virtual Input 6 16 virtual input 16 26 Virtual Input 26 7 Virtualinput o 47 Virtualinput17 o Virtualinput27 8 Virtual Input 8 18 Virtual Input 18 28 Virtual Input 28 9 Virtual Input 9 18 virtual input 19 29 Virtual Input 29 10 Virtual Input 10 20 virtual i
176. ance Protection Function Test Guide shows a summary of the process used to calculate the nominal base currents from Equations 22 on page 7 43 and 23 on page 7 43 In our example the secondary base current on each side of the transformer 1 004 A Transformer Rating 100 MVA Wye 0 High Side 230 kV Reference 0j Primary Base 251 Amps CT Ratio 250 1 Calculate Secondary Base 251A 250 1 004A CT Delta Factor 1 0 wye Base x CT Delta Factor 1 004 x 1 0 1 004 A Base Value Delta 30 Low Side 115 kV For through fault Primary Base 30 180 150j 502 Amps CT Ratio 500 1 Calculate Secondary Base 502 500 1 004A CT Delta Factor 1 0 wye Base x CT Delta Factor 1 004 x 1 0 1 004 A Base Value Figure 7 32 Summary of Calculations for Nominal Load Condition Base Current Calculation Details for Each Winding Using Equations 22 and 23 on page 7 43 High Voltage Side 24 KVA 100000 Tp op os 2514 BasePri B x 230 NG x 230 The primary base currents are converted to secondary amps for testing the relay 1 25 T vBaseSec B Tery BasePri amp CT pentaFactor amp CTRatio 1 251 x 10x 1 0044 E 7 44 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Low Voltage Side KVA 100000 _ 26 502A I z BasePri B SEV B x115 1 27 I LVBasePri
177. anel display Terminal mode for maintenance and firmware upgrade Relay Control Panel D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 3 1 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 4 Front Panel Display 3 2 The intuitive menu system gives access to all settings fault logs metering and statuses 16 Status Target LEDs LCD Screen 6 Push Buttons USB Port 150 Ethernet Port 119 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display The LCD screen displays the following metering parameters HV LV amp TV Residual current magnitude and angle 310 derived values REF 87N Operating amp Restraining current for all the windings HV REF Operating Current LV REF Operating Current TV REF Operating Current HV REF Restraint Current LV REF Restraint Current TV REF Restraint Current 3 phase apparent power MVA 3ph Power factor pf 3ph All sequence voltages All sequence currents in all the windings Single phase real power reactive power apparent power Power factor 2nd amp 5th harmonic current value for all the current inputs Directional status of 51 67 51N 67N amp 46 51 67 The metering display in LCD screen has a resolution ofthree decimals for both measured and calculated analog values The LCD screen can display analog values both in primary or secondary val ues T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 3 Using the IED Getting Start ed Table 3 2 T PRO Front Panel HMI Menu
178. arm 27 1 Alarm 27 2 Alarm Open _ 67 Trip Open 87N HV Trip 24 INV A 60 51A Open 51N Alarm THD Alarm Open Amb Alarm TopOil Alarm TOEWS trip Open 49 1Trip 81 1 81 3 50N Trip Open 50Trip Open 50BF 67 Alarm Open 59 Trip Open Ft Alarm Spare 19 Open _ Spare 20 Open Spare21 TESTE TH Analog A10 IRA Harmonics A Trend D43 A Extemal A Logic 1 A Logic 2 A Prolosic Outputs A Grouplogic AA Viral f Metering o Zoom Leve EMM Freeze Close Main Menu Config Mar Metering Relay Control Panel v1 3 Current Relay TPRO T PRO4000 Connected Figure 7 23 Output Contacts 7 30 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 2 Enable all winding connections as follows Winding CT PT Connections Transformer Nameplate Voltage Input Connection HV Ly TY Voltage kV 230 0 115 0 13 8 PT Turns Ratio 2000 0 1 Connection v v v Location HV Phase deg 7 s wire lie A Phase ajoe zijo z Current Input Connection CT CT Phase CT Turns Current Inputs winding Connection deg Ratio 1 External Input meui iv Tv zo rl 100m xl Input2 lv v zv 2 200 fme Input 3 TV v s fo 00m xl Input 4 NC I vio rf 450 0 mones ss v meus Nc Tv lo 4000 00 me Neutral CT Turns Ratio 1 Input 54 HY 100 0 Input 5B LV 00 0 Input 5C TV 200 0 Figure 7 24 Current Input and Winding
179. assis Optional 48 110 125 or 220 250 Vdc nominal externally wetted Isolation 2 KV optical isolation External Input Turn on Voltage 48 Vdc range 27 to 40 Vdc 125 Vdc 75 to 100 Vdc 250 Vdc 150 to 200 Vdc 60 to 80 of nominal Specified voltages are over full ambient temperature range Output Relays contacts 14 programmable outputs 3U chassis and 1 relay inoperative contact N C 21 programmable outputs 4U chassis and 1 relay inoperative contact N C Externally wetted Make 30 A as per IEEE C37 90 Carry 8A Break 0 9 A at 125 Vdc resistive 0 35 A at 250 Vdc resistive Virtual Inputs 30 Virtual Inputs Interface amp Communication Front Display 240 x 128 pixels graphics LCD Front Panel Indicators 16 LEDs 11 programmable and 5 fixed Target 11programmable Relay Func tional IRIG B Functional Service Required Test Mode Alarm Front User Interface USB port and 100BASE T Ethernet port Full Speed USB 2 0 RJ 45 Rear User Interface LAN Port 1 100BASE copper or optical 1300 nm LAN Port 2 100BASE optical 1300 nm Two Serial RS 232 ports to 115 kbd Copper RJ 45 100BASE T Optical 100BASE FX Multimode ST style connector Com port can support external modem Internal Modem 33 6 Kbps V 32 bis Optional internal modem Appendix A 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix A IED Specifications SC
180. ata for the logical node D50NHVPIOCAof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50NHVPIOC4 ST Op general 50N HV Trip T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation DS0NLVPIOCS This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSONLVPIOCSof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50NLVPIOC55STSOpSgeneral 50N LV Trip D50NTVPIOC6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSONTVPIOC6of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50NTVPIOC65STSOpSgeneral 50N TV Trip D51HVPTOC1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51HVPTOC lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D51HVPTOC1 ST Str general 51 HV Alarm D51HVPTOC1 ST Str dirGeneral 51 HV Direction set to unknown D51HVPTOC1 ST Op general 51 HV Trip DSILVPTOC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51LVPTOC2 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D51LVPTOC2 ST Str general 51 LV Alarm D51LVPTOC2 ST Str dirGeneral 51 LV Direction set to unknown D51LVPTOC2 ST Op general 51 LV Trip T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 31 Appendix Q 32 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D51TVPTOC3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51TVPTOC3 of the logical device Protection Data Nam
181. ation Wiring aaa 8 1 Appendix A IED Specifications A 1 Frequency Element Operating Time Curves A 6 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges B 1 Appendix C Hardware Description C 1 Appendix D Event Messages cccccseeeseeeeeeeeeees D 1 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol E 1 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile F 1 viii T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Table of Contents Appendix G Mechanical Drawings G 1 Appendix H Rear Panel Drawings H 1 Appendix AC Schematic Drawing l 1 Appendix J DC Schematic Drawing J 1 Appendix K Function Logic Diagram K 1 Appendix L Current Phase Correction Table L 1 Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation M 1 Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature CAlCUIALION METTE N 1 Appendix O Temperature Probe Connections O 1 Appendix P Failure Modes 070000222222s0 P 1 P onlel nas EM aa P 1 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Q 1 Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS M T Q 1 Data Mapping Specifications 00 000000 a Q 9 Index pdt eee eee ero D e a Fade reader ed eed
182. aw offset Scaling is not applied to Floating point variations since they are already transmitted in engineering units c Resolution is the smallest change that may be detected in the value due to quantization errors and is given in the units shown in the previous column This parameter does not represent the accuracy of the measure ment d Maximal values are calculated as 2 Configured Nominal Multiplier for voltage channels and as 40 Configured Nominal Multiplier for current channels see Note 2 above for the nominal definitions Appendix F 28 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 4 Octet String Points 2 4 4 Event reporting mode If configurable Capabilities Current Value list methods Only most recent I All events 2 4 2 Octet Strings Included in Class 0 response Always k Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Based on point Index add column to table below 2 4 3 Definition of Octet String Point List Fixed list shown in table below Configurable current list may be shown in table below Other explain Used for Event Log access as described below D02705R01 21 Object 110 and 111 are Octet String Object used to provide access to the Event Log text of the relay Object 110 always contains the most recent event in the relay Object 111 1s the corresponding change event object As stated in the DNP specifications
183. be 1 4 4 Self Address Support Yes only allowed if configurable NA using address OxFFFC No 1 4 5 Sends Confirmed User Always T PRO Offliner Data Frames Sometimes explain to disable set Never Data Link Time I Configurable either always or never out to 0 1 4 6 Data Link Layer None 500 Confirmation Timeout Fixedat ms i Configurable range 0 to 2 000 ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 4 4 Maximum Data Link Never Retries 3 Retries Fixed at 3 Configurable range to Configurable selectable from cd Configurable other describe 1 4 8 Maximum number of x Fixed at 292 292 octets Transmitted in a Configurable range to Data Link Frame Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 4 9 Maximum number of x Fixed at 292 292 octets that can be Configurable range to Received in a Data Link Configurable selectable ffrom cd Frame Configurable other describe D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 7 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 5 Application Layer Current Value If configurable same control request list methods 1 5 1 Maximum number of Bd Fixed at 2048 2048 octets Transmitted in an Configurable range to Application Layer Configurable selectable from Fragment other than Configurable other describe File Transfer 1 5 2 Maximum number of Fixed at
184. bled Tp Out 13 50HV 310 7 Out 8 51NHV Enabled 34 51HV 310 Figure 7 11 Logic Neutral Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent 50N 51N 50N and 51N Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor for pickup 51N Alarm 3 Apply one phase current to the T PRO terminals Ph N 324 325 1 8 A note I5 A is the input for HV neutral 4 Slowly ramp the current up At 1 95 to 2 05 A expect 2 00 A 51N Alarm High 5 Continue to raise current At 4 90 to 5 10 A expect 5 00 A 50N Trip High 6 Turn currents off T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 51N Alarm Low 50N Trip Low 51N HV Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 51N Trip Contact Output Contact 3 in our settings 2 Set timer start from one phase 0 0 amp to 8 00 A transition This equates to 4x pickup Time Delay 7 TMS p 5 0 0243 p20 F 5 0 0243 GRE zoos P C nitip 1 4 1 B 3 End of 50N 51N test 67 Directional Settings Time 67 Pickup 1 2 per unit Overcurrent Alpha 180 This is the positive sequence current angle start point with Test respect to positive sequence voltage angle Beta 180 This is the operating Window In this case the 67 element should operate between Alpha to Alpha Beta 180 to 180
185. bled 50BF 4 Disabled 50BF 5 Disabled 50 HV Disabled 51 HV Disabled 50 LV Disabled 51 LV Disabled 50 TV Disabled 51 TV Disabled 51ADP Disabled 50N HV Disabled 51N HV Disabled 50N LV Disabled 51N LV Disabled 50N TV Disabled 51N TV Disabled 59 1 Disabled 59 2 Disabled 67 Disabled THD Disabled Through Fault Monitor Disabled 87 Differential 87 Disabled lOmin 0 30 pu 0 10 to 1 00 Input 1 0 75 A Input 2 0 75 A Input 3 0 75 A Input 4 N A D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 7 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Input 5 N A IRs 5 00 pu 1 00 to 50 00 Si 30 00 Yo 6 00 to 100 00 S2 100 00 30 00 to 200 00 High Current Setting 10 00 pu 0 90 to 100 00 12 Cross Blocking Enabled 12 2nd fund Ratio 0 20 0 05 to 1 00 15 Disabled 5th I fund Ratio 0 30 0 05 to 1 00 87N Neutral Differential 87N HV Disabled lOmin 0 30 pu 0 10 to 1 00 lOmin 0 75 A IRs 5 00 pu 1 00 to 50 00 S1 30 00 6 00 to 100 00 S2 100 00 30 00 to 200 00 Neutral CT Turns Ratio 100 00 1 1 00 to 50000 00 87N LV Disabled lOmin 0 30 pu 0 10 to 1 00 lOmin 0 75 A IRs 5 00 pu 1 00 to 50 00 S1 30 00 6 00 to 100 00 S2 100 00 30 00 to 200 00 Neutral CT Turns Ratio 200 00 1 1 00 to 50000 00 87N TV Disabled lOmin 0 30 pu 0 10 to 1 00 lOmin 6 28 A IRs 5 00 pu 1 00 to 50 00 S1 30 00 Yo 6 00 to 100 00 S2 100 00 Yo
186. c 20 ProLogic 20 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 21 ProLogic 21 ProLogic 21 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 22 ProLogic 22 ProLogic 22 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 23 ProLogic 23 ProLogic 23 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt
187. c Magnitude 40261 kV 10 Vc Angle 40262 degrees 10 Voltage V1 40263 kV 10 11 positive 40264 A 0 1 P 40265 MW 0 01 Q 40266 Mvar 0 01 11a Magnitude 40267 A 0 1 I1a Angle 40268 Degrees 10 11b Magnitude 40269 A 0 1 11b Angle 40270 Degrees 10 11c Magnitude 40271 A 0 1 lic Angle 40272 Degrees 10 I2a Magnitude 40273 A 0 1 I2a Angle 40274 Degrees 10 I2b Magnitude 40275 A 0 1 I2b Angle 40276 Degrees 10 I2c Magnitude 40277 A 0 1 I2c Angle 40278 Degrees 10 13a Magnitude 40279 A 0 1 13a Angle 40280 Degrees 10 I3b Magnitude 40281 A 0 1 I3b Angle 40282 Degrees 10 13c Magnitude 40283 A 0 1 13c Angle 40284 Degrees 10 14a Magnitude 40285 A 0 1 14a Angle 40286 Degrees 10 14b Magnitude 40287 A 0 1 14b Angle 40288 Degrees 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol 14c Magnitude 40289 A 0 1 14c Angle 40290 Degrees 10 I5a Magnitude 40291 A 0 1 I5a Angle 40292 Degrees 10 15b Magnitude 40293 A 0 1 15b Angle 40294 Degrees 10 15c Magnitude 40295 A 0 1 15c Angle 40296 Degrees 10 HVa Magnitude 40297 A 0 1 HVa Angle 40298 Degrees 10 HVb Magnitude 40299 A 0 1 HVb Angle 40300 Degrees 10 HVc Magnitude 40301 A 0 1 HVc Angle 40302 Degrees 10 LVa Magnitude 40303 A 0 1 LVa Angle 40304 Degrees 10 LVb Magnitude 40305 A 0 1 LVb Angle 40306 Degrees 10 LVc Magnitude 40307 A 0 1 LVc Ang
188. can be disregarded in the context of this test Since the relay sees only 0 577 times the injected current on the strongest phase s the single phase correction factor in this case is 1 0 577 1 73 That is for the T PRO to see 0 30 A on the operating phase you need to inject 0 30 A x 1 73 0 52 A D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 37 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide LV 87 lOmin Single Phase Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 87 Trip 3 Connect current source to T PRO terminals 306 307 Slowly ramp the current up At 0 51 to 0 53 A expect 0 52 A 87 Trip High 4 Turn current off 87 Trip Low 5 End of LV 87 IO min Single Phase Test 87 2nd Settings Harmonic e 12 Cross Blocking Enabled Restraint Test 2 2nd Harmonic 0 20 per unit 2nd Harmonic Restraint if gt 20 of fundamental current 2nd Harmonic Restraint Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor for pickup 87 Trip 87 Restraint 3 Apply parallel currents to Terminals 300 302 Jumper 301 303 as fol lows Source 1 60 Hz 1 0 A 20 Terminals 300 302 Source 2 120 Hz 0 40 A Z0 paralleled with Source 1 into Termi nals 300 302 Observe 87 TRIP Low 87 Restraint
189. ccess or 61850 SCADA access or DNP SCADA access through Ethernet LAN Rear Panel 121 BNC receptacle IRIG B Interface Modulated or un modulated 330 ohm impedance Rear Panel 122 RS 232 DCE female DB9 Used for Modbus or DNP SCADA communication Default Setting 19 200 baud O71 odd parity 7 data bits 1 stop Rear Panel 123 RS 232 DCE female DB9 Used for User interface access through a direct serial connection Default Setting 9600 baud N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit User interface access through an external modem The optional ERLPhase Modem Adapter converts this port to a Data Terminal Equipment DTE to simplify connection to an external modem Default Setting 19 200 baud O71 odd parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications Table 2 5 Signal connections to pins on RS 232 Relay Port Signal Name Direction PC Relay Pin on the Relay Port DCD a 1 RxD a 2 TxD 3 DTR 4 Common 5 DSR a 6 RTS 7 CTS a 8 No connection 9 Notes Relay is DCE PC is DTE Pins 1 and 6 are tied together internal to the relay Table 2 6 Cable Pin Connections Male DB 9 Cable End for Relay Port Female DB 9 Cable End for Computer Port Pin on Cable Pin on Cable 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 21 2 Setup and Communications 2 22
190. ce current IMSQI2 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f I2 negative sequence current IMSQI2 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f I2 zero sequence current IMSQI3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMSQI3 of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMSQI3 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f I3 positive sequence current IMSQI3 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f I3 negative sequence current IMSQI3 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f I3 zero sequence current T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 19 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation IMSQ14 This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMSQI4 of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMSQI4 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f I4 positive sequence current IMSQI4 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f I4 negative sequence current IMSQI4 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f 14 zero sequence current IMSQIS This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMSQIS of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMSQI5 MX SeqA c1 cVal mag f I5 positive sequence current IMSQI5 MX SeqA c2 cVal mag f 15 negative sequence current IMSQI5 MX SeqA c3 cVal mag f I5 zero sequence current VoltQI6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node VoltMSQI6of the logical device Measurements Data Name Description VoltMSQI6 MX SeqV c1 cVa
191. characteristic of the function Note that the current used in the 67 function may be the uncompensated Wye currents or Delta Compensated currents for details see Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T PRO functions on page 4 8 Table 4 25 67 Directional Overcurrent Setting Functions 67 Pickup Minimum level that operates device 67 Curve Type Sets the type of curve TMS Factor for altering inverse time curve A B p Parameters for defining the curve TR Factor for altering the reset time Alpha Defines the starting angle for the trip region Beta Defines the size of the trip region in degrees offset from alpha Table 4 26 67 Directional Overcurrent Setting Ranges 67 Enable disable Curve Type See Table 4 11 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 22 Pickup pu 0 05 to 5 00 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 001 to 1000 0 B 0 00 to 10 00 p 0 01 to 10 00 TR seconds 0 10 to 100 00 Alpha degrees 179 9 0 to 180 0 Beta degrees 0 1 to 360 0 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 67N Directional Earth Fault 4 36 The 67N directional earth fault function in T PRO can be also applied to either the HV or LV winding whichever has the Potential Transformer connected to it This function operates based on the same principle as the 67 directional overcurrent function except the pickup level is bas
192. connected winding I5B for LV I5C for tertiary Settings MVAs 100 HV kV 230 kV LI LI TO in 0 3 per unit IRs 5 0 per unit Slope 1 2096 Slope 2 4096 HV CT Ratio 250 1 Neutral CT Ratio 100 1 As shown in Figure 7 30 on page 7 41 map the 87N HV Trip to Out 6 in the Output Matrix 1A 11B 1C I2A 12B I12C I3A I3B I3C 14A 14B 4C ISA ISB I5C CT Ratio Mismatch Correction Input 1 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction Input 2 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction Input 3 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction Input 4 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction Input 5 IOzIA IB C IN IR IA IB IC IN 2 IOHV IOLV IOTV IO 87N HV Trip ong 87N LV Trip 87N TVTrip TR IRHV IRLV IRTV Figure 7 30 Logic Neutral Differential 87N T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 41 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 87N MCF Calculation i 00 MagnitudeCorrectionFactor MCF Fhasge eH Bue 2 50 NeutralCTRatio 100 Phase Winding 87N IOmin Pickup Calculation Expect Q1 nne BE o terme ME S Dena eqq N3xkV CTR x J3x230 250 Neutral Winding 87N lOmin Pickup Calculation Expect for I5A HV winding side Q2 Onin YA s ud cmn Paris LYN eos aya J3xkV CTR J3x230 100 Note Repeat previous calculation for LV and TV winding side and re member I5B 326 327
193. create your Net Angle Table to obtain the net angle for each Input For each input in your NAT go to column 5 and find the matching connection angle in Table 7 6 Net Angle Table The diagrams show the test connections for every angle possibility Table 7 6 Net Angle Table also includes the Single Phase Magnitude Correction Factor either 1 0 or N3 to compensate and adapt your calculated 3 phase currents for single phase testing In our test example Input is a 0 connection and Input2 is a 30 connection On Input1 we would use Table 7 6 Net Angle Table connection number 12 and on Input2 we would use Table 7 6 connection number 11 Note that all of the connections in Table 7 7 on page 7 69 are for A B current into the transformer Since 87 Slope testing simulates an external fault you will need to add 180 to one of the current sources to simulate a through fault Itis very important to observe the location of the polarity marks shown in Ta ble 7 6 for the current sources and T PRO inputs To obtain other test phases B C and C A move all of the connections in a clockwise rotation For example to test phases B C in Table 7 7 Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions for A B connection 11 move your test connec tion from BZ180 to CZ180 Table 7 7 Single Phase Test Connection Suggestions for A B 0 Connection 4 60 Connection AC T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV T PRO 4000 Terminals HV LV or TV Single Phase
194. cription 1 2 3 or none maximal 33 14c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 34 5a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 35 15a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 36 5b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 37 I5b Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 38 5c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 39 ISc Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 40 HVIA Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 41 HV IA Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 42 HV IB Magnitude 2 18 000 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 43 HV IB Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 44 HV IC Magnitude 2 18 000 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 45 HVIC Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 46 LV IB Magnitude 2 18 000 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 47 LVIA Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 48 LVb Current Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 49 LV IB Angle 2 0 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 50 LVIC Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 51 LVIC Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 52 TV IA Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 53 TV IA Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0
195. ction Factor V3 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 71 8 Installation 8 1 Introduction This section deals with the installation of the T PRO relay when first delivered The section covers the physical mounting AC and DC wiring and the Commu nication wiring 8 2 Physical Mounting Standard 3U 4U The relay is 3 rack units or 5 25 inches high and approximately 12 9 inches deep The standard relay is designed for a 19 inch rack A complete mechani cal drawing is shown for details see Mechanical Drawings in Appendix G To install the relay the following is needed 19 inch rack 4 10 screws The relay is 4 rack units or 7 0 inches high and approximately 12 25 inches deep The relay is designed for a 19 inch rack A complete mechanical drawing is shown for details see Mechanical Drawings in Appendix G To install the relay the following is needed 19 inch rack 4 10 screws 8 3 AC and DC Wiring For details see AC Schematic Drawing in Appendix I and DC Schematic Drawing in Appendix J 8 4 Communication Wiring EIA 232 D02705R01 21 The relay s serial ports Ports 122 and 123 are configured as EIA RS 232 Data Communications Equipment DCE devices with female DB9 connectors This allows them to be connected directly to a PC serial port with a standard straight through male to female serial cable Shielded cable is recommended for pin out see Communication Port Details on page 2 20
196. ctive D50BF Input5Trip1 848 0 Off inactive 1 On active D50BF Input5Trip2 849 0 Off inactive 1 On active IRIG B Signal Loss 850 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic11 851 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic12 852 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic13 853 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic14 854 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic15 855 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic16 856 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic17 857 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic18 858 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic19 859 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic20 860 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic21 861 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic22 862 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic23 863 0 Off inactive 1 On active ProLogic24 864 0 Off inactive 1 On active 67N Trip 865 0 Off inactive 1 On active 67N Alarm 866 0 Off inactive 1 On active 67 Direction 867 0 Off inactive 1 On active 67N Direction 868 0 Off inactive 1 On active Appendix E 4 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Read Input Status Function Code 02 Channel Address Value External Input 1 10001 0 Off inactive On active External Input 2 10002 0 Off inactive On active External Input 3 10003 0 Off i
197. ctive Active 89 TOEWS Trip Inactive Active 90 ProLogic1 Inactive Active 91 ProLogic2 Inactive Active 92 ProLogic3 Inactive Active 93 ProLogic4 Inactive Active 94 ProLogic5 Inactive Active 95 ProLogic6 Inactive Active 96 ProLogic7 Inactive Active 97 ProLogic8 Inactive Active 98 ProLogic9 Inactive Active 99 ProLogic10 Inactive Active 100 81 1 Trip Inactive Active OR of 81 1 OF UF and RC Trips 101 81 2 Trip Inactive Active OR of 81 2 OF UF and RC Trips D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 15 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 102 81 3 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81 3 OF UF and RC Trips 103 81 4 Trip 1 Inactive Active OR of 81 4 OF UF and RC Trips 104 27 1 Trip 1 Inactive Active 105 27 2 Trip 1 Inactive Active 106 I I t Alarm 1 Inactive Active 107 24DEF 2 Trip 1 Inactive Active 108 59 1 Trip 1 Inactive Active 109 59 2 Trip 1 Inactive Active 110 50BF Input1 Trip1 1 Inactive Active 111 50BF Input1 Trip2 1 Inactive Active 112 50BF Input2 Trip1 1 Inactive Active 113 50BF Input2 Trip2 1 Inactive Active 114 50BF Input3 Trip1 1 Inactive Active 115 50BF Input3 Trip2 1 Inactive Active 116 50BF Input4 Trip1 1 Inactive Active 117 50BF Input4 Trip2 1 Inactive Active 118 50BF Input5 Trip1 1 Inactive Active 119 50BF Input5 Trip2 1 Inactive Active 120 50BF Initiated HV 1 Inactive Active 121 50B
198. ctive power metering data Reactive power metering data Apparent power metering data Power factor metering data Total Active Power metering data Total Reactive Power meter ing data Total Apparent Power meter ing data Average Power factor meter ing data Frequency metering data Measurements IMSQI1 Measurement 11 sequence metering data Measurements IMSQI2 Measurement I2 sequence metering data Measurements IMSQI3 Measurement I3 sequence metering data Measurements IMSQI4 Measurement 14 sequence metering data Measurements IMSQI5 Measurement 15 sequence metering data Measurements VoltMSQ16 Measurement voltage sequence metering data Protection D24DEFPVPH1 Volts per Hz D24DEF 1 24DEF 1 Trip Protection D24DEFPVPH2 Volts per Hz D24DEF 2 24DEF 2 Trip Protection D24InvPVPH3 Volts per Hz D24INV 24INV Alarm and Trip Protection D27 1PTUV1 Undervoltage D27 1 27 1 Trip Protection D27 2PTUV2 Undervoltage D27 2 27 2 Trip Protection D49PTTR1 Thermal overload D49 1 49 1 Operates Protection D49PTTR2 Thermal overload D49 2 49 2 Operates Protection D49PTTR3 Thermal overload D49 3 49 3 Operates Protection D49PTTR4 Thermal overload D49 4 49 4 Operates Protection D49PTTR5 Thermal overload D49 5 49 5 Operates Protection D49PTTR6 Thermal overload D49 6 49 6 Operates Protection D49PTTR7 Thermal overload D49 7 49 7 Operates Protection D49PTTR8 Thermal overload D49 8 49 8 Operates Protection D49PTTR9 Thermal overload D49 9 49 9 Operates Protection D49
199. culation For 65 C rise transformers the normal hot spot temperature is 110 C There fore some value above this is appropriate for the start of Excessive Loss of Life calculation initiation Select 125 C Loss of Life Trip Setting Select 2 days as the setting This in combination with the above allows over loads similar to those recommended in the Standard C57 91 1995 A study for this transformer shows that for these settings a sudden overload will trip due to hot spot temperature for times less than about 15 minutes and due to excessive loss of life for times greater than about 15 minutes The soft ware program to assist in this kind of study is available from ERLPhase Table 4 8 TOEWS Transformer Overload Early Warning System Setting Ranges TOEWS Enable Disable THS Temperature Hot Spot Trip Setting degrees Celsius 70 0 to 200 0 THS to Start LOL Loss of Life Calculation degrees Celsius 70 0 to 200 0 LOL Loss of Life Trip Setting days 0 5 to 100 0 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 19 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 24 The T PRO provides 3 overexcitation elements one inverse time 24INV and Overexcitation the other 2 are definite time 24DEF 1 and 24DEF 2 24INV provides inverse time overexcitation over fluxing protection due to high system voltages or frequency deviations The operating quantity is the ratio of voltage to frequency because flux is proportional to the voltage an
200. d in versely proportional to the frequency The element uses the positive sequence voltage and compares the per unit pos itive sequence voltage magnitude to the per unit positive sequence frequency 24INV delay characteristic is defined as ma K 11 E Pickup where T is the tripping time in seconds V is the positive sequence voltage in per unit fis the positive sequence frequency in per unit K is a parameter which raises or lowers the inverse time curve Pickup is the user settable minimum operating value of the V f ratio 24DEF 1 and 24DEF2 Definite Time Delay Overexcitation protection are sim ilar to the 24INV except the operating time delay is definite An application ex ample of this function could be to trip a capacitor bank if its controller has failed Table 4 9 24 Overexcitation Setting Functions K Factor for altering inverse time curve Pickup Minimum level that operates device 24INV Reset Time Time for 24INV to reset after element has dropped out Pickup 24DEF Minimum level that operates device 24DEF 1 24DEF2 Pickup Delay Operating time for 24DEF 4 20 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 24INV Table 4 10 24 Overexcitation Setting Ranges Enable Disable K 0 10 to 100 00 Pickup per unit 1 00 to 2 00 Reset Time seconds 0 05 to 9999 99 24DEF1 24DEF2 Enab
201. dary Base 1 00 A HV Minimum Operate IO nin x HV Secondary Base 0 3 x 1 00 A 0 30 A LV Minimum Operate IO nin x LV Secondary Base 0 3 x 1 00 A 0 30A 87 HV 3 Phase Minimum Operate Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt Logic 2 or Front HMI Metering gt Logic gt Logic Protections 2 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 87 Trip 3 Prepare to apply balanced 3 phase currents to the T PRO terminals as fol lows Ph A 300 301 Z0 Ph B 302 303 Z 120 Ph C 304 305 7 120 4 Simultaneously and slowly ramp all 3 currents up At 0 29 to 0 31 A expect 0 30 A 87 Trip High 5 Run the same test on the LV side Since MMCF is 1 0 LV pickup will be the same as the HV pickup 0 30 A 6 End of 3 Phase Minimum Operate test Single Phase Test of 87 HV Minimum Operate To test the 87 single phase an additional Correction must be applied to com pensate for the T PRO zero sequence elimination To eliminate zero sequence and normalize the current angles of all inputs the T PRO uses the formulas in the Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 35 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 36 T PRO is a 3 phase relay but will operate on a phase by phase basis When the differential setting is exceeded on any one phase or more the 87 element will operate For simplicity calculate how much current each phase of the T PRO will see by u
202. declare support for at least one Send GOOSE Message or Send GSSE Message c9 shall declare support if TP association is available Table Q 14 Transmission of sampled value model SVC Clause 16 Multicast SVC S45 SendMSVMessage MC C10 NO S46 GetMSVCBValues TP O NO S47 SetMSVCBValues TP O NO Unicast SVC S48 SendUSVMessage TP C10 NO S49 GetUSVCBValues TP O NO S50 SetUSVCBValues TP O NO C10 shall declare support for at least one Send MSV Message or Send USV Message T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 7 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Table Q 15 control 17 5 1 S51 Select TP O NO S52 Select with value TP O NO S53 Cancel TP O NO S54 Operate TP M YES S55 Command Termination TP O NO S56 Time Activated Operate TP O NO Table 2 16 File Transfer Clause 20 S57 GetFile TP M YES S58 SetFile TP O NO S59 DeleteFile TP O YES S60 GetFileAttributeValues TP M YES Table Q 17 Time 5 5 T1 Time resolution of Internal clock 10 msec Nearest negative power of 2 in seconds T2 TimeAccuracy of Internal clock 10 msec TO T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T3 Supported Time Stamp resolution 10 msec Nearest value of 2 n in seconds according to 5 5 3 7 3 3 n corre sponds to 7 Appendix Q 8 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Data Mapping Specifications T PRO Logical
203. del Options Ordering eese 1 6 2 Setup and Communications 2 1 INTOGDUCTION E 2 1 Power S pply i pasak a rh rete ue EE RR ane 2 1 IRIG B Time Input 1111 1a 2 2 Communicating with the T PRO Relay 2 3 USB ANN apr eia si oed e perii Bea iR DUE 2 4 Network Link ssssssse Hem 2 7 Direct Serial LINK asrni m 2 8 Modem Link icti o d eed ee ERES 2 10 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance S S 2 13 Firmware Update esses 2 16 Setting the Baud Rate eeeeeeeeeeenneeereeeeenrerrressenta 2 17 Accessing the Relay s SCADA Services 2 18 Communication Port Details ssssssss 2 20 3 Using the IED Getting Started 3 1 Introduction an a Ro e I REIR EU Rx EX EFT ERRARE 3 1 Start up Sequence ccc cceccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeseneness 3 1 Interfacing with the Relay eseeeeeeeeees 3 1 Front Panel Displ y o I EH rebate eins 3 2 Terminal Mode 111111117 nnns 3 7 Relay Control Panel 3 7 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 1 Protection and Recording Functions 4 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual vii Table of Contents PIOL OGG oto p d Dc B etude 4 43 Group OGIE TAN 4 45 Recording Functions anan ap aaa fester Hav io ga 4 46
204. device Protection Data Name Description D81PTOF4 ST Str general 81 4 O F Trip D81PTOF4 ST Str dirGeneral 81 4 OIF Direction set to unknown D81PTOF4 ST Op general 81 4 O F Trip D81PTUF1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTUF lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTUF1 ST Str general 81 1 U F Trip D81PTUF1 ST Str dirGeneral 81 1 U F Direction set to unknown D81PTUF1 ST Op general 81 1 U F Trip Appendix Q 37 Appendix Q 38 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D81PTUF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTUF2of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTUF2 ST Str general 81 2 U F Trip D81PTUF2 ST Str dirGeneral 81 2 U F Direction set to unknown D81PTUF2 ST Op general 81 2 U F Trip D81PTUF3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTUF3of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTUF3 ST Str general 81 3 U F Trip D81PTUF3 ST Str dirGeneral 81 3 U F Direction set to unknown D81PTUF3 ST Op general 81 3 U F Trip D81PTUF4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTUFAof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTUF4 ST Str
205. dlo dt gt dir dt dlo dt dir dt Figure 4 5 Rate Of Change Of Operating And Restraint Quantities D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 11 4 Protection Functions and Specifications All of the components of the T PRO differential function are summarized in Figure 4 6 Transformer Differential Protection Logical Overview Unrestrained Function I tU Norma au mY De Trip 2nd Harmonic Restraint 5th Harmonic Restraint Delta Phase 90j 4 9 T9 lo Figure 4 6 Transformer Differential Protection Logical Overview 4 12 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 87N Neutral Differential D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Neutral Differential protection 87N which is also called Restricted Earth Fault provides sensitive protection of the transformer or auto transformer for internal winding to ground faults The function is restricted to detecting ground faults only within the zone between by the CTs that define the 87N zone Since the phase differential 87 operates only on positive and negative se quence currents it may not be sensitive enough to detect all internal ground faults especially on the lower 1 3 of the transformer winding However the 87N operates on zero sequence current only and has good sensitivity for detect ing these faults To intentionally limit the current for winding to ground faults a ground resistor is often connected between the transform
206. dsheet available from ERL Phase Very stable temperature mA inputs and current inputs over a period of hours are necessary to get predictable and satisfactory timing test results 6 End of TOEWS test 7 26 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 59 Overvoltage Functional Test 59 Overvoltage 59 1 59 2 Iv Enabled V Enabled Gate Switch OR v Gate Switch AND bd Pickup 720 wv Pickup 720 y Pickup Delay 0 70 s Pickup Delay 0 80 s Figure 7 18 59 Functional Test Settings Gate Switch Setting Figure 7 19 Overvoltage Functional Test Settings and Logic mapped to Output 17 59 Test Procedure 1 In Relay Control Panel access relay access Metering Logic 2 Monitor the following elements for pickup 59 Trip 59 2 Trip Monitor contacts Output 17 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 27 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Fam Relay Control Panel Metering File Help 67 Trip 24INV Alarm 59N Alarm Self Check Fail 49 1 Operates 49 4 Operates 49 7 Operates 49 10 Operates TOEWS 15 Min 81 1 Trip 81 4 Trip 67 Alarm 24DEF Trip 1 60 Alarm Ambient Alarm 49 2 Operates 49 5 Operates 49 8 Operates 49 11 Operates TOEWS 30 Min 81 2 Trip 27 1 Trip LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW 24INV Trip 59N Trip THD Alarm Top Oil Alarm 49 3 Operates 49 6 Operates 49 9 Operates 49 12 Operates TOEWS Trip 81 3
207. e Description D51TVPTOC3 ST Str general 51 TV Alarm D51TVPTOC3 ST Str dirGeneral 51 TV Direction set to unknown D51TVPTOC3 ST Op general 51 TV Trip D51NHVPTOC4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D5 1NHVPTOC4of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D51NHVPTOC4 ST Str general 51N HV Alarm D51NHVPTOC4 ST Str dirGeneral 51N HV Direction set to unknown D51NHVPTOC4 ST Op general 51N HV Trip D51NLVPTOC5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DJ INLVPTOC50f the logical device Protection Data Name Description D51NLVPTOC5 ST Str general 51N LV Alarm D51NLVPTOC5 ST Str dirGeneral 51N LV Direction set to unknown D51NLVPTOC5 ST Op general 51N LV Trip T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual D51NTVPTOC6 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D5 INTVPTOCbof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D51NTVPTOC6 ST Str general 51N TV Alarm D51NTVPTOC6 ST Str dirGeneral 51N TV Direction set to unknown D51NTVPTOC6SSTSOpSgeneral 51N TV Trip D67PTOC7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67PTOC7of the logical device Protection Data Name Descript
208. e 4 14 Ambient Temperature Adaptation on page 29 If the ambient temperature signal is out of range the pickup of device 51HV reverts to the user set non adaptive value 51ADP Adaptive Overcurrent Cold Climates When the ambient temperature input probe is connected you can use the adap tive overcurrent function If 51 ADP function is enabled the 51HV pickup is affected by the ambient temperature input and the rate of loss of life setting val ue If this function is disabled the 51HV pickup is not affected If rate of loss of life is set to one and ambient temperature is 30 Celsius the pickup level of 51 will be 1 0 per unit Use the curves in Example 1 Loss of Life of Solid Insulation in Appendix M to change the 30 C pickup level The alarm function of 51HV indicates when the pickup threshold has been ex ceeded T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 29 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent 4 30 Set the rate of loss of life value to 1 0 The pickup values can be affected over the range 0 lt pickup 2 15 per unit No change in the overcurrent characteris tic takes place above 2 15 times pickup Since most fault coordination with other overcurrent relays occurs at fault levels above this value coordination is not usually affected by the adaptive nature of the 51 ADP function However check all specific applications If the ambient temperature input goes out of range with the adaptive func
209. e a rg A Temperature Scalinc SCADA Communication DNP Configuration Point Map Class Data SCADA Setting Summar Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting Protection Functions Settings Summary J output Matrix Name Relay Identification 187 Settings Version 87N 49 lgnore Serial Number C TOEWS Serial Number 124 Unit ID A 59N Nominal CT Secondary Current 027 Nominal System Frequency 150 Standard I O 181 Option JO O SOBF Comments o 50 51 Setting Name C SONIS1N Date Created Modified 158 3 Station Name 167 Station Number THD Alarm Location C Through Fault Mi Bank Name ProLogic Group Logic Output Matrix Analog Input Names Wl Settings Summary YA O Setting Group 2 Setting vB Setting Group 3 Setting vC Setting Group 4 Setting IA1 Setting Group 5 Setting 1B1 Setting Group 6 Setting IC1 O Setting Group 7 Setting A2 Setting Group 8 Setting IB2 Figure 6 22 Settings Summary T PRO 4000 User Manual T PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Symbol Value Unit Range 401 No TPRO 4000 000000 01 UnitID 5A 60 Hz 9 External Inputs and 14 Output Contacts Not Installed Comments Settings Name 2010 08 28 16 14 14 Station Name 1 Location Bank Name Voltage amp Voltage B Voltage C 181 IB1 IC1 14
210. e duration of each through fault the current peak RMS val ue and the accumulated It value of each phase during each through fault event The total number of the through faults and the total accumulated It values of each phase over the transformer life are also monitored The overall through fault monitor scheme is shown in the following figure Through Fault Monitor Enable Through Fault Event Initiation Rising Edge start Calculation of Through Fault Duration IA Peak IB Peak IC Peak Calculation stoped Clear reset gll the calculated IA IA t IB IB t IC IC t All the through fault through fault quantities so as quantities are ready to be ready for the next through fault kvent I Maximum Fault O stop Duration Allowed 30s I I I t Accumulation and Count Increment Through Fault Event Logging 2nd Harmonics Blocking Enabled 2nd Harmonics es BA Restraint Signal from Dev87 Total Accumulated IA IA t 2Limit Total Accumulated IB IB t Limit I I t Alarm Total Accumulated IC IC t 2Limit Figure 4 19 Overall Through Fault Monitor Scheme The through fault duration is defined as the time from when the input current Imax the maximum current amongst phase A B and C exceeds the pickup threshold to when I4 drops below the pickup threshold hysteresis Note that the maximum allowed through fault duration is 30 seconds this is to avoid the through fault event may
211. e nominal voltage at nominal frequency to the T PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V 7 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V Z 120 Ph N 333 4 Slowly ramp the 3 phase voltage up At 79 5 80 5 V expect 79 7 V 24INV Alarm High At 82 5 83 5 V expect 83 0 V 24DEF Trip High 5 Turn voltages off 24INV Alarm Low 24DEF Trip Low 24INV Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 24INV Trip Contact Output Contact 4 in our set tings 2 Set timer to start from 3 phase 0 0 V to 86 3 V transition this equates to 1 3 per unit 60 Hz Time Delay K T 0 1 2 91 men 5 Y pons 863 79687 001 NE Ex Ga 60 60 Where v is the per unit voltage fis the per unit frequency Vary either v or f In this example we re varying v only with fre quency fixed 60 Hz 1 0 per unit 3 End of 24 test D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 11 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 59N Zero Settings Sequence 59N 3Vp Pickup 75 V Overvoltage Time Curve IEC Standard Inverse 3Vo Test AS GA B 0 p 0 02 TMS 0 2 e As shown in Figure 7 8 on page 7 12 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix Map 59N Alarm to Out 2 Map 59N Trip to Out 6 Out 2 59N Enabled 74 Out 6 24VPOS Freq Figure 7 8 Logic Zero Sequence OverVoltage 59N 59N 3V0 Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic
212. e the transformer will trip correctly if energizing onto a fault Since the 2nd harmonic calculation is carried out on the internal zero se quence eliminated delta currents any single phase fault will produce predom inantly fundamental fault current in two phases thereby allowing the relay to trip correctly T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2nd Harmonics Restraint Signal D02705R01 21 37 IRA 30 of IOmin 37 IRB 30 of lOmin 4 Protection Functions and Specifications As shown in Figure 4 2 on page 4 3 the 2nd harmonic restraint signal is stretched for 5 milliseconds in the first cycle upon transformer energization This stretch timer prevents possible momentary reset of the 2nd harmonic blocking signal due to the current transition in the first cycle Note that this log ic only becomes active when the transformer is de energized or very lightly loaded for more than 10 seconds Device 37 Undercurrent 17 ms Transformer has 37 IRC 30 of lOmin been de energized 5ms Block 87 Figure 4 2 Second Harmonic Restraint Logic Over fluxing Restraint 5th Harmonic The presence of a significant amount of 5th harmonic current in a transformer is typical due to over fluxing caused by an overvoltage or low frequency con dition Overfluxing may produce unbalanced currents in the transformer that could cause a false differential current If 5th harmonic restrain
213. ead 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 80 1 Internal Indications Packet format 2 write 00 start stop 129 response index 7 110 0 Octet string 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 07 limited qty 111 0 Octet string event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 07 limited qty a l nm PM i X s m cl No Object function code only 13 cold restart 129 response No Object function code only 14 warm restart 129 response No Object function code only 23 delay meas 129 response D02705R01 21 Appendix G Mechanical Drawings P mu a paa B B B J B e B 5 amp B B noe 8 hal T amp TE e J q EO Wg i E ZTE j Db m i Eq Ei Figure G 1 Mechanical Drawing 3U D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 18 970 18 547 17 953 T PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY
214. ected method of de tecting breaker fail Breaker 52A contact 1f breaker auxiliary contact position is a selected method of detecting breaker fail 52A status can come from any of the Ex ternal Inputs or any ProLogic statement Time Delay 1 typically used for re trip attempt when its output is mapped to the breaker backup trip coil Time Delay 2 typically used to trip adjacent breakers in order to clear the fault Each of the 5 breaker fail element settings are independent of each other The Breaker Fail Initiate element for each breaker is determined by their asso ciation with the HV LV or TV winding in the Winding CT settings For ex ample if the breaker CT connected to Input 1 is from the HV transformer winding then Input 1 50BF function will be initiated by any inputs mapped to BFI HV column in the Output Matrix The 52A Breaker Status option if used looks for a 52A auxiliary contact status the assigned relay External Input A 52B contact could be used but it must be converted to a 52A by inverting the status in ProLogic and then using the Pro Logic output as the breaker 52A status Breaker Fail Initiating Element s From Output Matrix Current Detection Enable 1 Y T1 50BF Input 1 Trip L E T2 50BF Input 2 Trip Figure 4 17 Breaker Fail Logic Table 4 29 50BF Breaker Fail Setting Functions Current Detection Enable Enables breaker
215. ection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF10 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 5 Trip 2 CBFIHRBRF11 This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFIHRBRF1 lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description CBFIHRBRF 11 ST OpEx general Breaker Failure Initiation HV CBFIHRBRF12 This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFILRBRF12 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description CBFILRBRF12 ST OpEx general Breaker Failure Initiation LV CBIFITRBRF13 This section defines logical node data for the logical node CBFITRBRF 13 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description CBFITRBRF 13 ST OpEx general Breaker Failure Initiation TV T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 29 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 30 D50HVPIOCI This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOHV PIOC Iofthe logical device Protection Data Name Description D50HVPIOC1 ST Op general 50 HV Trip D50LVPIOC2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOLVPIOC2 ofthe logical device Protection Data Name Description D50LVPIOC2 ST Op general 50 LV Trip D50TVPIOC3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D50TVPIOC3 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50TVPIOC3 ST Op general 50 TV Trip D50NHVPIOCA This section defines logical node d
216. ed on the zero sequence cur rent of the corresponding winding in Amps Table 4 27 67N Directional Earth Fault Setting Functions 67N Pickup Minimum level that operates device 67N Curve Type Sets the type of curve TMS Factor for altering inverse time curve A B p Parameters for defining the curve TR Factor for altering the reset time Alpha Defines the starting angle for the trip region Beta Defines the size of the trip region in degrees offset from alpha Table 4 28 67N Directional Earth Fault Setting Ranges 67N Enable disable Curve Type See Table 4 11 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 22 Pickup A 0 05 to 10 00 for 1 A 0 25 to 50 00 for5A TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 001 to 1000 0 B 0 00 to 10 00 p 0 01 to 10 00 TR seconds 0 10 to 100 00 Alpha degrees 179 9 0 to 180 0 Beta degrees 0 1 to 360 0 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 50BF Breaker Fail D02705R01 21 A B C Imax 4 4 Current Pickup Setting 4 bu 52A Detection Enable 52A Status 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The T PRO has a breaker fail function available for each ofthe 5 sets of current inputs Each of the breaker fail functions are identical in design The breaker fail function consists of the following parts nitiating elements selected in the Output Matrix screen Overcurrent pickup level 1f current detection is a sel
217. emperature is calculated as a rise above the measured Top Oil temperature Those parameters not already defined for the equations are as follows AbH u ultimate hot spot rise over top oil in C Ay time varying hot spot rise over top oil in C A0TO U ultimate top oil rise over ambient in C A016 time varying top oil rise over ambient in C 0A ambient temperature in C Appendix N 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation Per Unit Load Steady state Function Time Dependance K w Hot Spot Steady state Function Time Dependance Temperature calculated 070 O O gt 91 Top Oil Temp Figure N 1 Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation Method Inputs per unit load and Ambient Temperature Per Unit Load Steady state Function Time Dependance K I w Hot Spot Temperature calculated Top Oil Temperature measured 6 TO Figure N 2 Block Diagram of Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation Method Inputs per unit load and Top Oil Temperature D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 3 Appendix O Temperature Probe Connections Example 1 Using one top oil probe and one ambient temperature probe with one T PRO A both powered from the T PRO A T PRO A Back view Ambient Top Oil 30 VDC 40 mA a OOOOOO 230 231 232 233 234 235 Gray Orange T n Ambient
218. ents 96 samples cy cle up to the 25th harmonic e 6 derived analog channels 3 operating currents 3 restraint currents all are magnitude quantities in per unit 8 samples cycle These derived and an alog channels can be displayed on a Differential Trajectory graph 9 or 20 external digital inputs 96 samples cycle 14 or 21 output contacts 8 samples cycle 30 Virtual Inputs 8 samples cycle 76 relay internal logic signals 8 samples cycle 24 ProLogic signals 8 samples cycle The recorded relay internal logic signals includes Phase segregated Start and Trip signals of Differential trip 87 Backup Over current 50 51 Backup Earth fault 50N 51N Directional Over current 67 Directional Earth fault 67N Over voltage 59 amp Under voltage 27 Parameters that are user selectable with respect to recording faults are Record length settable from 0 20 to 10 0 seconds including 0 10 to 2 00 seconds of Pre trigger Recorder Triggering By any internal logic or external input signal T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 47 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 5 Trend Recorder 4 48 The trend recorder provides continuous slow speed recording of the trans former and its characteristics with an adjustable sample period from 3 to 60 minutes per sample This same global trend sampling rate is applied to all the trend quantities The relay stores a fixed number of samples At the nominal sample period of 3 minutes p
219. er Application Using 5 Inputs on page 4 5 the descriptions of the corrections required to normalize the current of each input are in Table 4 3 Example Transformer Current Correction XFMR Physical CT CT Total Phase er Voltage XFMR ne Curr y CT Ratio Winding KV Windin Winding input CT Phase Turn s With Phase Correction 9 Phase P Conn Ratio Shift Required Factor 230 Y 00 ref 1 Y 00 200 1 200 1 00 00 2 Y 1809 250 1 250 1 1809 180 115 A 300 3 Y 0 400 1 400 1 300 300 4 A 300 450 1 258 8 1 60 600 13 8 A 300 5 Y 00 4000 1 4000 1 300 300 Observe that CT input 4 in our example is connected in a delta configuration Currents from delta CTs are V3 larger than from Y connected CTs at the relay The T PRO will automatically take the delta CT setting into account and cor rect for the V3 factor The formulas for the phase shift corrections are in Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L Our example of Table 4 3 on page 4 6 would use the following Current Phase Correction formulas from Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L Input 1 0 Correction Table 4 4 Example Input 2 180 Correction Input 3 30 Correction Input 4 60 Correction Input 5 30 Correction 14 2la Ib Ic 3 IB zia x 21b Ic 3 deos EUR 2la Ib Ic j4 la 1o la 2Ib Ic A cle A
220. er Manual Disabled z Disabled v Disabled i Disabled w Disabled m D02705R01 21 ProLogic D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software ProLogic 1 Lockout Trip IV Enabled Name Lockout Trip OR Pickup Delay 000 amp 0 00 Dropout Delay s loo 2 o 2j o ss so Input amp 87 Trip ES Input B EI 1 Fast Gas Relay 2 Input C 87N HY Trip b X Input D TOEWS Trip se Input E EI 2 Lockout Reset E This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 6 20 ProLogic Example Lockout Trip The T PRO s ProLogic feature provides Boolean control logic graphically driven with multiple inputs combined through logic gates and a timer to create a custom element or function Up to 24 ProLogic control statements can be cre ated and the logic outputs can be used to provide a variety of functions such as provide a breaker status switch setting group initiate a recording provide an output You can provide a meaningful name for the function you are creating and apply a pickup and dropout delay Start with Input A by selecting any of the relay functions or digital inputs from the pulldown list Repeat for up to 5 possible inputs Combine these inputs with INVERT AND OR NAND NOR XOR XNOR LATCH gates by clicking on the gate Invert the input by clicking on
221. er a command 1 111 9 Modbus protocol Monitoring incoming and outgoing data Press Ctrl c to stop monitor Press lt Enter gt to continue Connected 0 03 26 vT100 115200 8 N 1 Figure 5 4 Login Screen 3 Pressing the Enter key results in all SCADA communications characters to be displayed as hexadecimal characters Individual exchanges are separated by an asterisk as the following sample illustrates T PRO 4000 User Manual 5 5 5 Data Communications T PRO4000 24 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help Do cS DA Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA 0 Modify IEC61850 IED name 11 Exit 7 8 9 1 port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 9 DNP protocol Monitoring incoming data Press Ctrl c to stop monitor Press Enter to continue enter Master ID 1 2 or 3 gt 1 01 00 00 00 8C 85 CO CO 01 01 00 06 SB 7F 05 64 00 00 8C 85 CO C1 01 02 00 06 95 76x05 64 08 C4 DC 16 C1 C1 00 CS 24 05 64 OB C4 01 00 00 00 8C 02 03 06 3E C6 05 64 OB C4 01 00 BO 00 8C 85 CO 06 SF DE 05 64 OB C4 01 00 00 00 8C 85 CO C3 01 4D 05 64 OB C4 01 00 00 00 8C 85 CO C4 01 20 00 64 08 C4 01 00 00 00 DC 16 C1 C4 00 41 B8 Connected 0 02 31 VT100 TCPJIP Figure 5 5 Hyperterminal 4 Press Ctrl C to end the monitor session 5 6 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 5 Data Communications 5 3 IEC61850 Communication The IEC 61850 standard D02705
222. er factor PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PF phsB cVal mag f Phase B power factor PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PF phsC cVal mag f Phase C power factor PwrVoIMMXU6 MX TotW mag f Total active power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX TotVAr mag f Total reactive power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX TotVA mag f Total apparent power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX TotPF mag f Average power factor PwrVoIMMXU6 MX Hz mag f T PRO 4000 User Manual Frequency Appendix Q 21 Appendix Q 22 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D24DEFPVPHI This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFPVPH 1of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D24DEFPVPH1 ST Str general 24DEF 1 Trip D24DEFPVPH1 ST Str dirGeneral 24DEF 1 Direction set to unknown D24DEFPVPH1 ST Op general 24DEF 1 Trip D24DEFPVPH2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFPVPH2of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D24DEFPVPH2 ST Str general 24DEF 2 Trip D24DEFPVPH2 ST Str dirGeneral 24DEF 2 Direction set to unknown D24DEFPVPH2 ST Op general 24DEF 2 Trip D24InvPVPH3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24Inv VPH3of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D24InvPVPH3 ST Str general 24INV Alarm D24InvPVPH3 ST Str dirGeneral 24INV Direction set to unknown D24InvPVPH3 S
223. er neutral and ground It should be noted that the grounding resistance can reduce the sensitivity of 87N by an amount that can be calculated The principle of operation of the 87N is to compare the phasor of the trans former neutral current IN to the phasor of the residual of the winding s 3 phase currents 310 Again using Kirchoff s law if these are not equal and subtractive then there is an internal ground fault on that winding Note the winding 3 phase CTs must be Wye connected Delta CT s cannot be used as they would trap the zero sequence current making it unavailable to the 87N function The 87N characteristic consists of a slope characteristic and Delta Phase Dot Product supervision The 87N function can be used on a normal grounded transformer connection a delta connected transformer winding with a grounding bank contained within the its zone or on an auto transformer 87N Operating Current IO For a Regular Wye Transformer IO IA IB IC 4 IN 4 For an Auto Transformer IO HV3jo LV319 IN 5 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 13 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 87N Restraint Current IR For a Regular Wye Transformer IR IN IA IB IC 2 6 For an Auto Transformer IR HVajg LVa3jg IND 2 7 IA IB and IC are the phase currents Where IN is the current from the neutral CT 379 is the residual derived from the 3 phase currents of the respec tive winding s And w
224. er sample T PRO stores one month of trend re cords with automatic overwrite of the oldest If the sample interval increases to 60 minutes per sample the relay stores 600 days of trend records Table 4 35 Trend Recording Sample Interval Trend Record Length 3 minute 30 days 5 minute 50 days 10 minute 100 days 30 minute 300 days 60 minute 600 days T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 6 Event Log D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications The T PRO maintains a log of events in a 250 entry circular log Each entry contains the time of the event plus an event description This log includes the time that the event took place and a predefined description ofthe event Logged events include trips alarms external input assertions plus internal events such as setting changes Trip and alarm protection events are logged only if these events have been user programmed to initiate output relay closures or have been programmed to initiate fault recording in the Output Matrix of the set tings Phase information is included in event messages where appropriate For exam ple the event log entry for a device trip could be SubA 2011 08 18 15 34 19 832 87 Trip on ABC The event log can be viewed in three ways Relay Front HMI Relay Control Panel interface is in the Events tab SCADA protocols included in the T PRO allow the SCADA master access to Trip and Alarm event data Event
225. er unit 0 10 to Minimum of IRs S1 100 1 00 IRs per unit lOmin 100 S1 to 50 00 S1 96 lOmin 100 IRs to Minimum of S2 100 S2 Yo Maximum of S1 30 to 200 High Current Setting per unit 3 IOmin to 100 00 I2 Cross Blocking Enable Disable I2 Setting per unit 0 05 to 1 00 I5 Restraint Enable disable 15 Setting per unit 0 05 to 1 00 HV LV and TV winding current calculations The T PRO has 5 sets of three phase current inputs that can summed to obtain the total current flowing into or out of a transformer winding The inputs can be configured for use with CTs of different ratios and connections This flexi bility requires that certain mathematical corrections be carried out on the cur rents prior to summing them in order to derive the total winding and transformer current This process includes three steps 1 Selection of a reference current input 2 Phase Corrections T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 3 Magnitude Corrections The three steps are described in the following sections 1 Selection of reference current input The reference current at 0 is fixed as the Transformer Winding where the Po tential Transformer is connected The reference transformer winding will al ways be either Wye 0 or Delta 0 All causes of current phase shift due to connections of the transformer and or CTs shall be corrected in the relay algo rithm t
226. erature Rise 65 C Transformer Cooling Method Self cooled Temp Rise Hot Spot TRiseHS 25 00 C Temp Rise Top Oil TRiseTop 55 00 C Temp Rise Time Const Hot Spot TauHS 0 08 hours Temp Rise Time Const Top Oil TauTop 3 00 hours Ratio of Load Loss to Iron Loss R 3 20 Hot Spot Temp Exponent m 0 80 Top Oil Temp Exponent n 0 80 Winding Voltage Input Connection PT Turns Ratio 2000 0 1 0 to 10000 0 Location HV HV or LV Transformer NamePlate HV as PT Source Voltage 230 0 kV 115 0 to 1000 0 Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 LV Voltage 115 0 kV 13 8 to 230 0 Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 DY YD YY connec tion 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 150 120 90 60 30 DD connection 0 60 120 180 120 60 TV Voltage 13 8 kV 1 0 to 115 0 Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 DY YD YY connec tion 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 150 120 90 60 30 DD connection 0 60 120 180 120 60 CT Connections Appendix B 4 Current Input 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Winding HV HV LV TV NC Connection Y Delta or Y Phase 0 Y connection 0 60 120 180 120 60 Delta connection 30 90 15
227. erial number and the settings version of the relay The Device Serial Number and Required Settings Version on the Identification screen indicate the serial number and the settings version of the relay 1 Offliner Settings displays a default setting file on start up which shows the settings version in the bottom status bar As an example T PRO Offliner is shipped with a set of default sample files of older settings versions These 5 5 66 sample files are v2 sample tps v3 sample tps etc Each sample file contains default values of an older settings version For a new installation these sample files are placed in the default directory C Program Files ERLPhase T PRO Offliner Settings or you can choose the path during the Offliner software installation If an older version of T PRO Offliner was previously installed on your PC then the default directory may be C Program Files NxtPhase T PRO Of fliner Settings or C Program Files APT T PRO Offliner Settings 2 Open a sample file of the desired version Use File Save As to save the sam ple file to a new file name and path Then edit the setting file and the serial number save it and load it into the relay T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 5 Main Branches from the Tree View Identification D02705R01 21 RHS Information relating to specific menu Item LHS Menu Tree accessed by LHS menu or top tabs T PRO
228. erlphase com Email info gerlphase com Technical Support Email support erlphase com Tel 1 204 477 0591 T PRO 4000 User Manual Using This Guide D02705R01 21 This User Manual describes the installation and operation of the T PRO trans former protection relay It is intended to support the first time user and clarify the details of the equipment The manual uses a number of conventions to denote special information Example Describes Start Settings Control Panel Choose the Control Panel submenu in the Set tings submenu on the Start menu Right click Click the right mouse button Recordings Menu items and tabs are shown in italics Service User input or keystrokes are shown in bold Text boxes similar to this one Relate important notes and information Indicates more screens Indicates further drop down menu click to dis play list V T PRO 4000 User Manual Indicates a warning Acronyms D02705R01 21 ASG Active Setting Group CID file extension CID for Configured IED Description CT Current Transformer DCE Data Communication Equipment DIB Digital Input Board DIGIO Digital Input Output Board DSP Digital signal processor DTE Data Terminal Equipment GFPCB Graphics Front Panel Comm Board GFPDB Graphics Front Panel Display Board GPS Global Positioning System HMI Human Machine Interface ICD file extension
229. ers for fault recording are established by programming the output matrix and allowing any internal relay function or any external input to initiate a recording The T PRO can also create continuous slow speed trend recording of the transformer and its characteristics with an adjustable sample period Trend records can be stored for 30 to 600 days depending on the sample period High Voltage HV e 3 52 PT 00000000 oq Through Fault Monitor ProLogic Tertiary 0 0866 e e Voltage TV ANAA YN s o E 1 18 Analog Inputs 21 Output Contacts 4U 20 External Inputs AU 14 Output Contacts 3U 9 External Inputs 3U 1 Relay Inoperative 2 Temperature Alarm Contact Inputs IRIG B Time Sync 52 cc IS l Low Voltage LV Fault Records T PRO can be used for a two 2 Trend Records or three 3 winding transformer Sequence of Event Records with up to five 5 sets of CT inputs three 3 winding example shown Figure 1 1 T PRO Function Line Diagram 1 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 1 2 Front View D02705R01 21 e 1 Overview o T PRO TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY o O REAYFUNCTIONA g mies FUNCTIONAL ED SERVICE REQUIRED Q ALARM QO TesTMopE ver Ud 2 ENS LO o FERL n
230. es Other validation explain 1 3 7 IP Address es from 192 168 1 1 T PRO Offliner which TCP Connections or UDP Datagrams are accepted 1 3 8 TCP Listen Port Not Applicable Master w o dual end point 20 000 T PRO Offliner Number Fixed at 20 000 Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 3 9 TCP Listen Port I Not Applicable Outstation w o dual end point NA Number of remote Fixed at 20 000 device Configurable range to Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe 1 3 10 TCP Keep alive timer Fixed at ms Disabled T PRO Offliner Configurable range 5 to 3 600 s Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe 1 3 11 Local UDP port Fixed at 20 000 20 000 T PRO Offliner Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable from i Configurable other describe Let system choose Master only 1 3 12 Destination UDP port NA for DNP3 Requests Master Only D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 5 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 3 IP Networking Capabilities Current Value lis methi ds 1 3 13 Destination UDP port T None NA for initial unsolicited null Fixed at 20 000 responses UDP only Configurable range to Outstations Configurable selectable from Configurable other describe Use source port number 1 3 14 Destination UDP port None 20 000 T PRO Offliner for re
231. es 5 inputs with Boolean state ments one latch state and one pickup delay timer View the active setting group ASG from the Terminal Mode from the front panel or from a record stored by the relay the active setting group is stored with the record The protection function features are described in detail Protection Functions and Specifications on page 4 1 Protection Summary 6 28 l 87 Differential M TOEWS V 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage Iv B0 Loss of Potential l THD Alarm l 67 Directional Overcurrent l Through Fault Monitor 24 OverExcitation Iv 24INV Inverse Time l 24DEF 1 Definite Time Delay l 24DEF 2 Definite Time Delay 59 OverVoltage IV 59 1 Iv 59 2 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent Iv 50N HV V 5IN HV iv 5ON LV V 5INLV v SON TY v 5IN TV 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Iw 5 HV 51 HY v 504v v Sy M SIADP M 5OTV fv 51 TY 87N Neutral Differential lv 87N HV lv 87N LV lv 87N TV 81 Over Under Frequency 81 1 Fixed Level m 81 3 Rate of Change v 49 Thermal OverLoad 27 Undervoltage iv 271 IV 272 81 2 Disabled Y 81 4 Disabled v 49 1 HY 49 2 OFF v 49 3 OFF 49 4 LV z 49 5 OFF 49 6 OFF 497 E ase forF sv 4990F 49 10 OFF 49 11 OFF 49 12 OFF 50BF Breaker Failure Current Detection 52 A Breaker Status 50 BF 1 2 50 BF 2 N 50 BF 3 v 50 BF 4 iv 50 BF 5 N Figure 6 19 Protection Functions T PRO 4000 Us
232. estore load based on the level of current in the winding and or the temperatures inside the transformer Current Input Switch Pickup Setting IHV RMS Max Q ILV RMS Max o ITV RMS Max o Off o Temp Input Switch T Pickup Setting Hot Spot Temperature Top Oil Temperature o Off o with Hysteresis Tp1 Pickup Delay 1 4 Ew li Td1 BE Td1 Dropout Delay Logic Gate Switch Output gt O with Hysteresis Tp2 Pickup Delay EL Td2 Dropout Delay Figure 4 9 Thermal Overload Protection Logic Diagram Figure 4 9 shows the components of the 49 Thermal Overload function The Current Input Switch activates the current based portion ofthe 49 device which is used to detect high loading conditions of any of the transformer windings The 49 tolerates the thermal overload for a specified definite time before the element operates When the loading drops below the 49 pickup the hysteresis T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications maintains the output until the current drops further below the level determined by the hysteresis setting for the duration of the dropout delay timer The Temperature Input Switch activates Top Oil temperature or the Hot Spot temperature protection Top Oil temperature may be either sensed or calculated and the Hot Spot temperature is calculated based on inputs The settings are made
233. eted Completion of user initiated settings change Unit recalibrated Unit restarted User logged in T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D 7 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol The SCADA port supports DNP3 and Modicon Modbus protocols All meter ing values available through the terminal user interface are also available through the Modbus protocol Additionally the Modbus protocol supports the reading of unit time and time of the readings and provides access to trip and alarm events including fault location information A Hold Readings function is available to freeze all metering readings into a snapshot see Force Single Coil function address 0 T PRO 4000 Modbus Message Index List Read Coil Status Function Code 01 Channel Address Value Hold Readings 1 0 Readings not held 1 Readings held Reserved 257 Reserved Reserved Output Contacts 1 513 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 2 514 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 3 515 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 4 516 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 5 517 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 6 518 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 7 519 0 Contact Open inac
234. etting file Ctrl S Saves the active setting file Ctrl Z Undo Ctrl X Cut Ctrl C Copy Ctrl V Paste Ctrl F4 Closes the active Offliner setting document Ctrl F6 Switches to the next open Offliner setting file if more than one setting file is being edited F6 Toggles between the LHS Tree view and HRS screen F10 Alt Enables menu keyboard short cuts F1 Displays the user manual Graphing Grid On Grid Off Protection The graph of protection elements 87 87N all Overcurrents 24 59N can be Functions viewed in Offliner with the grid on or off by toggling the Grid On or Grid Off button A right click on the trace of the curve gives the user the x and y coor dinates Refresh This button will refresh the graph to its default view 1f it has been zoomed Print Graph To print a particular Offliner graph click the Print Graph button Zoom on Graphs Graphs can be zoomed to bring portions of the traces into clearer display Left click on the graph and drag to form a small box around the graph area When the user releases the mouse the trace assumes a new zoom position determined by the area of the zoom coordinates To undo the zoom on the graph click the Refresh button 6 6 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Displaying Co ordinates At any time the user may right click on the graph to display the co ordinates of the point the user selected 6 4 Handling Backward C
235. ffliner set ting files The active document will have a check beside it Help User Manual Displays the user manual About Offliner Displays the Offliner version Toolbar New Create a new document Create a new document of the most recent setting version Open Open an existing document Open an existing document T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Table 6 1 Windows Menu Save Save the active document Save the active document Cut Cut the selection Cut selection Copy Copy the selection Copy the selection Paste Insert clipboard contents Insert clipboard contents Undo Copy graph to clipboard Undo last action Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to the clipboard Copy Setting Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to Group another Show Hide LHS Tree If this option is checked then the LHS Tree view will be hidden Print Print active document Prints Graphs or the setting summary depending on which seen is selected About Display program information Displays the Offliner version T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 5 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 3 Offliner Keyboard Shortcuts The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts that Offliner provides Table 6 2 Keyboard Shortcuts Ctrl N Opens up a default setting file of the most recent setting version Ctrl O Open an existing s
236. general 81 4 U F Trip D81PTUF4 ST Str dirGeneral 81 4 U F Direction set to unknown D81PTUF4 ST Op general 81 4 U F Trip D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 D87TPDIF1 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87TPDIF1of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D87TPDIF 1 ST Op general 87 Trip D87TPDIF1 ST Op phsA 87 Trip phase A D87TPDIF1 ST Op phsB 87 Trip phase B D87TPDIF1 ST Op phsC 87 Trip phase C D87NHVPDIF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NHVPDIF20f the logical device Protection Data Name Description D87NHVPDIF2 ST Op general 87N HV Trip D87NLVPDIF3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NLVPDIF3o0f the logical device Protection Data Name Description D87NLVPDIF3 ST Op general 87N LV Trip D87NTVPDIF4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NTVPDIF43of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D87NTVPDIF4 ST Op general 87N TV Trip T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 39 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 40 PTFuseGGIO1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node PTFuseGGIO l of the logical device Protection Data Name Description PTFuseGGIO1 ST Ind stVal 60 Alarm EIGGIO1 This sec
237. gh External Input 9 High Out 15 Closed 9 Turn voltage and External Input 9 off Observe 50BF Elements Low External Input 9 Low Out 15 Open End of Breaker Fail test This section covers the testing of the 87 minimum operating point IO min Generally this is the only test that is required to prove the minimum sensitiv ity of the differential element The IO nin test proves the Nameplate Rating the KV CT Ratio and IO settings are all correct If more comprehensive and complex testing is desired you may skip this 87 Differential Test section and go to section T PRO 3 Phase 87 High Mis match Slope Testing on page 7 45 instead Settings MVA 100 Windings 2 HV kV 230 Y 0 LV kV 115 Delta 30 HV CT 250 1 Y 0 LV CT 500 1 Y 0 PT Location High Side IOmin 0 3 per unit IRs 5 0 per unit T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 33 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 34 1A 11B 11C I2A I2B I2 C I3SA I3B I3C l4A 14B 14C IBA ISB I5C Slope 1 20 Slope 2 4096 As shown in Figure 7 27 on page 7 34 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix 87 Trip mapped to Out 1 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction and 3IO Elimination Input 1 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction and 3IO Elimination Input 2 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction and 3IO Elimination Input 3 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction and 3IO E
238. hat IA is also in phase with the injected current We have just proven the Table 7 2 on page 7 61 0 connection Where the left column is O the right column will have the strongest current in Phase A at 20 Each SPST row uses the same process the Operating phases are determined from the appropriate CPC equations of Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L At the beginning of Step 3 we stated that we must see 2 operating phases on each side Since we found in this example that injecting IA will only result in one Operating phase AZ0 we will have to inject a second phase to obtain two operating phases We will show how to do that in our example transformer later in this section T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Table 7 2 Single Phase Selection Table Inject Phase A only at 0 Left Middle Right Select the Winding Net Phase Angle degrees Use Formulas from Current Phase Correction Table Injecting only T PRO Phase A at 0 shows these Operating Appendix L Phases i 30 30 CPC1 AZ0 amp CZ180 ii 60 60 CPC2 C180 iii 90 90 CPC3 BZ0 amp C2180 iv 1209 120 CPC4 BZO V 150 150 CPC5 BZ0 amp AZ180 vi 1809 180 CPC6 AZ180 vii 2109 210 CPC7 CZ0 amp AZ180 viii 2409 240 CPC8 CZ0 ix 2709 270 CPC9 CZ0 amp BZ180 x 3009
239. hat this effort may already have been completed as part of the steps taken to establish a network maintenance connection to the relay T PRO 4000 User Manual 5 7 5 Data Communications 1 Establish a TUI session with the relay and log in as maintenance The fol lowing screen appears TPRO 4000 HyperTerminal DER File Edit View Call Transfer Help Dg 6 Bis T PRO 4000 System Utilities ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com Modify IP flddress subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA Modify IEC61850 IED name Exit port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 Connected 0 i 00 43 VT100 TCP IP t NUM Figure 5 6 Maintenance Interface 2 Select the first option by entering the number 1 followed by Enter The fol lowing screen appears 5 8 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 5 Data Communications USB HyperTerminal Max File Edit View Call Transfer Help Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA Modify IEC61850 IED name Exit port 150 access only Please enter a c
240. he I No Appendix F 8 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 6 Fill Out The Following Items For Outstations Current Value If configurable Settings preserved through a device reset Analog Deadbands Data Set Prototypes Data Set Descriptors Only list methods 1 6 1 Timeout waiting for None 5 000 ms Application Confirm of Fixed at 5 000 ms solicited response Configurable range to ms message Configurable selectable from 5 ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 6 2 How often is time I Never needs time synchronization Within seconds after IIN1 4 is set required from the Periodically every seconds master 1 6 3 Device Trouble Bit Never used IIN1 6 I Reason for setting Unable to access requested data or execute CROB assuming a valid request has been received 1 6 4 File Handle Timeout I Not applicable files not supported Fixeedat ms Configurable range to 1 ms Configurable selectable from ms Configurable other describe Variable explain 1 6 5 Event Buffer Overflow Discard the oldest event Behaviour Discard the newest event Other explain 1 6 6 Event Buffer Single buffer for the Object Groups 2 and 32 size Organization 200 Separate buffer for the Object Group 111 size 100 Separate buffer for the Fault Locator events size 100 1 6 7 Sends Multi Fragment I Yes Response
241. he logical node DSOBFRBRF4 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF4 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 2 Trip 2 D50BFRBRF5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF5 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF5 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 3 Trip 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 27 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 28 D50BFRBRF6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF6 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF6 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 3 Trip 2 D50BFRBRF7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF7 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF7 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 4 Trip 1 D50BFRBRF8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF8 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF8 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 4 Trip 2 D50BFRBRF9 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF9 of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D50BFRBRF9 ST OpEx general 50BF Input 5 Trip 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D50BFRBRF10 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DSOBFRBRF 10 of the logical device Prot
242. he mid dle column by using CPC12 formulas in Appendix L For simplicity we use 1 0A in the CPC12 formulas to find the Operating phase s if we inject only Phase A We get the following results Confirm in Metering Analog _ 2la Ib Ic Pan AA Se 0 67amp 36 IA 3 0 67ampZ 0 IB a s Hemp mpi emp lamp 0 33amp 37 0 33ampZ 180 IC DRE Mm ep comme MPO 0 33amp 38 0 337180 The strongest phase is the Operating phase and IA is the strongest phase at 0 67amp0 we can ignore IB and IC as they are not the strongest phases Since our stated goal is to have Operating phases A B we will need to inject a 2nd phase We have just established how to get Operating phase A so now we will need to add Operating phase B i e Phase B at 180 We have already used SPST 7 2 for this input so now we need to look at SPST 7 3 and SPST 7 4 and see which one will give Operating Phase B in row xii for our 0 connection T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 65 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide We find in the right column of SPST 7 3 row xii that if we inject Phase B we get Operating Phase B which is what we were seeking For proof of the right column we again insert 1 0 A into Phase B of CPC12 formulas and see that in this case IB is 0 67 A while IA and IC are only 0 33 A Confirm in Me tering Analog dias Ma Ib Ie 2 0amp Lam amp lamp 0 33amp 0 33ampZ0 ve AA ee zampe 0 67 0 33 amp
243. he state of the LEDs The GFPDB provides the 240x128 monochrome graphics front panel display and the keypad The keypad is used to navigate the menus on the display to control relay operation by a local user T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix D Event Messages D02705R01 21 87 Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC 87N HV Trip 87N LV Trip 87N TV Trip 51 HV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC 50 HV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC 51 LV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A eB eC eN AB BC CA ABC 50 LV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D Event Messages Appendix D 2 51 TV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B Cc eN AB BC CA ABC 50 TV Trip on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC 51N HV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 50N HV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 51N LV Trip on ABCG The possible phase information is AG
244. he type of inverse time curve TMS Time scaling factor for inverse time curve A B p Parameters for defining the curve TR Factor for altering the reset time 59N Enable disable Table 4 13 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage Setting Ranges 3Vg Pickup secondary volts 5 00 TO 150 00 Curve Type See Table 4 11 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 22 TMS 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0 B 0 0000 to 10 0 P 0 01 to 10 00 TR 4 22 0 10 to 100 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 27 Undervoltage D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Two sets of Undervoltage 27 elements are provided When the voltage ap plied to the analog voltage inputs is below the 27 pickup level the 27 will op erate after its timer has expired The 27 1 and 27 2 functions are identical in terms of operating options Use the Gate Switch setting to select the logical AND gate for 3 phase undervolt age function or use the logical OR gate for single phase undervoltage When the gate switch is set to OR then if any of A OR B OR C phase voltage drops below the pickup setting the element will operate after the time delay When the gate switch is set to AND then if A AND B AND C phase voltage drops below the pickup setting the element will operate after the time delay The Pickup Delay timer is definite with a range of 0 00 second 1 e in
245. her Server Clause 6 S1 ServerDirectory TP M YES D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 3 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 4 Table Q 4 Application association Clause 7 S2 Associate M YES S3 Abort M YES S4 Release M YES Table Q 5 Logical device Clause 8 S5 Logical Device Directory TP M YES Table Q 6 Logical Node Clause 9 S6 LogicalNodeDirectory TP YES S7 GetAllDataValues TP M YES Table Q 7 Data Clause 10 S8 GetDataValues TP M YES S9 SetDataValues TP O NO 10 GetDataDirectory TP M YES S11 GetDataDefinition TP M YES T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Table Q 8 Data Set Clause 11 12 GetDataSetValues TP M YES 13 SetDataSetValues TP O NO S14 CreateDataSet TP O NO 15 DeleteDataSet TP O NO S16 GetDataSetDirectory TP O YES Table Q 9 Substitution Clause 12 S17 SetDataValues TP M YES Table Q 10 Setting group control Clause 13 S18 SelectActive SG TP O YES s19 SelectEdit SG TP O NO S20 SetSGvalues TP O NO S21 ConfirmEditSGvalues TP O NO 22 GetSGvalues TP O YES S23 GetSGCBvalues TP O YES T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 5 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 6
246. her Modbus protocol is used with no parity this uses 2 stop bits as defined in the Modbus standard Protocol monitor utilities are available to assist in resolving SCADA commu nication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing The utilities can be accessed through the Maintenance menu in VT100 Terminal mode T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 19 2 Setup and Communications 2 13 Communication Port Details 2 20 T PRO 4000 User Manual Table 2 4 Communication Port Details Location Port Function Front Panel 119 RJ 45 receptacle 100BASE T Ethernet interface Default IP 192 168 100 80 Used for user interface access or 61850 SCADA access or DNP SCADA access through Ethernet LAN Front Panel 150 USB B receptacle High speed USB 2 0 interface Used for user interface access Default fixed baud rate 115 200 N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Rear Panel 118 RJ 11 receptacle Internal modem interface Default Baud rate 38 400 N81 no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Rear Panel 119 Rear panel RJ 45 receptacle or ST type optical receptacle fac tory configured 100BASE T or 100BASE FX 1300nm multi mode Ethernet interface Same subnet as front panel port 119 Used for user interface access or 61850 SCADA access or DNP SCADA access through Ethernet LAN Rear Panel 120 ST type optical receptacle 100BASE FX 1300 nm multimedia Ethernet interface Used for user interface a
247. here Operate current IO 0 ideally for external ground faults Operate current IO gt 0 for internal ground faults Note All current reference directions for any 87 or 87N function are into the transformer For an auto transformer the HV5 and LV 37 are normalized by the CT ratios on both sides of the transformer to derive each primary current The normal ized currents are then directly summed The different voltage levels need not be considered for the 87N of an auto transformer The per unit settings are calculated using the side with the PT as the base The 87N base current is calculated as 1000 MVA sqrt 3 Ref Side kVL L 8 The differential currents are calculated as IO pu IO primary amps Ibase 9 IR pu IR primary amps Ibase 10 The settings depend on the value of the neutral grounding resistor 1f used and assumptions regarding CT saturation for external faults 4 14 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications lOmin Table 4 5 87N Neutral Differential Setting Functions Per unit minimum level that operates the device 87N IRs Per unit point on the restraint axis of the differential characteristic where Slope 1 and Slope 2 intersect Slope of first part of characteristic meeting IOmin and Slope 2 Slope of second part of characteristic meeting Slope 1 HV LV TV Table 4 6 87N Neutral Differential Setting Ranges
248. hip to the fault level in particular for faults ex ternal to the transformer zone i e through faults The slope characteristic is a general requirement of differential protection due to various CT ratio angle and saturation errors that tend to magnify at higher fault levels Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 shows the differential slope characteristic in the relay Unrestrained Area without harmonic restraint High Current Setting Normal Trip Area with harmonic restraint Operating Current IO pu O 3 2 Restraint Current IR pu Figure 4 1 Differential Protection Slope Characteristic Operating Current IO Ijy Ij y Iry for each of phases A 1 B and C i e Operating Current is the phasor sum of all transform er windings D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 1 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 2 where Ty is the current from the high voltage side Ij y is the current from the low voltage side Iry is the current from the tertiary side Restraint Current IR I1x 2x I3x I4x I5x 2 2 where x represents phase A B or C for each of 5 sets of current inputs In order to allow a more sensitive yet secure differential setting the T PRO slope characteristic is supplemented with Delta Phase and Rate of Change of Differential ROCOD supervision Descriptions of these supervisions are pro vided later in this section Transformer Energizing Inrush Restraint 2nd Har
249. hours 0 00 to 24 00 Logic Gate OR or AND 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 49TOEWS Transformer Overload Early Warning System TOEWS feature extends the thermal overload concept of the previous section in two Ways Predicts excessive hot spot temperature to thirty minutes in advance Predicts excessive loss of life to thirty minutes in advance Both of these are based on the availability of an adequate thermal model of the transformer For details see Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation in Appendix N To use this feature the relay must have an ambient temperature probe Note that the current used in the TOEWS function may be the uncompensated Wye currents or Delta Compensated currents For more information see Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T PRO functions on page 4 8 Excessive Hot Spot Temperature Warning Enabling this feature hot spot temperature is calculated at every time step five seconds into the future The assumption is that the load current and ambient temperature do not change If this calculation indicates that the hot spot temperature exceeds its trip set ting the following happens 15 minute warning alarm is activated when the calculated time is fifteen min utes or less 30 minute warning alarm is activated when the calculated time 1s between thir ty minutes and fifteen minutes Trip output is activated if the calculated time is zero The ac
250. i e when the element s timer is initiated These elements are typically used for testing purposes All output relays have a fixed 0 1 second stretch time after the dropout of the initiating element For a particular function to operate correctly it must be enabled and must also have its logic output assigned to atleast one output contact if it is involved in a tripping function Print the entire output matrix by selecting the printer icon This printout is pro duced on multiple pages determined by the your Print Setup settings Typical print setup to not split the columns on letter size paper could be Landscape Scaling approximately 8096 It s recommended to preview the print job for your printer settings and making any require scaling adjustments prior to exe cuting the final print command T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 31 6 Offliner Settings Software Setting Summary 6 32 T You may print the settings for all elements or you may choose to print the En abled element settings only To print the Enabled protection element settings only select from the Offliner menu bar Tools Options and check Display And Print Only Enabled Protection Elements To initiate the print output select Setting Summary in the element tree then click anywhere in the T PRO Setting Summary area This will activate the Print icon to enable printing PRO Offliner Settings Document 3 Fie Edit Tools Window Help psa
251. ible Maximize Makes the active window as large as possible Close Closes the active Offliner setting docu ment Next Switches to the next open Offliner set ting file if more than setting file is being edited T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 3 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 4 Table 6 1 Windows Menu File Menu New Opens up a default setting file of the most recent setting version Open Open an existing setting file Close Closes the active setting document Save Saves the active setting file Save As Saves the active setting file with a new name or location Convert to Newer Convert an older setting version to a newer version Print Prints graphs or setting summary depending on active screen Print Preview Provides a print preview of the setting summary Print Setup Changes printers or print options 1 8 The 8 most recently accessed setting files Exit Quits the program Edit Menu Undo Undo last action Cut Cut the selection Copy Copy the selection Paste Insert clipboard contents Copy Graph Copy the graph for the active screen to the clipboard Copy Setting Group Copy values from one Setting Group to another Tools Options Displays the Options Dialog Box Window Cascade Cascades all open windows Tile Tiles all open windows Hide Show Tree If this option is checked then the LHS Tree view will be hidden 1 9 More Windows Allows access to all open O
252. ickup Figure A 3 Time Delay Error at 1 Second Appendix A 6 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix A IED Specifications Time Delay Error 10s 0 1 Ha s a 1 Hz s Time Delay Error ms 5 6 Multiple of Hz s Pickup Figure A 4 Time Delay Error at 10 Seconds D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 7 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges D02705R01 21 When a setting has been completed in Offliner Settings software it can be printed along with the ranges available for these settings This is a view only option to change the settings you must go back into the particular setting that you wish to change The summary is a quick way to view all the settings in a compact form The top part of the settings summary contains all the information from the Re lay Identification screen The setting summary provides a list of all the current and voltage analog input quantity names used for protection and recording External Inputs and Output contact names are also identified on this summary T PRO Settings Summary Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Name Symbol Value Unit Range Relay Identification Settings Version 402 Ignore Serial Number No Serial Number TPRO 4000 000000 01 Unit ID UnitlD Nominal CT Secondary Current 5 A 1A or 5A Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz 50Hz or 60Hz Standard I O 9 External Inputs a
253. ilities on page 2 16 Monitor SCADA Shows real time display of SCADA data Modify IEC61850 IED name Modifies IED name of the IEC61850 device This name has to match the name in the CID file and the name change via this command shall be coordinated with the new CID file download Table 2 3 Network Utilities View protocol statistics View IP TCP and UDP statistics View active socket states View current states of active sockets View routing tables View routing tables Ping Check network connection to given point Exit network utilities Exit network utilities menu and return to Maintenance Menu Commands 2 10 Firmware Update The relay has an update login that can be accessed by a connection through a VT100 terminal emulator such as HyperTerminal This login is available only from Port 150 1 Use the terminal program to connect to USB service Port 150 2 Select Enter the terminal responds with a login prompt 3 Login as update in lower case 4 The firmware update is used to update the relay s internal software with the latest maintenance or enhancement releases Please see the T PRO Firm ware Update Procedure documentation that comes with the firmware update file and instructions Note The mouse does not work in VT100 terminal mode 2 16 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications 2 11 Setting the Baud Rate
254. in row i of SPST 7 3 If we inject only Phase B we will get operating phases A and B However it is actually B A 1 e BZ0 amp AZ180 This is acceptable As long as we have the correct phases we can easily compensate for any angle difference by simply changing our test set connections at the relay to achieve the required 0 or 18 0 If inject B gives us B A we should be able to get A B by injecting B i e B A A B To confirm the phases shown in SPST 7 3 are correct we use the Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L The LV connection is 30 and the correction angle is 1 30 30 therefore CPC1 is applicable for our LV connection We insert 1 0 A where Ib appears in the CPC1 formulas This will confirm that we get only Operating phases IB and IA when we inject only Phase B Confirm in Metering Analog la Ib 0amp lamp 1_ 39 IA 0 577 B A 2 amp 0 577ampZ180 Ib Ic lamp O0amp 1 40 IB 0 577 B Bo ag 0 577amp Z0 Ic la 0amp O0amp 0 _ 41 IC 0 B Bo B amp Summarize All of Our Injection Determinations We have concluded that in order to do our Single Phase differential test we should inject into A B on the HV side to get A B into Input 1 and inject B on the LV side to get A B into Input 2 Note that both of these connections give A B current into the transformer Since slope testing simulates an exter
255. ion D67PTOC7 ST Str general 67 Alarm D67PTOC7 ST Str dirGeneral 67 Direction D67PTOC7 ST Op general 67 Trip D67NPTOCS8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67NPTOCS8of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D67NPTOC8 ST Str general 67N Alarm D67NPTOC8 ST Str dirGeneral 67N Direction D67NPTOC8 ST Op general 67N Trip Appendix Q 33 Appendix Q 34 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D59NPTOVI This section defines logical node data for the logical node DS9NPTOV lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D59NPTOV1 ST Str general 59N Alarm D59NPTOV1 ST Str dirGeneral 59N Direction set to unknown D59NPTOV1 ST Op general 59N Trip D59 IPTOV2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59 1PTOV2of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D59 1PTOV2 ST Str general 59 1 Trip D59 1PTOV2 ST Str dirGeneral 59 1 Direction set to unknown D59 1PTOV2 ST Op general 59 1 Trip D59_1PTOV2 ST Op phsA 59 1 Trip phase A D59_1PTOV2 ST Op phsB 59 1 Trip phase B D59_1PTOV2 ST Op phsC 59 1 Trip phase C D59 2PTOV3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59 2PTOV3ofthe logical device Protection Data Name Description D59 2PTOV3 ST Str general 59 2 Trip D
256. is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 67 Alarm on ABC The possible phase information is A B eC eN AB BC CA ABC 67N Alarm on ABCG The possible phase information is AG BG e CG ABG e BCG CAG ABCG 24INV Alarm 59N Alarm THD Exceeds Limit Alrm Ambient P1 Range Alrm P1 could be Over or Under Top Oil P1 Range Alrm P1 could be Over or Under Appendix D 4 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix D Event Messages TOEWS 15 min Alarm TOEWS 30 min Alarm TOEWS Trip 49 1 Trip Alarm 49 2 Trip Alarm 49 3 Trip Alarm 49 4 Trip Alarm 49 5 Trip Alarm 49 6 Trip Alarm 49 7 Trip Alarm 49 8 Trip Alarm 49 9 Trip Alarm 49 10 Trip Alarm 49 11 Trip Alarm 49 12 Trip Alarm 81 1 Trip 81 2 Trip 81 3 Trip 81 4 Trip 50BF Initiated HV 50BF Initiated LV 50BF Initiated TV 50BF Input1Trip1 50BF Input1 Trip2 50BF Input2Trip1 50BF Input2 Trip2 50BF Input3Trip1 50BF Input3 Trip2 50BF Input4 Trip1 50BF Input4 Trip2 50BF Input5 Trip1 50BF Input5 Trip2 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix D 5 Appendix D Event Messages Appendix D 6 59 1 Trip on ABC 59 2 Trip on ABC The possible phase information is
257. king or using the cursor keys and space bar on the keyboard on the asso ciated check box A green X denotes that the item will be mapped to the Point List The list contains separate sections for Binary Inputs Binary Outputs and An alog Inputs The list is scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand side D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 25 6 Offliner Settings Software SCADA Settings Summary T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 olsa sel welan Identification O Relay E O Analog Inputs C External Inputs C Output Contacts O Virtual Inputs CJ Setting Groups C Nameplate Data C Connections CJ Winding CT PT C Temperature Scaling C SCADA Communication TJ DNP Configuration C Point Map O Class Data SCADA Setting Summary Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting C Protection Functions lt Name SCADA Communication IED Address Mode Baud Rate Parity Data Link Timeout Keep Alive Timeout UDP Response Number of Masters Connection Based On Master 1 IP Address Master 1 Port Master 2 IP Address Master 2 Port Master 3 IP Address Master 3 Port Settings v401 TPRO SCADA Summary Point Change Deadband Value Group Index Event Class Deadband Units Scale 1 Serial Modbus ASCII 19200 Odd 500 Configured Port 1 IP Address 19216814 20000 192 168 1 2 20000 192 168 2 1 20000 Reported Units Record Length 6 26
258. l mag f positive sequence voltage VoltMSQI6 MX SeqV c2 cVal mag f negative sequence voltage VoltMSQI6 MX SeqV c3 cVal mag f Zero sequence voltage Appendix Q 20 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 PwrVoIMMXU6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node PwrVoIMMXU6 of the logical device Measurements Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Data Name Description PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f Voltage phase A magnitude PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f Voltage phase A angle PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f Voltage phase B magnitude PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f Voltage phase B angle PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f Voltage phase C magnitude PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f Voltage phase C angle PwrVoIMMXU6 MX W phsA cVal mag f Phase A active power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX W phsB cVal mag f Phase B active power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX W phsC cVal mag f Phase C active power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX VAr phsA cVal mag f Phase A reactive power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX VAr phsB cVal mag f Phase B reactive power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX VAr phsC cVal mag f Phase C reactive power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX VA phsA cVal mag f Phase A apparent power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX VA phsB cVal mag f Phase B apparent power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX VA phsC cVal mag f Phase C apparent power PwrVoIMMXU6 MX PF phsA cVal mag f Phase A pow
259. lay Contacts Access the T PRO service level in Relay Control Panel Open the Utili ties Toggle Outputs tab screen To toggle outputs you first need to enter Test Mode by selecting the Relay in Test Mode check box When you check the box a message will appear prompting you to confirm that you really want to enter this mode Once you enter Test Mode the red Test Mode LED on the front of the T PRO will illuminate and it will remain illuminated until you exit Test Mode The protection functions cannot access the output contacts in Test Mode they are controllable only by the user via Relay Control Panel To toggle a particular output select it from the drop down list and then click on the Closed button You can verify the contact is closed with an ohmmeter The contact will remain closed until you either click the Open button or exit Test Mode Relay 4000 Control Panel U Toggle Output IV Relay in Test Mode CLOSED OPEN Spare 1 id PDR Unit Identification A Communication A Time A Analog Input Calibration A Extemal Input Virtual Inputs A Toggle Outputs Setings Group A Password s cee Main Menu Metering Utilities Relay 4000 Control Panel Current Relay TPRO TPRO Connected Figure 7 3 Test Output Contacts D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 5 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 4 T PRO Test Procedure Outline Devices to Test 7 6 6
260. le D50TVMMXU14 MX A phsB cVal mag f 50 TV phase B fault current magnitude D50TVMMXU14 MX A phsB cVal ang f 50 TV phase B fault current angle D50TVMMXU14 MXSAS phsCScVal mag f 50 TV phase C fault current magnitude D50TVMMXU14 MX A phsC cVal ang f 50 TV phase C fault current angle D51TVMMXU15 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D51TVMMXU15of the logical device FaultData Appendix Q 52 Data Name Description D51TVMMXU15 Mx A phsA cVal mag f 51 TV phase A fault current magnitude D51TVMMXU15 MX A phsA cVal ang f 51 TV phase A fault current angle D51TVMMXU15 MX AS phsB cVal mag f 51 TV phase B fault current magnitude D51TVMMXU15 MX A phsB cVal ang f 51 TV phase B fault current angle D51TVMMXU15 Mx A phsC cVal mag f 51 TV phase C fault current magnitude D51TVMMXU15 MX A phsC cVal ang f T PRO 4000 User Manual 51 TV phase C fault current angle D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D59 1MMXU16 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D59 1MMXUI60f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D59_1MMXU16 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 59 1 phase A fault voltage magnitude D59_1MMXU16 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 59 1 phase A fault voltage angle D59_1MMXU16 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 59 1 phase B fault voltage magnitude D59_1MMXU16 MX PhV phsB c
261. le 40308 Degrees 10 TVa Magnitude 40309 A 0 1 TVa Angle 40310 Degrees 10 TVb Magnitude 40311 A 0 1 TVb Angle 40312 Degrees 10 TVc Magnitude 40313 A 0 1 TVc Angle 40314 Degrees 10 la Operating 40315 Per Unit 1 Ib Operating 40316 Per Unit 1 Ic Operating 40317 Per Unit 1 la Restraint 40318 Per Unit 1 Ib Restraint 40319 Per Unit 1 Ic Restraint 40320 Per Unit 1 Frequency 40321 Hz 100 DC1 40322 mA 100 DC2 40323 mA 100 49 HV RMS Current in PU 40324 Per Unit 10 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 9 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Appendix E 10 49 LV RMS Current in PU 40325 Per Unit 10 49 TV RMS Current in PU 40326 Per Unit 10 Toews MinutesToTrip 40327 In minutes 1 Self check failure param 40328 N A 1 Ambient Temperature 40513 C 10 Top Oil Temperature 40514 C 10 Hot Spot Temperature 40515 C 10 Loss of Life 40516 Per Unit 100 51 Pickup Level 40517 Per Unit 100 THD 40518 96 100 Accumulated IA IA t 40519 KA KA S 10 Accumulated IB IB t 40520 KA KA S 10 Accumulated IC IC t 40521 KA KA S 10 Accumulated Through Fault Count 40522 N A 1 S 40523 MVA 0 01 PF 40524 NA 100 Voltage VO 40525 kV 10 Voltage V2 40526 kV 10 I1 zero 40527 A 1 I1 negative 40528 A 1 I2 positive 40529 A 1 I2 zero 40530 A 1 I2 negative 40531 A 1 13 positive 40532 A 1 13 zero 40533 A 1 I3 negative 40534 A 1 I4 po
262. le Disable Pickup per unit 1 00 to 2 00 Pickup Delay seconds 0 05 to 9999 99 59N Zero Sequence Overvoltage protection is typically used to provide ground fault protection on ungrounded in high impedance grounded systems where neutral overcurrent protection cannot be used or does not have good sensitivi ty The element operates on the residual voltage quantity 3V The potential transformer source can be on either the HV or LV side of the transformer The 59N uses standard IEC and IEEE curves as well as a user de fined curve type Pickup T 3 Vo TMS B Reset T 3V TMS 4 3 Vopickup 3 V opickup 12 A 3V p 1 13 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 11 IEC and IEEE Curves No Curve Type A B p 1 IEC Standard Inverse 0 14 fixed 0 00 fixed 0 02 fixed 2 IEC Very Inverse 13 50 fixed 0 00 fixed 1 00 fixed 3 IEC Extremely Inverse 80 00 fixed 0 00 fixed 2 00 fixed 4 IEEE Moderately 0 0103 fixed 0 0228 fixed 0 02 fixed Inverse 5 IEEE Very Inverse 3 922 fixed 0 0982 fixed 2 00 fixed 6 IEEE Extremely 5 64 fixed 0 0243 fixed 2 00 fixed Inverse 7 User defined 0 001 1000 0 0 10 0 0 01 10 0 3Vg Pickup Table 4 12 59N 7ero Seguence Overvoltage Setting Functions Minimum level that operates device 59N Curve Type Sets t
263. limination Input 4 CT Ratio Mismatch Correction and 3IO Elimination Input 5 lO IHV ILV ITVI 2nd Harmonic Restraint 5th Harmonic Restraint IR 11 12 13 14 19 2 IE IOA IOB IOC Out 1 Figure 7 27 Logic Phase Differential 87 Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor MMCF Calculation shown on 3 Magnitude Mismatch Corrections on page 4 7 Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor i Magnitude Mismatch Correction Factor i Where PhysicalCT_Root3_Factor i Voltage Levelfilx CT Ratioi D PhysicalCT Root3 REF x Voltage REF x CT Ratio REF LO x115 x 500 1 0 x 230 x 250 1 0 i Current input being considered in this case LV side PhysicalCT Root3 Factor 1 0 for a Y connected CT 1 3 for Delta connected CT Voltage Level i Voltage level of the input being considered CT Ratio i CT ratio of the input being considered Voltage REF Primary voltage level of the reference PT side in this case HV side CT Ratio REF CT ratio of the first current input on the reference PT side T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Secondary base current REF 12 1000xMVA 1 1000x100 1 1004 x z 43xkVgy CTRyy J3 x230 250 Secondary base current 1 Secondary Base Current REF MMCF i 1 00A Therefore HV Secondary Base 1 00 A LV Secon
264. lumn 5 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 3 Determine which phase s to inject on each side 4 Apply the additional magnitude correction factor of 1 0 or N3 to the calcu lated 3 phase test currents Detailed Steps for Single Phase Testing To help in understanding the relationship between what the T PRO actually sees when you inject a single phase current it helps to view the Relay Control Panel Metering Analog as shown in Figure 7 38 on page 7 57 The metering screen also provides a place to quickly verify that your calculations are correct In Figure 7 38 on page 7 57 currents IA1 IBI etc are uncompensated cur rents they follow your injected currents The currents HV IA HV IB etc are the compensated currents after phase corrections and zero sequence elimi T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide nation i e after corrections of Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L On Figure 7 39 HV LV TV Compensated Operating Currents on page 7 58 Analog has the per unit operating and restraint currents E Relay Control Panel Metering Voltage A E YoltageB 001 kV 0 Voltage C 0 IAT HY 230kv 035 A 0 161 Hv 230kv 0 a IC1Hv 230kv 054 Alo 1A2LV 115kv 0 E IB2Lv11skv 137 a 0 IC2 LY 115kv 0 5 Ba 337 KI A a 5 A A ies 2 Kal 230 Alo aa 1 B4 os a
265. m Ia Angle TO Thrnunh Faut mar Y 2 7 lt rm gt T PRO Offliner Settings v401 Use the space bar to toggle the selected Change Event Class on off 2 of nominal KY 0 5 degrees degrees 2 of nominal E KY a 05 degrees 04 degrees 2 96 of nominal E Kv 0 5 degrees degrees 2 36 of nominal kv B 36 of nominal kv 4 of nominal 5 mw 4 36 of nominal mVAR 2 36 of nominal A 05 degrees 0 degrees 2 96 of nominal A 05 degrees D degrees 2 36 of nominal A 0 5 degrees degrees 2 of nominal A mos degrees degrees 2 36 of nominal A 0 5 degrees f degrees 2 of nominal A 0 5 degrees degrees 36 of nominal A xL LET Hos degrees E degrees Figure 6 14 DNP Configuration Class Data Class data for each DNP point can be assigned on the Class Data screen Only Points which were mapped in the Point Map screen will appear here Sections for Binary Inputs and Analog Inputs appear here Binary Outputs cannot be as signed a Class The listis scrollable by using the scroll control on the right hand side In addition to assigning a Change Event Class to each mapped point most An alog Inputs can also
266. m o Dropout Delay 9 00 s ona 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Input amp Self Check Fail vj Input B IRIG B Signal Loss b Out Input C 60 Alarm Input D Lnused 0 gt hd InputE Unused Os o This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled and is treated as a logic zero input Figure 4 22 ProLogic Setting Screen T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 43 Table 4 33 ProLogic Setting Functions Name Give the ProLogic a meaningful name Pickup Delay Delay time from pickup to operate Dropout Delay Minimum time that the ProLogic will be active after it has operated A B C D E Relay elements as input statements Operators Boolean type logic gates 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 2 Group Logic Each setting group has 16 Group Logic elements that can be used to switch set ting groups based on the conditions you choose The boolean logic method is similar to ProLogic The input elements available are External Inputs Pro Logic Statements and Virtual Inputs Group Logic 1 Enable 5G2 IV Enabled Name Enable S62 Ct OR Setting Group to Activate 3G 2 Setting Group 2 v norm o Pickup Delay 0 01 5 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Input amp EI 2 Spare 2 x Out Input B VI 2 Virtual Input 2 El Input C Lnused 0 gt x Input D Unused 0 gt hd Input E sUnused 0 vj This symbol denotes a function which has not been enabled
267. monic Second harmonic current is present in the magnetizing inrush current of an un faulted transformer being energized Since inrush current is typically greater than the 87 trip setting a high ratio ofthe 2nd harmonic to fundamental current is used to restrain the 87 when no fault is present The 2nd harmonic restraining only occurs if the calculated IO and IR currents are in the 87 Normal Trip Area However if the IO exceeds the High Current Setting then the 2nd harmonic will not be examined and the trip will not be blocked Typical I2 setting for 2nd harmonic restraint is 0 05 to 1 00 per unit Note that the T PRO will not calculate a harmonic restraint value if the funda mental current is less than 596 of nominal Therefore care must be taken to en sure that the IOmin setting is always set above 0 25 A for a 5 A relay or 0 05 A fora 1 A relay This calculation should be performed on each CT input I2 Cross Blocking When I2 Cross Blocking is enabled default the 2nd harmonic restraint blocks the 87 trip when the ratio I2nd Ifundamental exceeds the I2 setting in any phase When I2 Cross Blocking is Disabled the 2nd harmonic restraint will block the 87 trip only if the ratio I2nd Ifundamental exceeds the I2 setting in at least two phases For three phase transformer application I2 Cross Blocking is typically en abled For three single phase transformer applications the I2 cross blocking is usual ly disabled to ensur
268. monic Magnitude 40573 100 15a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40574 100 15b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40575 100 15c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40576 100 I1a 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40577 100 11b 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40578 100 I1c 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40579 100 12a 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40580 100 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 11 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol I2b 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40581 Yo 100 12c 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40582 Yo 100 13a 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40583 100 I3b 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40584 100 I3c 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40585 100 14a 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40586 100 14b 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40587 100 14c 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40588 100 I5a 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40589 100 I5b 5th Harmonic Magnitude 40590 100 15c Sth Harmonic Magnitude 40591 100 Pa 40592 MW 0 1 Pb 40593 MW 0 1 Pc 40594 MW 0 1 Qa 40595 Mvar 0 1 Qb 40596 Mvar 0 1 Qc 40597 Mvar 0 1 Sa 40598 MVA 0 1 Sb 40599 MVA 0 1 Sc 40600 MVA 0 1 PFa 40601 NA 100 PFb 40602 NA 100 PFc 40603 NA 100 Read Input Register Function Code 04 N input registers supported Response from IED indicates ILLEGAL FUCTION Appendix E 12 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Force Single Coil Function Code 05 Only the hold readings coil can be forced When
269. mpera x to 50 0 x Minimum Valid Temperature 10 ture degrees Minimum Valid Temperature 50 0 to x x Maximum Valid Temperature 10 degrees Maximum Current Value x to 20 00 x Minimum Current Value 1 mA mA Minimum Current Value 4 00 to x x Maximum Current Value 1 mA mA Top Oil T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 21 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 22 Calculated Table 6 12 Temperature Scaling Enable disable Sensed Enable disable Maximum Valid Tempera ture degrees x to 200 0 x Minimum Valid Temperature 410 Minimum Valid Temperature degrees 50 0 to x x Maximum Valid Temperature 10 Maximum Current Value mA x to 20 00 x Minimum Current Value 1 mA Minimum Current Value mA 4 00 to x x Maximum Current Value 1 mA T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 SCADA Communication 6 Offliner Settings Software SCADA Communication IED Address 1 Mode Serial Modbus ASCII C Modbus RTU C DNP3 Level 2 Ethernet C DNP3 Level 2 TCP C DNP3 Level 2 UDP Serial Baud Rate 19200 bd Data Link Timeout ms 0 to disable Network Keep Alive Timeout s 0 to disable UDP Response C Parity Odd C Even C Mone Connection Based On Number of Masters C C Master 1 IP Address Po Master 2 IP Address Po Master 3 IP Address Po Figure 6 13
270. mperature C 95 101 107 113 120 127 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation The parameters used in calculating the Top Oil and Hot Spot Winding tem peratures as functions of the ambient temperature and the load current are as shown below Based on IEEE ANSI Standards C57 115 1991 and C57 92 1981 Parameters for 65 C Rise Transformers Cooling Type OA or OW FA 13396 or less FA more than Non directed Directed ODAF or Type 1 Type 2 13396 Type 4 ODAF or ODWF ODWF Type 3 Type 5 AOHR C 25 30 35 35 35 A0TO R C 55 50 45 45 45 TTO hours 3 0 2 0 1 25 1 25 1 25 TW hours 0 08 0 08 0 08 0 08 0 08 R 3 2 4 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 m 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 1 0 n 0 8 0 9 0 9 1 0 1 0 Parameters for 55 C Rise Transformers Cooling Type OA or OW FA 13396 or less FA more than Non directed Directed ODAF or 13396 ODAF or ODWF ODWF AHR C 20 25 28 28 28 A0TO R C 45 40 37 37 37 TTO hours 3 0 2 0 1 25 1 25 1 25 TW hours 0 08 0 08 0 08 0 08 0 08 R 3 0 3 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 m 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 1 0 n 0 8 0 9 0 9 1 0 1 0 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix N 1 Appendix N Top Oil and Hot Spot Temperature Calculation The meanings of the symbols and the equations used are as follows AH R rated hot spot rise over top oil in C A9TO R
271. n be controlled by any of the relay s external in puts and the differential and overcurrent protections will automatically adapt to the configuration change in real time Table 6 10 Winding CT Connection Transformer Nameplate Winding HV LV TV Voltage kV LV to 1000 0 TV to HV 1 0to LV Connection Choose delta or wye Choose delta or wye Choose delta or wye Phase degree 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 150 120 90 60 30 Options depend on wye or delta connection Voltage Input Connection PT Turns Ratio 1 1 0 to 10000 0 Location HV or LV Current Input Connection Current Input 1to5 Winding HV LV TV NC 51N 87N for Input 5 87N auto for Input 5 CT Connection Choose delta or wye CT Phase degree 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 150 120 90 60 30 Options depend on wye or delta connection CT Turns Ratio 1 1 00 to 50000 0 External Control None El 1 to El 20 Neutral CT Turns Ratio 11 1 00 to 50000 0 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 19 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 20 Zig Zag Transfomer Support When creating a setting file for a zig zag transformer user shall configure the zig zag side ofthe winding as a Y connection Winding connections and phase angle options corresponding to commonly used zig zag transformer types are summarized in Table 6 11 on page 6 20 In these settings High voltage HV side of the windings a
272. n be set to operate for a positive rate of change or a neg ative rate of change Each frequency element has a definite time delay setting All 81 elements shall be inhibited if the positive sequence voltage drops below the undervoltage su pervision threshold fixed at the greater of 0 25 per unit or 5 volts secondary T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 25 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Frequency from Vpos of PT Input 810 Pickup Setting Fixed Level Select 2 amp e 81U Pickup Setting df dt Pickup Setting Rate of Change Select df dt Pickup Setting 59Vpos gt 0 25 pu or gt 5 0 Vsec Setting Disabled Figure 4 13 Over Under Frequency Logic One of Four Similar Elements Shown Table 4 19 81 Frequency Setting Functions Pickup Minimum level that operates device 81 Pickup Delay Operating time for the 81 Table 4 20 81 Frequency Setting Ranges 81 1 81 2 81 3 81 4 Enabled disabled fixed level rate of change Pickup Hz second 60 Hz Fixed Level Between 50 000 59 995 or 60 005 70 000 Pickup Hz second 60 Hz Rate of Change Between 10 0 0 1 or 0 1 10 0 Pickup Delay seconds 60 Hz Fixed Level 0 03 id Pickup Delay seconds 60 Hz Rate of Change 0 20 10 99 99 Pickup Hz second 50 Hz Fixed Level Between 40 000 49 995 or 50 005 60 000 Pickup Hz second 50 Hz Rate of Change Between 10 0
273. nactive On active External Input 4 10004 0 Off inactive On active External Input 5 10005 0 Off inactive On active External Input 6 10006 0 Off inactive On active External Input 7 10007 0 Off inactive On active External Input 8 10008 0 Off inactive On active External Input 9 10009 0 Off inactive On active External Input 10 10010 0 Off inactive On active External Input 11 10011 0 Off inactive On active External Input 12 10012 0 Off inactive On active External Input 13 10013 0 Off inactive On active External Input 14 10014 0 Off inactive On active External Input 15 10015 0 Off inactive On active External Input 16 10016 0 Off inactive On active External Input 17 10017 0 Off inactive On active External Input 18 10018 0 Off inactive On active External Input 19 10019 0 Off inactive On active External Input 20 10020 0 Off inactive On active External Input 1 Change of state latch 10257 0 Off inactive On active External Input 2 Change of state latch 10258 0 Off inactive On active External Input 3 Change of state latch 10259 0 Off inactive On active External Input 4 Change of state latch 10260 0 Off inactive On active External Input 5 Change of state latch 10261 0 Off inactive On active External Input 6 Change of state latch 10262 0 Off inactive On active External Input 7 Change of state latch 10263
274. nal fault one side into and one side out of one side needs to be 180 out of phase from the other side The connections and test current source angles shown in Figure 7 40 on page 7 68 will result in currents on LV being 180 out of phase from HV as required for the slope test T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 67 In on page 7 68 pay special attention to the polarity marks ofthe T PRO input and Current Sources As always confirm the test currents in Metering Analog as shown in Figure 7 38 on page 7 57 and Figure 7 39 on page 7 58 HV Injection Into A Out of B Source at 0 LV Injection Into B Source at 180 AC AC e Current Source CAS VAJ AU A B C T PRO 4000 Terminals LV T PRO 4000 Terminals HV Note same as Table 7 7 on page 7 69 con Note same as Table 7 7 on page 7 69 con nection 12 nection 11 Figure 7 40 Test Connections for Single Phase Slope Testing of Our Example Transformer Step 4 Find the Single Phase Magnitude Correction Factor When we put 1 0 A into A B of the CPC12 formulas of Current Phase Cor rection Table in Appendix L for HV in Step 3 we found that we got 1 0 A of Operating current on A B Since we get the full 1 0 A on the HV for 1 0 A in jected no additional magnitude correction factor is required 1 e the correction factor is 1 0 as 1s also stated in Single Phase Correction Factor Table on page 7 63 for a 0 connection On the 30 side
275. nce as long as they are the same qualities 3 Enter the exact Magnitude of the Applied Signal you are applying your test source 4 Execute the Calibrate Offset and Gain button am Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities File Help Analog Input Calibration Calibrate AC channel Chan Offset TAG si Applied Signal 5 Arms 0 5 to 61 5685 Calibrate Offset and Gain Ambient Top Oil JA Unt idenicaton A Communication A Time A Analog Input Calibration Extemal Input Virtual Inputs Toggle Outputs J Setings Group A Passwords J Close Main Menu Config Mgr Metering Utilities Ga ba agen BAT BREEHEROS Gangbang Figure 7 1 Enter the actual applied signal level If the applied test signal is not reasonable an error will be displayed and the calibration will not be applied For example in Figure 7 2 on page 7 3 the dis 7 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide played calibration error message indicates that we tried to calibrate a 5 amp level with no current applied which is not reasonable sem Relay 4000 Control Panel Utilities eji x File Help Analog Input Calibration Calibrate AC channel Chan Name Offset Gain Ch 1 AT OFFSET OK GAIN NO EU EE Ch2 IB1 5 Ch3 Ic1 1 5 Ch4 a2 0 5 to 61 5685 Ch5 B2 Calibrate Offset and Gain Ch6 Ic2 Ch7 A3 Calibration Error
276. nd 14 Output Contacts Optional I O Not Installed Comments Comments Setting Name Settings Name Date Created Modified 2013 06 20 11 00 00 Station Name Station Name Station Number 1 Location Location Bank Name Bank Name Analog Input Names VA Voltage A VB Voltage B VC Voltage C IA1 IA1 IB1 IB1 IC1 IC1 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 1 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 2 A2 A2 B2 B2 C2 C2 A3 A3 B3 B3 C3 C3 A4 A4 B4 B4 C4 C4 A5 A5 B5 B5 C5 C5 Temperature D C 1 DC1 Temperature D C 2 DC2 External Input Names 1 EI Spare 1 2 EI Spare 2 3 EI Spare 3 4 EI Spare 4 5 EI Spare 5 6 EI Spare 6 7 EI Spare 7 8 EI Spare 8 9 EI Spare 9 Output Contact Names Output 1 Out Spare 1 Output 2 Out Spare 2 Output 3 Out Spare 3 Output 4 Out Spare 4 Output 5 Out Spare 5 Output 6 Out Spare 6 Output 7 Out Spare 7 Output 8 Out Spare 8 Output 9 Out Spare 9 Output 10 Out Spare 10 Output 11 Out Spare 11 Output 12 Out Spare 12 Output 13 Out Spare 13 Output 14 Out Spare 14 Virtual Input Names T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges
277. nd Communications In the window Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Check the option No not this time In the window This wizard helps you install software for ERLPhase 4000 Series Device What do you want the wizard to do Check the option Install from a list or specific location Advanced In the window Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Uncheck the option Search removable media floppy CD ROM Check the option Include this location in the search Browse for the following folder C WINDOWS tiinst TUSB3410 In the window Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware ERLPhase 4000 Series Device has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Hit Continue Anyway In the window Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for ERLPhase 4000 Series Device Hit Finish To verify the installation was successful and to which comm port is the ER LPhase 4000 Series Device configured do the following D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 5 2 Setup and Communications In Windows XP go to Start gt Control Panel 5 Performance and Maintenance 5 System Hardware gt Device Manager gt Ports or if
278. nd comm ports shown separately on T PRO rear panel layout drawing 371003 2 All output relays can be programmed to operate on any relay function 3 All outputs are rated tripping duty interrupting via breaker aux a contact Notes Appendix J 1 Appendix K Function Logic Diagram Diagram in plastic sleeve D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix K 1 Appendix L Current Phase Correction Table Current Phase Correction Table CPC1 for 30 or 330 Net Winding Connection CPC2 for 60 or 300 Net Winding Connection 30 or 330 Shift T Ia Ib 60 or 300 Shift F is Ia 2Ib Ic 3 2X Reference 3 Reference SHIFT 30 TB Ib Ic NG IB Ct 30 Net Winding Ja Connection 7 Ic la PANG TG IC 2la Ib Ic IC mi 2c qe Connection 3 N3 CPC3 for 90 or 270 Net Winding Connection CPC4 for 120 or 240 Net Winding Connection 90 or 270 Shift H Ic Ib 120 or 240 Shift ue Ia Ib 2Ic ei Reference 3 0 Reference 3 IB _ la Ic IB 2la Ib Ic SHIFT 90 NE 3 _ Ib la 120 Net Winding IC ma aa Le ls 90 Net Winding IC m Connection 3 Connection WE CPC5 for 150 or 210 Net Winding Connection CPC6 for 180 or 180 Net Winding Connection 150 or 210 Shift w Ic Ia 180 or 180 Shift NS 2Ja HID 4 Ic 0 Reference 3 3 mam a a ad ama gt
279. nd control T PRO provides oth er functions such as Low Impedance Restricted Earth Fault 87N High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault 50N Digital control of current inputs Temperature monitoring TOEWS for asset monitoring loss of life Adaptive Pickup Overcurrent Thermal Overload Directional Overcurrent and Neutral Overcurrent Breaker Fail function for each current input Overexcitation Definite Time and Inverse Time Fixed Level or Rate of Change of Overfrequency and Underfrequency Phase Undervoltage Phase Overvoltage and Neutral Overvoltage Total Harmonic Distortion THD Through Fault Monitoring ProLogic control statements to address special protection and control needs 96 Sample per cycle recording of all analog channels and events Trend Recording 8 Setting Groups SG with setting group logic Relay Control Panel RCP is the Windows graphical user interface software tool provided with 4000 series and higher new generation ERL relays to com municate retrieve and manage records event logs fault logs manage settings D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 1 1 1 Overview identification protection SCADA etc display real time metering values view analyze and export records in COMTRADE format In addition to the protection functions the relay provides fault recording 96 samples cycle to facilitate analysis of the power system after a disturbance has taken place The trigg
280. ng f 11 phase B angle IMMXU1 MX A phsC cVal mag f I1 phase C magnitude IMMXU1 MX A phsC cVal ang f I1 phase C angle Appendix Q 16 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 IMMXU2 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMMXU2 of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMMXU2 MX A phsA cVal mag f I2 phase A magnitude IMMXU2 MX A phsA cVal ang f I2 phase A angle IMMXU2 MX A phsB cVal mag f I2 phase B magnitude IMMXU2 MX A phsB cVal ang f I2 phase B angle IMMXU2 MX A phsC cVal mag f I2 phase C magnitude IMMXU2 MX A phsC cVal ang f IMMXUS3 I2 phase C angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMMXU3 of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMMXU3SMXSASphsAScVal5magst I3 phase A magnitude IMMXU3 MX A phsA cVal ang f I3 phase A angle IMMXU3 MX A phsB cVal mag f I3 phase B magnitude IMMXUSSMXS AS phsB cVal ang f I3 phase B angle IMMXU3 MXSAS phsCScVal mag f I3 phase C magnitude IMMXU3 MX A phsC cVal ang f T PRO 4000 User Manual I3 phase C angle Appendix Q 17 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 18 IMMXU4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node IMMXU4 of the log ical device Measurements Data Name Description IMMXU4 MX
281. ngle for current out of the transformer In this example 30 180 150 to account for the 30 delta shift T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 55 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 6 T PRO Single Phase Slope Test 7 56 Performing Single Phase testing of the T PRO slope requires many calcula tions In order to complete the process satisfactorily one needs to get a very good understanding of the CPC tables of Current Phase Correction Table in Appendix L and how they are used by the relay to normalize the angles and eliminate zero sequence current To explain the Single Phase Slope test we start with a summary of the steps then provide details of each step and follow up with an example using our ex ample transformer of for details see Figure 7 31 T PRO Differential Slope Test Example on page 7 43 Steps to perform Single Phase Testing 1 Perform the current calculations for 3 phase testing from the previous sec tion 2 Determine the net current angle on each current input associated with each transformer winding In order to organize the shift of each input it s helpful to create a Net Angle Table NAT such as Table 7 1 on page 7 56 Table 7 1 Example of a Net Angle Table Column 1 Column2 Column 3 Column4 Column 5 Column 6 T PRO Associ Winding CT Angle Total Angle Use Current Phase Correction Input ated Angle Column 3 Equations of Appendix L Winding Column 4 Correction 1 x Co
282. nicating with the relay using a network link Communication with the relay using a direct serial link Using a Modem link internal external Using ERLPhase Relay Control Panel to access the relay s user interface Using HyperTerminal to access the relay s Maintenance and Update menus Setting the Baud rate Accessing the relay s Supervisory Control Data Acquisition SCADA services 2 2 Power Supply Case Grounding D02705R01 21 A wide range power supply is standard The nominal operating range is 48 250 Vdc 100 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz To protect against a possible short circuit in the supply the power supply should be protected with an inline fuse or circuit breaker with a 5 A rating Ensure that the chassis is grounded for proper operation and safety There are no power switches on the relay When the power supply is connect ed the relay starts its initialization process For details see Start up Sequence on page 3 1 You must ground the relay to the station ground using the case grounding ter minal at the back of the relay for details see Figure 1 4 T PRO Back View 3U on page 1 4 WARNING Ground the relay to station ground using the case grounding terminal at the back of the relay for details see Figure 1 4 T PRO Back View 3U on page 1 4 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 1 2 Setup and Communications 2 3 IRIG B Time Input E Relay Control Panel Utilities File Help Satellite
283. nient time to perform these tests is upon receipt and acceptance by the customer prior to in service settings be ing applied Once the in service settings are applied ERLPhase recommends that enabled functions be tested during commissioning to ensure that the in tended application is fulfilled 3 voltage sources e 2 sets of 3 phase currents recommended to test differential element but can be completed single phase by using 1 set of 3 phase currents with var iable frequency capability ohmmeter e 1 de mA calibrating source Or e al KQ to 10 KQ 1 0 Watt variable resistor and a milliammeter up to 25 mA Set nominal CT secondary current to either 5 A or 1 A and nominal system frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz This example uses 5 A 60 Hz T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 1 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Calibration The T PRO is calibrated before it leaves the factory and should not require recalibration unless component changes are made within the relay Before you begin a new calibration establish the accuracy of the equipment being used To perform a calibration you must be logged into the relay in Relay Control Panel at the Service access level 1 Proceed to the Utilities Analog Input Calibration tab The Analog Input Calibration screen lists all of the T PRO analog input channels 2 Selectthe channel to calibrate with your mouse you may select and calibrate multiple channels at o
284. nitiate breaker fail trigger Fault Recordings and to illuminate Target LEDs All of the Protection Functions ProLogics External Inputs and Virtual Inputs are organized into horizontal rows with all of the names listed in the left most column Disabled elements have their rows greyed out will be ignored by the relay and cannot be selected in the Output Matrix as long as the element re mains disabled A scroll bar at the right of the Output Matrix allows you to scroll up and down to reveal all of the rows The top row defines the purpose of each column including output contact numbers breaker fail initiates for the HV LV and TV breakers transient fault recording and Target LED Each coordinate where the row input element meets a column output ele ment is defined by a check box Each column of check boxes can be thought of a one large OR gate Place the mouse cursor over the check box at the de sired coordinate and click to toggle the status between mapped and unmapped A mapped check box will be marked with a green X The extreme right column has a drop down pick list in each cell where the user selects the LED or none that should be illuminated by the protection function of same row Protection Elements labeled as Alarm e g 24INV Alarm are activated by the pickup of the element when the element s threshold has been exceeded T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software
285. nitude D27_1MMXU18 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f D27 2MMXUI9 27 1 phase C fault voltage angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D27 2MMXUI9of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D27_2MMXU19 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 27 2 phase A fault voltage magnitude D27_2MMXU19 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 27 2 phase A fault voltage angle D27_2MMXU19 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 27 2 phase B fault voltage magnitude D27_2MMXU19 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 27 2 phase B fault voltage angle D27_2MMXU19 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 27 2 phase C fault voltage magnitude D27_2MMXU19 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f T PRO 4000 User Manual 27 2 phase C fault voltage angle D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D67MMXU20 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D67MMXU200f the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D67MMXU20 MX PhV phsA cVal mag f 67 phase A fault voltage magnitude D67MMXU20 MX PhV phsA cVal ang f 67 phase A fault voltage angle D67MMXU20 MX PhV phsB cVal mag f 67 phase B fault voltage magnitude D67MMXU20 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 67 phase B fault voltage angle D67MMXU20 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 67 phase C fault voltage magnitude D67MMXU20 MX PhV phsC cVal ang t 67 phase C fault voltage angle D67MMXU20 MX A phsA cVal mag f 67 phase A fault current magnitude D
286. nput 20 30 Virtual Input 30 Figure 6 8 Virtual Inputs Define meaningful names for the virtual inputs Table 6 7 Virtual Input Names Inputs 1 to 30 User defined 6 14 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Setting Groups Setting Group Names Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 SeingGroup4 O Setting Group 5 Setting Groups Setting Group 6 seting GroupS Setting Group 7 Setting Group O Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Figure 6 9 Setting Group Names Define meaningful names for the setting groups Table 6 8 Setting Group Names Setting Groups 1 to 8 User defined D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 15 6 Offliner Settings Software Nameplate Data Nameplate Data Transformer 3 Phase Capacity 1 2000 MYA 100 0 Maximum Transformer Rating Transformer Windings 3 Tap Changer Range 0 96 Note The following additional settings are for relays vwith temperature inputs Normal Loss of Life Hot Spot Temperature 110 0 C Note IEEE Standard 110 C for 65 C rise trf 95 C for 55 C rise trf Transformer Temperature Rise 65 He Transformer Cooling Method Self cooled Temp Rise Hot Spot TriseHS 25 00 C Temp Rise Top Oil TriseTop 55 00 C Temp Time Const Hot Spot TauHS 0 08 hours Temp Time Const Top Oil TauTop 3 00 hours Ratio of Load Loss to Iron Loss R 3 20
287. nt 1 7 File Edit Tools Window Help Oil salso gt Ra af ei C Identification Nameplate Data Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Comments C SCADA Communication 7 DNP Configuration Default Settings C SCADA Setting Summary C Record Length Setting Group 1 Setting Group 1 Protection Functions ProLogic Group Logic Output Matrix Settings Summary r C Setting Group 2 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 4 Setting Group 5 Setting Group 5 C Setting Group 6 Setting Group 6 CJ Setting Group 7 Setting Group 7 C Setting Group 8 Setting Group 8 Figure 6 18 Setting Groups Comments The relay has 8 setting groups SG The user can change all relay setting pa rameters except the physical connections such as input or output parameters in each setting group Use any one ofthe 16 available Group Logic Statements per setting group to perform Setting Group changes The Group Logic state ments are similar to the ProLogic statements with the following exceptions the sole function is to activate one of the 8 setting groups and the processing is in a slower half second cycle Group Logic inputs statements can be driven from ProLogic or any external input or virtual input or from previous Group Logic T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 27 6 Offliner Settings Software Protection Functions statements Each Group Logic statement includ
288. nt Variation 1 without time Not supported T PRO Offliner Variation reported when Variation 2 with absolute time See Note 2 variation 0 requested Based on point Index add column to table below below 2 2 7 Event reporting mode Only most recent Not supported T PRO Offliner All events See Note 2 below 2 2 8 Command Event Only most recent Not supported reporting mode All events 2 2 9 Maximum Time Not Applicable 10s between Select and Fixed at 10 seconds Operate Configurable range to seconds Configurable selectable from seconds Configurable other describe Variable explain Based on point Index add column to table below 2 2 10 Definition of Binary Fixed list shown in table below Complete list is T PRO Offliner Output Status Control I Configurable shown in the relay output block Other explain table below CROB Point List points excluded from the default configuration are marked with D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 19 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 Binary Outputs are scanned with 500 ms resolution 2 Events are not supported for Binary Outputs group 10 but most of Binary Output points can be mapped to Binary Inputs group 2 with full Event and Class Data support See T PRO Offliner DNP Configuration Point Map screen for com plete point lists and configuration options
289. o 20 00 Hysteresis pu 0 00 to MIN 1 00 Pickup Level Pickup Delay Tp1 seconds 0 00 to 99 99 Dropout Delay Td1 seconds 0 00 to 99 99 Ft Alarm Limit kA2 s 0 1 to 9999 9 2nd Harmonics Block Enable Disable 2nd Harmonics Block Pickup Timer Tp2 seconds 0 00 to 99 99 2nd Harmonics Dropout Timer Td2 seconds 0 00 to 99 99 4 42 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 1 ProLogic ProLogic Control Statements Input A Input B Input C Input D Input E D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications With ProLogic you can select any of the protection functions External Inputs Virtual Inputs Output Contact status or any preceding ProLogic statements and place them into intuitive Boolean like statements Each ProLogic handles up to 5 functions to generate one ProLogic statement Twenty four statements are possible per setting group Each ProLogic has a pickup and dropout timer and a custom name field The results from these statements can be mapped to output contacts or any ofthe eleven configurable front panel target LEDs in the output matrix The possible gates are AND NAND OR NOR XOR XNOR NXOR and LATCH The example shows A to E inputs are status points of devices that are user se lectable Each ProLogic output can be given a specific name pickup and reset time delay ProLogic Out Figure 4 21 ProLogic Method Relay Alarm Name Pickup Delay 3 00 s ar
290. o be in phase with the reference Consider the following example in Fig ure 4 3 on page 4 5 Input 1 Input 2 CM 7 PT Ita 11b Ic HV I2a I2b 12c Transformer YDD Input 5 z TV T Y I5a I5b I5c Input 3 pve a m y m Te Es 13a 13b 13c I4a 14b 14c Figure 4 3 Example of 3 Winding Transformer Application Using 5 Inputs For this example the PT is selected as being on the HV side therefore the HV main transformer winding is the reference fixed at Wye 0 If the PT had been on the LV side then the LV main transformer winding would be the reference Delta 0 We continue with the example still assuming that the PT is on the HV side 2 Phase Corrections There are two phase corrections required one for the transformer winding and one for CT connections Rather than correcting both separately the total cor rection required on each winding CT combination is determined Although the reference transformer winding is fixed at 0 it still must be added to its CT angle to obtain the total winding angle to be corrected For example in our ex ample connection CT 2 has a 180 shift and is connected on the 0 reference T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 5 4 Protection Functions and Specifications winding therefore the sum of HV winding and CT 2 combination is 0 180 180 The total angle of 180 must be compensated by 180 Based on the example of for details see Figure 4 3 Example of 3 Winding Transform
291. of the relay is available as an RJ 45 or ST fiber optic port DNP communications can be used with multiple masters when it is utilized with TCP For details on con necting to the Ethernet LAN see Network Link on page 2 7 T PRO 4000 User Manual 5 1 5 Data Communications SCADA The data points available for DNP SCADA interface are selectable by the user Complete details regarding the DNP3 protocol emulation and data point lists can be found in DNP3 Device Profile in Appendix F The parameters for SCADA communications may be defined using T PRO Configuration 4000 Offliner and Settings If DNP3 LAN WAN communications were chosen the relay s network param eters need to be defined This is done via the Maintenance interface Note that this effort may already have been completed as part of the steps taken to estab lish a network maintenance connection to the relay Establish a TUI session with the relay and log in as Maintenance The following screen appears TPRO 4000 HyperTerminal BAE File Edit View Call Transfer Help Dc 5 28 I T PRO 4000 System Utilities ERLPhase Power Technologies Ltd Customer support 204 477 0591 support erlphase com Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration Restore only default configuration settings channel definitions device settings
292. oint IRs IO 1 0 pu IR 5 0 pu The third point shown in Figure 7 33 on page 7 46 1s IRs IO at IRs is deter mined from the IRs Slopel and Slope2 settings in 32 on page 7 50 S2xIR S1 S2 32 4 IO IRs 100 100 IRs setting 5 0pu Slopel setting 20 Slope2 setting 4096 40x50 20 40 100 100 IO x5 0 2 0 2x5 0 1 0pu We will then use the mathematical elimination and substitution methods on Equations 28 and 30 on page 7 46 to determine the I and I y test cur rents Solve for Igy and Ij y at IO 1 0 and IR IRs 5 0 per unit Use above equations 28 and 30 on page 7 46 to solve for IO and IR IO Jy 33 1 0 Ipy 1 y Part 1 IR Hurt lop 34 2 5 0 Cay i 5 0x2 od RES 10 0 Igy t Izy Part 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Solve for Ij y by eliminating IHV by subtracting the equation Part 2 from Part 1 1 0 pu Igy Ty Part 1 10 0 pu luv an lty Part 2 Total 9 0 pu 0 2Iry 9 0 pu Ipy 4 50 pu 2 IpyAmps IryBaseSec X ILVpu 1 004 A x 4 50 pu 4 52 A Substitute the Ij y per unit value back into Part 1 to solve for Iy IO Iny liy 1 0 pu Igy 4 50 pu Igy 5 50 pu InvAmps TuvBaseSec X Invpu 1 004 A x 5 50 pu 5 52 A Summary of IRs Calculations High Side 230 kV Low Side 115 kV HV Current Value LV Current Value 7 9 per unit 6 1 per unit
293. oled non directed flow OFAF OFWF ONAN OFAF OFAF User defined Temp Rise Hot Spot TriseHS degrees 10 to 110 Temp Rise Top Oil TriseTop degrees 10 to 110 Temp Time Const Hot Spot TauHS 0 04 to 2 00 hours Temp Time Const Top Oil TauTop 0 02 to 20 00 hours Ratio of Load Loss to Iron Loss R 0 50 to 10 00 Hot Spot Temp Exponent m 0 50 to 2 00 Top Oil Temp Exponent n 0 50 to 2 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 17 6 Offliner Settings Software Connections Windings CT Connections Winding CT PT Connections Transformer Nameplate Voltage Input Connection Hi Ly TV Voltage v 230 0 115 0 13 8 PT Tums Ratio panno 1 Connection v x ify Lacation Hy Phase deg 7 mr pr lin oo a io Current Input Connection EU CT Phase CT Turns Current Inputs Winding Connection deg Ratio 1 External Input Input 1 Ww zv E oz Input 2 i v Ju 2l 0000 nane B GG e i input TY mv e Sf 000 00 crone gt Neutral CT Turns Ratio 1 Input 54 HV 100 00 Input 5B LV 200 00 Input 5C T4 200 00 Figure 6 11 Windings CT These settings provide the T PRO with the information related to CT ratios winding connections wye or delta main winding nominal voltage and main winding connection The relay allows any combination of wye and delta con nections The field location associated with the PT ratio is use
294. ommand 1 11 1 Current network configuration Port 119 MAC address 0021850108CD Port 119 IP addres 192 168 100 85 Port 119 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Port 120 MAC address 002185010acc Port 120 IP addres 192 168 101 85 Port 120 subnet mask 299 2909 299 0 Default Gateway 192 168 100 1 IEC 61850 port 120 Do you want to change the IP address for port 119 Connected 0 00 17 vT100 115200 8 N 1 Figure 5 7 Change the network parameters as needed for the particular application Note that unit s IP address can be used on the IEC61850 client side for unique unit identification instead of a physical device PD Name The Publisher con figuration is fixed and defined in the ICD file and available for reading to any IEC61850 client Subscriber functionality is also fixed and supported for the Virtual Inputs only T PRO 4000 User Manual 5 9 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 1 Introduction D02705R01 21 This section deals with the Offliner Settings software The Offliner settings software is used to create relay settings on a personal computer Offliner pro vides an easy way to view and manipulate settings Offliner supports all firm ware versions and has the capability to convert older setting versions into new er ones In this section first the Offliner features are presented The menu and toolbar are discussed and this is followed by a description of the Graphing and Protec tion functions Next the Offliner fea
295. ompatibility Offliner Settings displays the version number in the second pane on the bottom status bar The settings version is a whole number v3 v4 v9 v10 v401 etc Settings up to v10 are for T PRO 8700 model relay only v401 and higher are for T PRO 4000 model relays The Offliner Settings program is backward compatible Open and edit older settings files and convert older settings files to a newer version for relays with upgraded firmware Offliner Settings handles forward conversion only where you can convert an older version of settings to a newer version Conve rting a 1 Open the setting file you wish to convert Settings File 2 In the File menu select Convert to and then select the version x where x is the newer version A dialog box pops up prompting the user for a new file name You may use the same file name and overwrite the old or you may enter a new file name The conversion process inserts default values for any newly added devices in the new setting file When the conversion 1s com plete Offliner Settings displays the new file D02705R01 21 E Save As Save in T PRO Offliner Settings e e Eg Name Date modified Type Size Ji bin 11 09 2012 11 09 File folder E TPROaccTestsetting50hz tps 11 05 2011 3 36 PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB E TPROaccTestsetting60hz tps 11 05 20113 36 PM T PRO Settings D 10 KB E 2 sample tps 20 04 2011 9 54 PM T PRO Settings D
296. on the relay using the Records function in Relay Control Panel 3 Initiate transfer of the selected records to your computer 4 Start the RecordBase View program and use the File Open menu command to open the downloaded record files located in the receive directory speci fied in step 1 For further instructions refer to the RecordBase View Manual at the back of the printed version of this manual D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 33 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 7 1 Relay Testing Test Equipment Requirements D02705R01 21 ERL Phase relays are fully tested before leaving the factory A visual inspec tion of the relay and its packaging is recommended on receipt to ensure the re lay was not damaged during shipping The electronics in the relay contain static sensitive devices and are not user serviceable If the relay is opened for any reason exposing the electronics take extreme care to ensure that you and the relay are solidly grounded Generally an analog metering check and a test of the I O External Inputs and Output Contacts upon delivery and acceptance is sufficient to ensure the func tionality of the relay Further tests according to the published relay specifica tions in IED Settings and Ranges in Appendix B can be performed at the purchaser s option The following test section is intended to be a guide for testing the protection elements in the T PRO relay The most conve
297. onfigurable methods columns The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the capabilities and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Config Values contains only the Current Value column Not supported 1 1 12 External DNP3 XML files available Off line Rd WrFilenameDescription of Contents dnpDP xml Complete Device Profile dnpDPcap xml Device Profile Capabilities dnpDPcfg xml Device Profile config values xml The Complete Device Profile Document contains the capabilities Current Value and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Capabilities contains only the capabilities and configurable methods columns The Device Profile Config Values contains only the Current Value column Not supported 1 1 13 Connections Supported Appendix F 2 I Serial complete section 1 2 I IP Networking complete section 1 3 Other explain T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 2 Serial Connections Capabilities Current Value i configurable list methods 1 2 1 Port Name Port 122 1 2 2 Serial Connection Asynchronous 8 Data Bits 1 Start Bit 1 Stop Not configured T PRO Offliner Parameters Bit No Parity for DNP Other explain Asynchronous with selectable parity 1 2 3 Baud Rate Fixed at Not configured T PRO Offliner Configurable range to for DNP Configurable selectable from 300 1200 2400 960
298. onnected Direct Serial USB Baud Rate 115200 Modem Initialization String MOSO 0 38400 Baud Rate Modem Initialization String MOSO 0 Unit Identiication Communication Time Excemal Inout A Setings Group Virtual Inputs Loss of Lie Through Fault Clear Trend Log Cancel Save Close Figure 2 12 T PRO Internal Modem Settings in Relay Control Panel circled settings are available when Internal Modem is installed T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications 2 9 Using HyperTerminal to Access the Relay s Maintenance Menu D02705R01 21 This section describes how to configure a standard Windows VT 100 terminal program on the computer for use with the T PRO in order to access the T PRO maintenance and update functions The computer must be connected to the relay via the front USB service port 150 The relay is accessed using a standard VT 100 terminal style program on the computer eliminating the need for specialized software Any terminal program that fully supports VT 100 emulation and provides Z modem file transfer ser vices can be used For example the HyperTerminal program which is includ ed in Windows XP and is also available separately as HyperTerminal PE is used here as an example Configure the terminal program as described in Table 2 1 on page 2 13 and link it to the appropriate serial port modem or TCP IP socket on the computer T
299. ons are progressively visible and available depending on other selections As noted before there is no field to configure the number of data and stop bits These values are fixed as follows Modbus Serial 7 data bits 1 stop bit DNP Serial 8 data bits 1 stop bit 5 4 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 5 Data Communications Monitori ng The ability to monitor SCADA communications directly can be a valuable SCADA commissioning and troubleshooting tool It can assist in resolving SCADA Communications communication difficulties such as incompatible baud rate or addressing The D02705R01 21 utility can be accessed through the Maintenance user interface for details see Maintenance Menu Commands on page 2 15 1 Establish a TUI session with the relay and log in as Maintenance 2 Select the option 9 by entering the number 9 followed by Enter The follow ing screen appears USB Connection HyperTerminal em Edit View Call Transfer Help sos 08 Modify IP Address subnet mask and default gateway if applicable View system diagnostics Retrieve system diagnostics Restore ALL default settings including calibration Restore only default configuration settings Cchannel definitions device settings Restore only default system setup ports time settings Force hardware reset Network utilities Monitor SCADA Modify IEC61858 IED name Exit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 port 158 access only Please ent
300. ontrol Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor for pickup Top Oil Alarm 3 With 18 mA being injected into Top Oil Temperature input Top Oil Alarm Low 4 Ramp mA input up from 18 mA At approximately 21 mA TopOil Alarm High T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 23 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 5 Remove mA input from Top Oil Temperature input Top Oil Alarm High since 0 mA is out of the setting range 6 End of Top Oil Alarm test 49 Thermal Prepare to inject dc milliamps into Top Oil Temperature input 7 232 233 Overload Test Settings e 49 HV 12 per unit Hysteresis 0 1 per unit and Top Oil Temperature 160 C Temperature Hysteresis 1 0 C As shown in Figure 7 27 on page 7 34 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix 49 Trip mapped to Out 12 Current Input Switch IHV Max ON ILV Max O Tp1 ITV Max 0 Off o il Naa zu gt Logic Gate Switch Lo Temp Input Switch Hot Spot Temperature O Top Oil Temperature Qo KB Off o Td Figure 7 16 Logic Thermal Overload 49 M ma Output 12 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering5 Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor for pickup 49 1 Trip 3 Inject 18 mAdc into Top Oil Temperature input 160 C setting is exceeded and Inject 3 phase currents into Ph A 300 301
301. or 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 3 Input C lt Unused 05 Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt PL 17 ProLogic 17 ProLogic 17 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 05 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 18 ProLogic 18 ProLogic 18 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 05 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 19 ProLogic 19 ProLogic 19 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 05 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 23 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 24 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 20 ProLogi
302. or pickup 60 Alarm Apply balanced 3 phase nominal voltage 66 4 V to the T PRO terminals Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V Z 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 120 Ph N 333 4 Observe 60 Alarm Low Remove the voltage from any single phase 60 Alarm High 6 Turn all voltage off 60 Alarm Low Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 60 Alarm Contact Qutput Contact 7in our settings 2 Apply 3 phase voltages as in Step 3 above 3 Set timer to start from single phase 66 4 V to 0 V transition i e V On to V Off 4 Time from V Off to Out 7 Closed expect 10 seconds 5 End of 60 test Settings 24DEF Enabled 24INV Enabled 24INV Pickup 1 2 per unit 1 2 66 4 V 60 Hz 79 7 V a 60 Hz K 0 1 e 24DEF Pickup 1 25 per unit 1 25 66 4 V 60 Hz 83 V 60 Hz As shown in Figure 7 7 on page 7 10 map the elements to outputs in the Output Matrix Map 24INV Alarm to Out7 Map 24INV Trip to Out4 Map 24DEF to Out1 DTD Out 1 24VPOS Freq Out 7 a Out 4 J U 24VPOS Freq Figure 7 7 Logic Overexcitation 24 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 24INVerse and 24DEFinite Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following elements for pickup 24INV Alarm 24DEF Trip 3 Apply balanced 3 phas
303. or proving the 87 High Mismatch slope charac teristic In order to perform a proper differential slope test any Operating phas es are seen in one side of the transformer must be mirrored on the other side For example if you have operating current in phases A amp B ofthe HV side you must also have operating current in phases A amp B on the LV side in order to simulate an external through fault Also for simulating an ideal external fault the phases on one side must be 180 out of phase from the other side For example where an external fault has A B on HV side there must be A B or B A on the LV side Use the Single Phase Selection Tables Table 7 2 on page 7 61 Table 7 3 on page 7 61 and Table 7 4 on page 7 62 to determine which phase s to inject for your single phase 87 High Mismatch test The Single Phase Selection Tables SPST i e Table 7 2 on page 7 61 Table 7 3 on page 7 61 and Table 7 4 on page 7 62 may be used to quickly deter mine which phase or phases will have Operating current if you inject only Phase A Table 7 2 on page 7 61 Table 7 3 on page 7 61 and Table 7 4 on page 7 62 The Operating phase s for an input shall depend on which wind ing it is associated and that inputs net angle You can determine the net angle and document your calculations in the NAT created in Step 2 Each SPST Tables Table 7 2 on page 7 61 Table 7 3 on page 7 61 and Table 7 4 on page 7 62 have 3 columns labeled
304. ormance statement The basic conformance statement shall be as defined in Table Q 1 Basic Con formance Statement Table Q 1 Basic Conformance Statement Server Publisher Remarks Client Server Roles B11 Server Side of TWO PARTY APPLICATION c1 YES ASSOCIATION B12 Client Side of TWO PARTY APPLICATION ASSO NO CIATION SCSMs supported B21 SCSM IEC 61850 8 1 used YES B22 SCSM IEC 61850 9 1 used NO B23 SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used NO B24 SCSM other NO Generic Substation event Model GSE B31 Publisher side O YES B32 Subscriber Side YES Transmission of Sampled value model SVC B41 Publisher side O NO B42 Subscriber side NO c1 Shall be M if support for LOGICAL DEVICE model has been declared O Optional M Mandatory D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 1 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Appendix Q 2 ACSI models conformance statement The ASCI models conformance statement shall be as defined in Table Q 2 ACSI models Conformance Statement Table Q 2 ACSI models Conformance Statement Publisher Remarks If Server side B11 supported M1 Logical Device c2 YES M2 Logical Node c3 YES M3 Data c4 YES M4 Data Set c5 YES M5 Substitution O YES M6 Setting group control YES Reporting M7 Buffered
305. ow 50 Trip Low 51HV Timing Test 1 Monitor timer stop on 51HV Trip Contact Output Contact 2 in the settings 2 Set timer start from 3 phase 0 0 A to 3 60 A transition This equates to 3x pickup Time Delay A 3 922 3 922 10 TMS L h 4x 0 0982 ir 4x 0 0982 235s Cadac 1 3 1 3 End of 50HV 51HV test 51ADP Adaptive Settings Pickup Test Nameplate Cooling Type 1 Self Cooled OA or OW e Ambient Temperature Scaling 4 mAdc 40 C 20 mAdc 40 C 51ADP Multiple of Normal Loss of Life 1 0 51 HV ADP Enabled 51 HV ADP Pickup m To 51 I Pickup T Ambient Adjustment Figure 7 15 Logic Overcurrent Adaptive Pickup 51ADP 51ADP Test Procedure To simulate an ambient temperature of 30 C inject 18 0 milliamps dc into the Ambient Temperature Input terminals 230 231 In Relay Control Panel Metering gt Trend D49 gt Ambient Temp or Front HMI access Metering Analog Trend Ambient Temp confirm a 30 C reading Using the graph Figure M 3 Allowed Loading 65 C Rise Transformer Type 1 Cooling on page M 4 Appendix M see that at 30 C the overload charac teristic is de rated to 1 0 per unit for a relative loss of life setting of 1 0 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic or Front HMI Metering gt Log ic Logic Protections 3 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 51HV Alarm 3 Apply balanced 3 phase currents to the T PRO terminals as follows Ph
306. p 1 x o 1 1 x Target LED 3 67 Alarm E HH x O x Alarm LED Ambient Temp Anm O O D m m m m m fo m CUN MCN X fem T PRO Offliner Settings v401 Use the space bar to toggle the matrix on off Setting Group 3 Figure 7 26 Output Matrix Note BFI LV should be selected for LV winding input 4 and BFI TV winding input 5 5 Inject main voltage to the T PRO terminal as follows V 330 333 70 V to operate 59 1 trip for fault and breaker failure initi ation Observe 59 overvoltage High Out 17 Closed Current Detection Method 6 Apply single phase current to T PRO Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 and Input 5 as follows PhI1A 300 301 21 5 A PhI2A 306 307 1 5 A PhI3A 312 3132 1 5 A PhI4A 318 319 15A PhISA 324 3252 1 5 A Observe Input 1 Trip 1 50BF High Input 1 Trip 2 50BF High Input 2 Trip 1 50BF High Input 2 Trip 2 50BF High Input 3 Trip 1 50BF High Input 3 Trip 2 50BF High Input 4 Trip 1 50BF High Input 4 Trip 2 50BF High Input 5 Trip 1 50BF High T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 87 Differential Test D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Input 5 Trip 2 50BF High Out 15 Closed 7 Turn current off Observe 50BF elements Low Observe Output 15 Open External Input Method 8 Make External Input 9 High Observe Input 4 Trip 1 50BF High Input 4 Trip 2 50BF High Input 5 Trip 1 50BF High Input 5 Trip 2 50BF Hi
307. p of the screen or the item on the left menu tree Table 6 3 Identification Identification Settings Version Indicates the settings version number fixed Ignore Serial Number Bypass serial number check if enabled Serial Number Available at back of each relay Unit ID User defined up to 20 characters Nominal CT Sec Current 5Aor1A Nominal System Frequency 60 Hz or 50 Hz T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 9 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 10 Table 6 3 Identification Standard I O 9 External Inputs 14 Output Contacts Optional I O 9Not Installed or 11 External Inputs 7 Output Contacts Comments User defined up to 78 characters Setting Software Setting Name User defined up to 20 characters Date Created Modified Indicates the last time settings were entered Station Station Name User defined up to 20 characters Station Number User defined up to 20 characters Location User defined up to 20 characters Bank Name User defined up to 20 characters Important Note Nominal CT Sec Current can be set to either 1 A or 5 A Nominal System Frequency can be set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Ensure setting file selection matches that of target T PRO The serial number of the relay must match the one in the setting file or the setting will be rejected by the relay This feature ensures that the correct setting file is applied to the righ
308. p u 0 01 0 01 75 THD 2 0 Configurable 0 01 0 01 1 0 0 0 96 0 01 0 01 76 TOEWS Minutes to trip 2 0 30 1 0 0 0 Minutes 1 0 1 0 77 Self Check Fail 2 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 1 0 78 Accumulated IA IA t 2 0 65 535 0 001 0 001 1 0 0 0 kA kA s 0 001 0 001 79 Accumulated IB IB t 2 0 65 535 0 001 0 001 1 0 kA kA s 0 001 0 001 80 Accumulated IC IC t 2 0 65 535 0 001 0 001 1 0 kA kA s 0 001 0 001 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 25 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Transmitted Value Scaling 3 Paid Xie Multipli Resolution Name rues o Minimum Maximum eraut range Offset Units default Description 1 2 3 or none maximal 81 Accumulated Through Fault 2 0 65 535 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 1 0 count 82 Active Setting Group 2 d 8 1 0 0 0 NA 1 0 83 S 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 MVA 0 1 0 00001 84 PF 2 1000 1000 0 01 0 001 0 1 0 NA 0 01 0 001 85 Voltage VO 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 86 Voltage V2 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 87 1 zero 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 88 1 negative 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 89 2 positive 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 A 1 0 0 01 90 2 zero 2 0
309. pecifications THD 100 times the square root of the sum of the squares of the current har monics 2nd 25th divided by the fundamental current value THD is defined as 25 20 X THD 2 x 100 h where 11 is the fundamental component n 2 to n 25 are the harmonics components The inputs to this function are the THD values of all the current input channels that are connected to the transformer The channels that are not connected to the transformer e g for recording only or channels with low fundamental sig nals less than 14 of nominal current are not calculated for THD The alarm is activated if the highest THD found exceeds the setting There is a built in fixed time delay of from 30 40 seconds pickup and 1 10 seconds dropout to ensure that this is not a transient fault condition The THD is executed in a slow rate once per second The THD values are calculated from the 96 samples buffer rather than the decimated 8 samples buffer because higher harmonics content up to the 25th can be included with 96 samples Table 4 31 Total Harmonic Distortion THD Alarm THD Alarm Enable disable Pickup 5 0 to 100 0 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 39 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Th rough Fault The Through Fault Monitor function in T PRO is used to analyze the thermal Monitor and mechanical effects of through faults on the transformer The monitored quantities include th
310. put C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 13 ProLogic 13 ProLogic 13 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 22 Operator 4 Input D lt Unused 05 Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 0 gt PL 14 ProLogic 14 ProLogic 14 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 15 ProLogic 15 ProLogic 15 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 16 ProLogic 16 ProLogic 16 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operat
311. r 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 2 ProLogic 2 ProLogic 2 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 17 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 18 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 3 ProLogic 3 ProLogic 3 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 4 ProLogic 4 ProLogic 4 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt PL 5 ProLogic 5 ProLogic 5 Disabled T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D027
312. r selectable and you can connect to the HV or the LV side The field toggles when clicked between HV and LV You can assign five sets of AC currents to the HV LV TV sides or to NC not connected Assigning a current to NC makes it available for recording only In our example of Figure 6 11 Windings CT Inputs 1 amp 2 are assigned to the HV high voltage side nputs 3 amp 4 are assigned to the LV low voltage side nput 5 1s assigned to the TV tertiary voltage side The current inputs must have at least one input on each of the HV LV and TV side An error message appears if this is violated If the 5IN or 87N functions are used they shall use analog input 5 6 18 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software You can use the 87N in T PRO for autotransformers provided there is a neutral CT and the HV and LV CTs are wye connected If that is the case analog input IAS normally associated with HV becomes the input for this current IB5 and IC5 are then not used for protection However they could be used to record currents from other CT sources T PRO allows assignment of external control of each ac input as indicated in Figure 6 11 Windings CT In this example the ac current inputs 1 2 3 are controlled by external inputs 1 2 3 respectively The ac current input will be internally turned off when the corresponding external input is high In general each of 5 ac current inputs ca
313. r unit Conversely the transformer is automatically de rated to about 0 93 per unit if the ambient temperature goes to 40 C Allowed Loading 65 degC rise Transformer Type 5 cooling co N KB Oo Relative rate of loss of life 64 top curve 32 16 co a o Allowed Loading per unit o P a N o 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Ambient Temp deg C Figure M 1 Allowed Loading 65 C Rise Transformer Type 5 Cooling Ifa relative rate of loss of life of 1 is chosen and a loading just below pick up were to persist for 24 hours normal i e design loss of life would occur However loading 1s seldom this constant Thus it can be seen that higher rates of loss of life might be reasonably accepted 2 4 8 16 32 Under such conditions the continued trend logging of inter nal temperatures and accumulated loss of life become valuable features of the T PRO Relay Appendix M 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix M Loss of Life of Solid Insulation Example 2 Refer to the same curve in Example 1 in Appendix M Suppose for the same transformer a relative rate of loss of life of 8 has been selected First note that this corresponds to a steady state hot spot temperature of 130 C see Table 65 C Rise
314. ral Overcurrent ISA Phasor which is INhv 5B Phasor which is INIv 5C Phasor which is INtv The fault log can be viewed in three ways Relay Front HMI Relay Control Panel interface is in the Events tab 61850 SCADA protocol included in the T PRO allow the SCADA client access to Trip event data T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 8 Output Matrix The T PRO Output Matrix is organized intuitively into a series of rows and columns The rows contain all of the internal operating elements such as pro tection alarms protection trips ProLogic outputs External Inputs Virtual In puts The columns contain all of the output contacts breaker fail initiates recording triggers and target LED selections Selecting which row to connect to the column is a simple matter of placing your mouse cursor over the desired row and column intersection and clicking The click of the mouse will toggle a green X on or off If the X is present then the item is mapped If there is no X then the item is not mapped The LEDs are selectable in the last column for each row Use the drop down list to select the desired LED to illuminate for the element that defines the row Functions that are disabled in the settings are shaded grey in the Output Matrix and cannot be selected T PRO Offliner Settings Document 1 CA Ele Edit Tools Window Heb Diajn lee la jT vj O
315. rameters for defining the curve TR Factor for altering the reset time Table 4 22 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Setting Ranges 50 HV LV TV Enable disable Pickup pu 0 10 to 100 0 Pickup Delay sec 0 00 to 99 99 onds 51 HV LV TV Enable disable Pickup pu 0 05 to 5 00 Curve Type See Table 4 11 IEC and IEEE Curves on page 4 22 Tms Time Multiplier Setting 0 01 to 10 00 A 0 0010 to 1000 0 B 0 0000 to 10 00 p 0 01 to 10 0 TR 0 10 to 100 00 51ADP Enable disable T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 51ADP Adaptive Overcurrent D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 22 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Setting Ranges Multiple of Normal LOL 0 5 to 512 0 I gt Overload Fault Region Region 1 5 0 7 1 0 1 5 2 1 Tod Hot day Cold day Current per unit Figure 4 14 Ambient Temperature Adaptation Ambient Temperature Adaptive Pickup ADP adjusts the pickup level of de vice 51HV based on the ambient temperature a user entered multiplier of nor mal loss of life and the equations defined in IEEE standard C57 92 1981 The adaptive function is executed at a rate of once per second If this function is enabled the calculated adaptive pickup value becomes the device 51HV pickup setting The 51ADP function re shapes the inverse time curve only in the overload region up to 2 15 per unit for details see Figur
316. re used as the reference T PRO 4000 User Manual Table 6 11 Zig Zag Transformer Support Connection LV Phase Zig Zag Transformer Type No Degree DZO delta wye 0 YZ1 wye wye 30 YZ5 wye wye 150 DZ6 delta wye 180 YZ11 wye wye 30 DZ2 delta wye 60 DZ4 delta wye 120 YZ7 wye wye 150 DZ8 delta wye 120 DZ10 delta wye 60 D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 6 Offliner Settings Software Temperature Scaling Temperature Scaling Note The following additional settings are for relays with temperature inputs Ambient Max Valid Temperature 50 0 C Min Valid Temperature 50 0 C Max Correlating Current value 20 00 mA Min Correlating Current Value 4 00 m amp alelele Top Oil Calculated C Sensed Max Valid Temperature 200 0 C Min Valid Temperature 40 0 C Max Correlating Current value 20 00 mA Min Correlating Current Value 4 00 m amp FERE Figure 6 12 Temperature Scaling Ambient and Top Oil Temperature The Ambient and Top Oil temperatures are related to a corresponding milliamp mA input current quantity The upper and lower temperature levels corre spond to upper and lower mA levels If the mA input received is outside of this range an alarm will be initiated to indicate the over or under condition You can also set whether the top oil is sensed or calculated Table 6 12 Temperature Scaling Ambient Maximum Valid Te
317. rement D87 87 operating and restraint fault currents FaultData D67NMMXU22 Measurement D67N 67N fault voltages and cur rents FaultData D24DEFMSQI1 Sequence and D24DEF 1 24DEF 1 fault sequence volt imbalance ages FaultData D24DEFMSQI2 Sequence and D24DEF 2 24DEF 1 fault sequence volt imbalance ages FaultData D24InvMSQI3 Sequence and D24INV 24INV fault sequence volt imbalance ages FaultData D87NHVMMXN1 Non phase related D87N HV 87N HV operating and measurement restraint fault currents FaultData D87NLVMMXN2 Non phase related D87N LV 87N LV operating and measurement restraint fault currents FaultData D87NTVMMXN3 Non phase related D87N TV 87N TV operating and measurement restraint fault currents D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix Q 13 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Logical node specifications The following sections provide detailed information on the logical nodes of the T PRO logical devices as defined in the previous section Note Common Logical Node information is not shown in the following sections Only the data that are provided from the T PRO application to the IEC 61850 sub system are described HBFGGIOI This section defines logical node data for the logical node HBFGGIO of the logical device Measurements Data Name Description HBFGGIO1 MX AnIn1 mag f 11 phase A 2 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO1 MXS AnIn2 mag f 11 phase B 2 4 harmonic magnitude HBFGGIO1 MXS
318. rents for any point on the slope characteristic Step 2 Determine net phase shift of each T PRO current input To simplify the pro cess create a Net Angle Table such as Table 7 1 on page 7 56 Sum the suffixes of your Winding and CT configurations and enter them into your Net Angle Table NAT Examples of angles to enter into your table Delta 430 enter 430 Delta 60 enter 460 Wye 30 Enter 30 Delta 0 Enter 0 Wye 180 Enter 180 Etc 7 58 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide D02705R01 21 This is a Net Angle Table NAT that we created for our example transformer of Figure 7 22 Transformer is connected Wye 0 Delta 30 and with Wye 0 CTs on both sides Column 1 Column2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 T PRO Associated Winding CT Angle Total Use CPC Equations of Input Winding Angle Angle Appendix L Column 3 Correction 1 x Column 5 Column 4 Input 1 HV Wye 0 Wye 0 0 0 CPC12 Input 2 LV Delta 30 Wye 0 30 30 CPC1 Input 3 NA Input 4 NA z 2 Input 5 NA Step 3 The ultimate goal of Step 3 is to always obtain 2 operating phases from a single current source on each transformer side We will demonstrate how to select which phase or phases to inject so that two operating phases are always ob tained We use ideal external faults f
319. rogram launches automatically Installation may take a few minutes to start T PRO 4000 User Manual xi System Requirements xii To view the T PRO User Manual the user must have Adobe Acrobat on your computer If a copy is needed download a copy by clicking on Download Ado be Acrobat Anti virus Anti spyware Software If an anti virus anti spyware software on your local system identifies any of the ERLPhase applications as a potential threat it will be necessary to con figure your anti virus anti software to classify it as safe for its proper oper ation Please consult the appropriate anti virus anti spyware software documentation to determine the relevant procedure T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Version Compatibility D02705R01 21 This chart indicates the versions of Offliner Settings RecordBase View and the User Manual which are compatible with different versions of T PRO firm Ware RecordBase View and Offliner Settings are backward compatible with all ear lier versions of records and setting files You can use RecordBase View to view records produced by any version of T PRO firmware and Offliner Settings can create and edit older setting file versions Minor releases designated with a letter suffix e g v3 1a maintain the same compatibility as their base version For example T PRO firmware v3 1c and Offliner Settings v3 1a are compatible T PRO Firmware Software
320. rtual Input 25 Y Y Y X Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 39 Virtual Input 26 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 40 Virtual Input 27 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 41 Virtual Input 28 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 42 Virtual Input 29 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 43 Virtual Input 30 Y Y Y NY Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 44 Output Contact 15 Y Y Y Y Mi Open Closed None None Pulse duration fixed atis 45 Output Contact 16 Open Closed None None D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Point Index Name Supported Control Operations Select Operate Direct Operate Direct Operate No Ack Pulse On NUL Pulse Off Latch On NUL Latch Off NUL Trip Close Count 2 1 Cancel Currently Running Operation Name for State when value is 0 Name for State when value is 1 Default Class Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none Change Command Description 46 Output Contact 17 Open Closed None None 47 Output Contact 18 Open Clo
321. ry Fixed list shown in table below Complete list is T PRO Offliner Input Point List x Configurable Other explain shown in the table below points excluded from the default configuration are marked with Notes Appendix F 12 T PRO 4000 User Manual 1 Binary Inputs are scanned with 1 ms resolution 2 Binary Input data points are user selectable the data points avail able in the device for any given Binary Input point selection can be obtained through the T PRO Offliner software see SCADA Setting Summary D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Point Default Class Name for Name for index Name Assigned to Events State when State when Description 1 2 3 or none value is 0 value is 1 0 External Input 1 1 Inactive Active 1 External Input 2 1 Inactive Active 2 External Input 3 1 Inactive Active 3 External Input 4 1 Inactive Active 4 External Input 5 1 Inactive Active 5 External Input 6 1 Inactive Active 6 External Input 7 1 Inactive Active 7 External Input 8 1 Inactive Active 8 External Input 9 1 Inactive Active 9 Virtual Input 1 1 Inactive Active 10 Virtual Input 2 1 Inactive Active 11 Virtual Input 3 1 Inactive Active 12 Virtual Input 4 1 Inactive Active 13 Virtual Input 5 1 Inactive Active 14 Virtual Input 6 1 Inactive Active 15 Virtual Input 7 1 Inactive Active
322. ry phase to neu NG ceay 2 tral voltage JB Primary Ibase kVA 1003 5514 3 JB kV 3 230 Secondary Ibase PrimaryIbase 2514 0944 4 CTratio 250 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 7 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide eoinos jueunz pue eDeyoA pajeinbad eo Kjuo dn otg AT 40 Buse adojs Joj pasinbai sjualung eseu OOOOO 8c 9ce Lee Sce Uy pue e syndur S39V110 EEN Indul IenneN SI Sindu AT 28vzl sindul AH 28V MAIA evade Ialariais 0007 Odd L uue vIG dur dwa wey wey NZ8 AUip dup UUIV NGG TIO dWL NIS ulpg duy dup WIYZ9 NTS dav Jeaec dol gSAV HL 09 N69 29 t T 6b duITS 8 T nG AG NG aaa OU REL SOO SOP M INO INO INO INO LNO 6 LNO 81no Zino YINO SINO vy LNO 1no TINO oa dwa duieL los NO duie BPM nog do quy seo NOS SEZ vez ttc Zez LEZ oez 0S T8 Tbh S M 3 o 1 D02705R01 21 Figure 7 4 Suggested Test Connections for Acceptance Tests T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 8 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Note 1 Where each test specifies Metering Logic tab you view the following Relay Control Panel metering screens KZ Relay Control Panel Metering File Help 67 Trip Low 67 Alarm Low 24INY Trip Low 29INY Alarm Low 24DEF Trip 1 Low 59N Trip Low 59N Alarm Low 60 Alarm Low THD Alarm Low _ Self Check Fait Low Ambient Alarm BEETA Top Oil Alarm Low 49 1 Operates Lo
323. s Zura Beta 2 lt 670perateZAngle Tra Beta 2 672 16 where ZMTA is the maximum torque angle i e the positive sequence impedance angle in the center of the operating range Beta is the Beta angle setting 67 Operate Z Angle 1s any angle in the operating range Figure 4 16A Alpha and Beta Setting example phasors represented in the Power domain on page 4 34 and Figure 4 16B Same settings as Figure 4 16A but phasors represented in the Impedance domain on page 4 34 but phasors represented in the Impedance domain represent the exact same Alpha and Beta settings but shows how those settings may be interpreted depending on whether you are considering the application from a Directional Power or Directional Impedance perspective In our example refer to Figure 4 17 on page 4 37 and assume the PT is on LV side and we want the 67 to detect and trip for current flowing from the LV side towards the HV side for a HV Side fault Assume that from our fault study we found that we require a Zposang MTA of 45 1 e current lag voltage by 45 Also assume that in our study we found that a total operating range of 130 satisfies our requirements for all of the faults we need to detect We use Equation 67Z to determine what our Alpha and Beta settings should be for our example Zyyr4 Beta 2 lt 670perateZAngle Z yr4 Beta 2 17 45 130 2 lt 670perateZAngle lt 45 130 2 20 670perate
324. s No 1 6 8 DNP Command Assign Class Not supported D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 9 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 7 Outstation Unsolicited Current Value If configurable Response Support list methods 1 7 1 Supports Unsolicited I Not Supported NA Reporting Configurable selectable from On and Off Appendix F 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 1 8 Outstation Performance Current Value If configurable time ms list methods 1 8 1 Maximum Time Base NA not synchro Drift milliseconds per nized by DNP minute 1 8 2 When does outstation I Never NA set IIN1 4 Asserted at startup until first Time Synchroniza tion request received Periodically range to seconds Periodically selectable from seconds Range to seconds after last time sync Selectable from 7 seconds after last time sync When time error may have drifted by range to ms When time error may have drifted by selectable from 1 8 3 Maximum Internal Time NA Reference Error when set via DNP ms 1 8 4 Maximum Delay NA Measurement error ms 1 8 5 Maximum Response 100 ms for the T PRO Offliner case all sup ported points mapped to the DNP point lists 1 8 6 Maximum time from start up to IIN 1 4 assertion ms NA 1 8 7 Maximum Event Time tag error for local Binary and Double bit I O ms 0 1736 ms for 6
325. s interrupt IEC 60255 11 IEC 61000 4 11 Physical Weight 3U chassis 10 4 Kg 23 Ibs 4U chassis 12 1 kg 26 6 Ibs Dimensions 3U chassis 13 2 cm height x 48 26 cm 5 2 height x 19 width rack mount x 12 9 width rack mount x 32 8 cm depth 4U chassis 17 7 cm x 48 3 cm x 32 8 cm depth 6 93 x 19 x 12 9 Time Synchronization and Accuracy External Time Source Synchronized using IRIG B input modu lated or unmodulated auto detect Upon the loss of an external time source the relay maintains time with a maximum 160 seconds drift per year at a constant temperature of 25C The relay can detect loss of re establishment of exter nal time source and automatically switch between internal and external time Synchronization Accuracy Sampling clocks synchronized with the time source internal or external Overall T PRO Accuracies D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 3 Appendix A IED Specifications T PRO Model 4000 Specifications Current 2 5 of inputs from 0 1 to 1 0 x nominal current In 21 096 of inputs from 1 0 to 40 0 x nominal current In Voltage 21 096 of inputs from 0 01 to 2 0 x nominal voltage Vn Differential Element 5 0 of set value lOmin from 0 10 to 1 0 per unit pu Directional Phase Angle 2 5 or gt 2 0 of set value from 0 01 to 360 0 Frequency Elements 10 001 Hz fixed level 10 05 Hz df dt
326. s section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PFRCA of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PFRC4 ST Str general 81 4 ROC Trip D81PFRC4 ST Str dirGeneral 81 4 ROC Direction set to unknown D81PFRC1 ST Op general 81 4 ROC Trip D81PTOF1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTOF lof the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTOF1 ST Str general 81 1 O F Trip D81PTOF1 ST Str dirGeneral 81 1 O F Direction set to unknown D81PTOF1 ST Op general 81 1 O F Trip D81PTOF2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTOF2of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTOF2 ST Str general 81 2 O F Trip D81PTOF2 ST Str dirGeneral 81 2 O F Direction set to unknown D81PTOF2 ST Op general 81 2 O F Trip D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual D81PTOF3 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTOF3of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D81PTOF3 ST Str general 81 3 O F Trip D81PTOF3 ST Str dirGeneral 81 3 O F Direction set to unknown D81PTOF3 ST Op general 81 3 O F Trip D81PTOF4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D81PTOFAof the logical
327. s that occur during a transient fault recording are also embedded in the transient record and can be viewed in Relay Control Panel RecordBase View and RecordGraph Although the event log is circular you may ensure events are not lost by check ing the Event Auto Save box in the Record Length setting screen of T PRO Of fliner When this option is selected as the event log approaches 250 events it will save the records to an event file tpe The event log will then ready to capture up to 250 new events T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 49 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 7 Fault Log 4 50 The T PRO stores a log of faults ina 100 entry circular log Each entry contains the time of the fault fault type faulted phase fault quantities as per the below table Fault log will be triggered only for trip condition and it won t log for an alarm condition Table 4 36 Fault Log Fault Type Fault Quantities 87 Phase Differential lo A B C Magnitudes Ir A B C Magnitudes 87N HV LV TV Neutral Differential 310 lo Magnitude 310 Ir Magnitude 24 Over excitation Voltage Positive Sequence Phasor V1 Frequency 59 Over voltage 27 Under voltage VANB NC Phasors 50 HV LV TV Phase Overcurrent 51 HV LV TV Phase Overcurrent INIB IC Phasors 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent VANB NC Phasors INIB IC Phasors 50N HV LV TV Neutral Overcurrent 51N HV LV TV Neut
328. sed None None 48 Output Contact 19 Open Closed None None 49 Output Contact 20 Open Closed None None 50 Output Contact 21 Open Closed None None Appendix F 22 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 2 3 1 2 3 Analog Input Points Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested Capabilities Variation 1 32 bit with flag Variation 2 16 bit with flag Variation 3 32 bit without flag Variation 4 16 bit without flag Variation 5 single precision floating point with flag Variation 6 double precision floating point with flag Based on point Index add column to table below Current Value If configurable list methods 2 3 2 Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested Variation 1 32 bit without time Variation 2 16 bit without time Variation 3 32 bit with time Variation 4 16 bit with time Variation 5 single precision floating point w o time Variation 6 double precision floating point w o time Variation 7 single precision floating point with time Variation 8 double precision floating point with time Based on point Index add column to table below 2 3 3 Event reporting mode Only most recent All events 2 3 4 Analog Inputs Included in Class 0 response Always Never Only if point is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3
329. sical mounting 8 1 power supply 2 1 ProLogic 6 28 6 29 push buttons 3 6 R rear panel drawings H 1 record length 6 26 RecordBase View 6 33 Relay functional 3 1 S SCADA accessing 2 18 communication parameters 2 19 diagnostics 2 19 protocol selection 2 19 sending a new setting file 6 8 setting summary 6 32 settings and ranges B 1 single phase slope test 7 56 specifications A 1 A 4 System requirements 3 xi hardware 3 xi operating system 3 xi T temperature ambient 6 21 scaling 6 21 top oil 6 21 test 24 overexcitation 7 10 27 undervoltage 7 13 Index 49 thermal overload 7 24 49 TOEWS 7 25 50 51 overcurrent 7 22 50N 51N neutral overcurrent 7 16 51ADP adaptive pickup 7 22 59N zero sequence overvoltage 7 11 60 loss of potential 7 9 67 directional time overcurrent 7 17 81 over under frequency 7 14 87 2nd harmonic restraint 7 38 87 differential 7 33 87 high current setting 7 39 87N neutral differential test 7 41 ambient temperature 7 23 THD alarm 7 40 top oil temperature 7 23 Test mode 3 1 tool bar 6 3 top oil N 1 W windings CT connections 6 18 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21
330. sing 1 0 A as a base in the formulas of CPC The result gives a ratio that is valid for any magnitude of current applied The HV Side in the our test settings has HV net shift of 0 HVNet Shift HV Winding Shift 0 HV CT Shift 0 0 0 0 The 0 connection is compensated by 360 1 e CPC12 of Loss of Life of Sol id Insulation in Appendix M Not that there is a formula for each phase A B and C If you inject 1 0 A on Phase A only on the HV side the following equations of CPC12 show how much current the T PRO will see on all 3 phases _ 2la Ib Ic_ 2 1 0 0 2 13 E 3 i 3 244 _ 2Ib Ie Ia_ 2 0 0 1 1 14 er MEC E 2lc la Ib 2 0 1 0 1 15 chm a CER MEME IA The current per unit values can be confirmed in Relay Control Panel Meter ing Analog or Front HMI Metering Analog Analog Inputs 2 Note that the strongest phase in this case is IA so as you ramp up the current above the IO min setting expect that IA will operate first We can disregard the weaker phases in the context of the IO test From the 3 phase test section note that IO nin 0 30 A Since the relay sees only 2 3 of the injected current on the strongest phase the single phase correction factor in this case is 1 2 3 1 5 That is for the T PRO to see 0 30 A on the single operating phase A inject 0 30 A x 1 5 0 45 A HV 87 lOmin Single Phase Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering gt
331. sitive 40535 A 1 I4 zero 40536 A 1 14 negative 40537 A 1 I5 positive 40538 A 1 I5 zero 40539 A 1 I5 negative 40540 A 1 HV 310 Magnitude 40541 A 1 HV 310 Angle 40542 degrees 10 LV 310 Magnitude 40543 A 1 LV 310 Angle 40544 degrees 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol TV 310 Magnitude 40545 A 1 TV 310 Angle 40546 degrees 10 HV REF IO 40547 A 1 LV REF IO 40548 A 1 TV REF IO 40549 A 1 HV REF IR 40550 A 1 LV REF IR 40551 A 1 TV REF IR 40552 A 1 HV IA 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40553 96 100 HV IB 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40554 96 100 HV IC 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40555 96 100 LV IA 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40556 96 100 LV IB 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40557 96 100 LV IC 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40558 96 100 TV IA 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40559 96 100 TV IB 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40560 96 100 TV IC 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40561 96 100 I1a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40562 100 I1b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40563 100 I1c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40564 100 2a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40565 100 I2b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40566 100 I2c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40567 100 13a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40568 100 I3b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40569 100 I3c 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40570 100 14a 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40571 100 14b 2nd Harmonic Magnitude 40572 100 14c 2nd Har
332. sponse 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 40 0 Analog Output Status Any Varia 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response tion D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 31 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Appendix F 32 T PRO 4000 User Manual DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response Outstation parses Outstation can issue Group Var Yl Function Codes de Function Codes e Num Num Description dec Qualifier Codes hex dec Qualifier Codes hex 40 2 Analeg Gutput Status 16 bit with 129 response 00 01 41stan step flag 41 2 Analeg Output 16 bit 3 select 17 28 index 29 response Eche ofrequest 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 THme and Date Absolute time 2 write 07 limited qty 7 1 29 response 51 1 Time and Bate CTO Absolute time 129 response 07 limited qty synchronized 430 unsel resp qty 1 51 2 Time and Date CTO Absolute time 29 response 07 limited qty unsynchronized 430 unsol resp qty 1 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 29 response 07 limited qty aty 1 52 2 THme delay Fine 129 response 97 X limited qtyj tah 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 data 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 data 1 r
333. sponses Fixed at 20 000 Configurable range 1025 to 32737 Configurable selectable ffrom Configurable other describe Use source port number 1 3 15 Multiple master I Supports multiple masters Outstations only Method 1 based T PRO Offliner connections If supported the following methods may be on IP address Outstations Only used I Method 1 based on IP address required i Method 2 based on IP port number recommended Method 3 browsing for static data optional 1 3 16 Time synchronization support DNP3 LAN procedure function code 24 DNP3 Write Time not recommended over LAN Other explain Not Supported Appendix F 6 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile If configurable 1 4 Link Layer Current Value list methods 1 4 4 Data Link Address Fixed at 1 T PRO Offliner i Configurable range 1 to 65519 Configurable selectable ffrom Configurable other describe 1 4 2 DNP3 Source Address I Never Validation Always one address allowed shown in 1 4 3 Always any one of multiple addresses allowed each selectable as shown in 1 4 3 Sometimes explain 1 4 8 DNP3 Source Configurable to any 16 bit DNP Data Link NA Address es expected Address value when Validation is Configurable range to Enabled Configurable selectable from Configurable other descri
334. sses records on the fly achieving a typical lossless com pression rate of 4 1 As a result the T PRO can store up to 150 seconds of fault recordings in non volatile storage If the storage is full new records automati cally overwrite the oldest ensuring that the recording function is always avail able A list of stored records is available through the Relay Control Panel in the Re cords tab From Relay Control Panel you can retrieve the record and delete or leave on the relay graph the record export the record to COMTRADE Records are named by combining the Unit ID setting with the date and time of the initiating record trigger When transferred to your computer the record name remains unchanged and the file extension indicates the record type tpr for transient recording tpt for a trend recording tpe for an event recording T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 4 Fault Recorder D02705R01 21 Fault recording captures the input signal waveforms and other derived quanti ties when a fault or an abnormal situation occurs The relay determines this by allowing the user to select which functions in the Output Matrix should initiate a fault recording The quantities recorded are 18 analog channels 3 voltages and 15 currents in secondary volts and am peres respectively 96 samples cycle up to the 25th harmonic 9 summation channels 3 phase HV LV and TV curr
335. stanta neous to 99 99 seconds Gate Switch Setting _ 27 Va on 27 Vb lt j aos AND Figure 4 10 27 Undervoltage Table 4 14 27 Undervoltage Setting Functions Pickup volts Minimum level that operates device 27 Pickup Delay seconds Operating time of the 27 Gate Switch Allows either single phase or three phase operation Table 4 15 27 Undervoltage Setting Ranges 27 1 27 2 Enable Disable Gate Switch AND or OR Pickup volts 1 0 to 120 0 Pickup Delay seconds 0 00 to 99 99 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 23 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 59 Overvoltage 4 24 Two sets of Overvoltage 59 elements are provided When the voltage applied to the analog voltage inputs is above the 59 pickup level the 59 will operate after its timer has expired The 59 1 and 59 2 functions are identical in terms of operating options Use the Gate Switch setting to select the logical AND gate for 3 Phase Overvoltage function or select the logical OR gate for Single Phase Overvoltage When the gate switch is set to OR then if any of A OR B OR C phase voltage rises above the pickup setting the element will operate after the time delay When the gate switch is set to AND then if A AND B AND C phase voltage rises above the pickup setting the element will operate after the time delay The Pickup Delay timer is definite with a range of 0 00 second
336. stem setup ports time settings 7 Force hardware reset 8 Network utilities 9 Monitor SCRDR 10 Modify IEC61850 IED name 11 Exit port 150 access only Please enter a command 1 11 KJ Connected 0 00 43 YT100 TCPJIP NUM Figure 2 13 Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu Commands 1 4 5 6 7 and 10 are Port 150 access only Commands Table 2 2 Maintenance Menu Commands Modify IP address Modifies the LAN IP addresses network mask default gateway and IEC61850 network port assignment View system diagnostic Displays the internal status log Retrieve system diagnos Automatically packages up the internal status log plus setting tics and setup information and downloads it in compressed form to the computer This file can then be sent to our customer support to help diagnose a problem Restore settings com Use these commands to force the system back to default val mands 4 5 and 6 ues if a problem is suspected due to the unit s settings calibra tion and or setup parameters Force hardware reset Manually initiates a hardware reset Note that the communication link is immediately lost and cannot be reestab lished until the unit completes its start up D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 15 2 Setup and Communications Table 2 2 Maintenance Menu Commands Network utilities Enters network utilities sub menu for details see Table 2 3 Net work Ut
337. t NB The Refresh Event List function can be used to check for new events that have occurred since the last Refresh Event List Read Event Message Appendix E 14 Function Code 3 addresses 40774 40832 Contains the current message Two ASCII characters are packed into each 16 bit register All unused registers in the set are set to 0 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Device This document shows the device capabilities and the current value of each pa Pro perties rameter for the default unit configuration as defined in the default configura tion file a Ee safe Nm If configurable 1 1 Device Identification Capabilities Current Value s list methods 1 1 1 Device Function O Master O Master 9 Outstation 9 Outstation Number 1 1 2 Vendor Name ERLPhase Power Technolo gies 1 1 3 Device Name T PRO 4000 1 1 4 Device manufacturer s NA hardware version string 1 15 Device manufacturer s NA Software version string 1 1 6 Device Profile V1 1 Dec 12 Document Version 2014 1 1 7 DNP Levels Supported Masters Only for Requests Responses None Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Outstations Only Requests and Responses None Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Self Address Reservation Object 0 attribute objects Data Sets File Transfer Virtual Terminal Mapping to IEC 61850 Object Models defined in a DNP3 XML file 118 Supported Function Blocks
338. t 14 Open Closed None None 14 Virtual Input 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 15 Virtual Input 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 16 Virtual Input 3 Y Y Y Y M Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 17 Virtual Input 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 18 Virtual Input 5 Y Y Y h NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile Default Class Supported Control Operations Assigned to Events 1 2 3 or none c S 8 o 2 o o x 5 2 E Name for Name for Name o State when State when Change Command Description a nG 2 value is 0 value is 1 g ligo g t SEIE 2 3 5 gig 815 Due m equ E 9 jojo 6 6 6 6 2 t s E 8 2 8 8 5 8 5 2 Es ala ais 3 o 19 Virtual Input 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 20 Virtual Input 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 21 Virtual Input 8 Y Y Y Y NG Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 22 Virtual Input 9 Y Y Y Y MY Y Inactive Active None None Pulse duration fixed atis 23 Virtual Input
339. t 150 Figure 2 4 Direct USB Link The T PRO front USB Port 150 is also known as the Service Port To create a USB link between the T PRO and the computer connect the computer USB port to the Port 150 on the T PRO front panel using a standard USB peripheral cable The USB driver is available on the CD ROM as well as in the Support Soft ware downloads section on the ERLPhase website http erlphase com support php ID software See below under USB Driver a detail explanation on how to install the USB Driver Ensure the relay port and computer port have the same baud rate and communication parameters The relays USB port appears as a serial port to the computer and is fixed at 8 data bits no parity stop bit The T PRO Port 150 default baud rate is 115 200 When you connect to the T PRO Service Port Relay Control Panel will prompt for a Service Access Password Enter the default password service in lower case USB Driver Installation To create an USB link between the relay and the computer first the USB driver for the ERLPhase 4000 series device needs to be installed as follows Unzip the file can be obtained from ERL website ERLPhase USB driver zip In this case we assume you unzipped to the desktop In Windows XP or Windows 7 Power on the T PRO and wait until the Relay Functional LED lights up connect a USB port of the PC to Port 150 USB front ofthe T PRO 4000 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup a
340. t is Enabled then a high ratio of 5th harmonic current to fundamental current will block the 87 trip The 5th harmonic blocking will only occur if the calculated operate and restraint currents are in the normal trip area If the operate current exceeds the High Current Setting then the 5th harmonic will not be examined and the trip will not be blocked T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 3 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 4 Typical setting for 5th harmonic restraint is 0 05 to 1 00 PU Table 4 1 87 Transformer Differential Setting Functions lOmin Per unit minimum current that operates the device 87 IRs Per unit point on the restraint axis of the differential characteristic where Slope 1 and Slope 2 intersect S1 Slope of first part of characteristic meeting IOmin and Slope 2 S2 Slope of second part of characteristic which meets the end of Slope 1 and the High Current Unrestrained Setting I2 Ratio of 2nd harmonic current to fundamental to provide energizing har monic restraint 15 Ratio of 5th harmonic current to fundamental to provide transformer overex citation harmonic restraint High Current Per unit level of the unrestrained high set differential operates if a heavy Setting fault occurs in the transformer irrespective of harmonic content Table 4 2 87 Transformer Differential Setting Ranges 87 Transformer Differential Enable disable lOmin p
341. t is present the T PRO will trip correctly Figure 4 4 illustrates trans former internal and external faults and the current angle comparisons T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 9 4 Protection Functions and Specifications External Fault luv Y Delta Angle 590 luv hv Phase angles between currents is greater than 90 degrees Delta Phase blocks differential trip Internal Fault Inv dw Y p Y Delta Angle 90 Inv Phase angles between currents is less than 90 degrees Delta Phase allowsdifferential trip Figure 4 4 Delta Phase Dot Product supervision for External and Internal Fault Condi tions 4 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Rate of Change of Differential Supervision ROCOD If the positive rate of change of IO IOperate exceeds the positive rate of change of IR IRestrain within the first cycle of a fault ROCOD supervision will allow the 87 to trip 1f the fault goes into the trip area of the Slope charac teristic Figure 4 5 Rate Of Change Of Operating And Restraint Quantities shows how the dio dt and the dIr dt quantities vary during an internal and during an exter nal fault Normally for an internal fault the dIo dt quantity will be greater than the dIr dt quantity On the other hand if an external fault occurs dlo dt will be less than dlr dt Internal Fault External Fault dlo dt dlo dt lo T dir dt dir dt Ir Ir
342. t relay You can choose to ignore the serial number enforcement in the iden tification screen The relay only checks for proper relay type and set ting version if the ignore serial number has been chosen T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Analog Inputs 6 Offliner Settings Software Analog Input Names Temperature D C 1 DC1 Temperature D C 2 DC2 Figure 6 5 Analog Inputs vA Voltage A IA 4 18 IA 2 182 VB Voltage B 181 i81 IB 2 IB2 vc Voltage C Ic 1 IC Ic 2 C2 IA 3 I3 IA 4 lag IAS Nag iB 3 i83 IB 4 154 ip 5 B5 Ic 3 i3 Ic 4 fica ics fics Note The following additional settings are for relays with temperature inputs Identify all AC voltage and current inputs to the relay These names appear in any fault disturbance records the relay produces Voltage Inputs Table 6 4 Analog Input Names VA VB VC Current Inputs IA1 IB1 IC1 IA2 IB2 IC2 IA3 IB3 IC3 IA4 IB4 IC4 IAS IB5 IC5 Temp Inputs Temp 1 Temp 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 Offliner Settings Software External Inputs External Input Names 1 El Spare 1 2 El Spare 2 3 El Spare 3 4 El Spare 4 5 El Spare 5 EE g ElSpare7 0 EE is Figure 6 6 External Inputs Define meaningful names for the external digital inputs Table 6 5 External Input N
343. t voltage magnitude D67NMMXU22 MX PhV phsB cVal ang f 67N phase B fault voltage angle D67NMMXU22 MX PhV phsC cVal mag f 67N phase C fault voltage magnitude D67NMMXU22 MX PhV phsC cVal ang f 67N phase C fault voltage angle D67NMMXU22 MX A phsA cVal mag f 67N phase A fault current magnitude D67NMMXU22 MX A phsA cVal ang f 67N phase A fault current angle D67NMMXU22 MX A phsB cVal mag f 67N phase B fault current magnitude D67NMMXU22 MX A phsB cVal ang f 67N phase B fault current angle D67NMMXU22 MX A phsC cVal mag f 67N phase C fault current magnitude D67NMMXU22 MX A phsC cVal mag f 67N phase C fault current angle D24DEFMSQI1 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMSQI1 of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D24DEFMSQI1 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f 24DEF 1 fault positive sequence voltage magnitude D24DEFMSQI1 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f 24DEF 1 fault positive sequence voltage angle T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 D24DEFMSQD Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24DEFMSQD of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D24DEFMSQI2 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f 24DEF 2 fault positive sequence voltage magnitude D24DEFMSQI2 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f D24InvMSQI3 24DEF 2 fault positive seq
344. te as high as possible most modems handle 57 600 bps The Modem Initialize String setting allows the user to set the control codes sent to the modem at the start of each connection session The external modem factory defaults initial ization string is M0S0 0 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 2 Setup and Communications Figure 2 10 Port 123 Settings for External Modem Link in Relay Control Panel D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 2 11 2 Setup and Communications Internal Modem em Relay Control Panel Utilities Le Jer ss File Help Access the T PRO user interface through a telephone link between the relay and the computer using an optional internal modem If the modem has been in stalled Port 118 on the rear panel is labelled nternal Modem and the modem hardware is configured inside the relay Connect the relay s Port 118 to an analog telephone line or switch using a stan dard RJ 11 connector Computer Modem to EE TPO Internal Modem a Port 118 RJ 11 Figure 2 11 Internal Modem Link The appropriate Port 118 settings are configured at the factory when the inter nal modem is installed The factory default initialization string for and Internal modem is M0S0 0 Communication Port 150 front Port 123 rear C Direct Serial Baud Rate 9600 M External Modem Internal Modem Main Menu Relay Control Panel v0 9 P0224 Current Relay TPRO T PRO4000 C
345. ternal Input 19 Inactive Active 155 External Input 20 Inactive Active 156 87 Trip A Inactive Active 157 87 Trip B Inactive Active 158 87 Trip C Inactive Active 159 27 1 Trip A Inactive Active 160 27 1 Trip B Inactive Active 161 27 1 Trip C Inactive Active 162 27 2 Trip A Inactive Active 163 27 2 Trip B Inactive Active 164 27 2 Trip C Inactive Active 165 59 1 Trip A Inactive Active 166 59 1 Trip B Inactive Active 167 59 1 Trip C Inactive Active 168 59 2 Trip A Inactive Active 169 59 2 Trip B Inactive Active 170 59 2 Trip C Inactive Active 171 ProLogic 11 Inactive Active D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix F 17 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 172 ProLogic 12 Inactive Active 173 ProLogic 13 Inactive Active 174 ProLogic 14 Inactive Active 175 ProLogic 15 Inactive Active 176 ProLogic 16 Inactive Active 177 ProLogic 17 Inactive Active 178 ProLogic 18 Inactive Active 179 ProLogic 19 Inactive Active 180 ProLogic 20 Inactive Active 181 ProLogic 21 Inactive Active 182 ProLogic 22 Inactive Active 183 ProLogic 23 Inactive Active 184 ProLogic 24 Inactive Active 185 67N Trip Inactive Active 186 67N Alarm Inactive Active 187 67 Direction Inactive Active 188 67N Direction Inactive Active 189 81 1 O F Trip Inactive Active 190 81 1 U F Trip Inactive Active 191 81 1 ROC Trip Inactive Active 192 81 2 O
346. th Hag 129 response 32 28 ndex 430 unsel resp 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation 2 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit without flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit without flag 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 32 0 Analog Input Event Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 32 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 430 unsel resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 16 bit without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 430 unsel resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 32 bit with time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 07 08 limited qty 32 4 Analog Input Event 16 bit with time 1 read 06 no range or all 129 re
347. the CTs associated with the particular OC or OL function are connected Wye then the relay shall use the Wye Currents i e cur rents without zero sequence elimination phase shift being applied In our example connection of Figure 4 3 on page 4 5 the OC and OL functions applied on the HV side use Wye Currents i e not Delta Compensated since both CTs on the HV winding are using Wye CTs However in the same example any the OC and OL functions used on the LV side must use Delta Compensated Currents because at least one of the CTs used on the LV side is connected in a Delta con figuration Delta Phase Dot Product Differential Supervision Patent Pending The slope characteristic of the transformer differential operates on Kirchoff s current principle This principle states that for any current entering a node or in our case transformer zone there must be equal current leaving the zone if no faults are present within the zone The protected zone is defined as the area between all ofthe CTs that are used to measure each and every current entering or leaving the transformer zone In the ideal situation the differential slope characteristic could be set to secure ly produce a differential trip only for internal faults However in practice CT current measurement errors caused by CT saturation DC offsets or sympathet ic inrush of parallel transformer banks can disrupt this current measurement balance and could cause the relay to
348. tings THD Alarm Pickup 1096 As shown in Figure 7 29 on page 7 40 map the THD Alarm to Out 8 in the Output Matrix Input 1 Enabled B Input 2 Enabled Input 3 Enabled Input 4 Enabled YT 1 A o o pay o o ou m Out 8 Input 5 Enabled Figure 7 29 Logic Total Harmonic Distortion Alarm THD TY For testing THD use the fundamental with one harmonic from 2nd to 25 In this case the T PRO uses the following formula for calculating Total Harmonic Distortion 19 25 yr 2 AIharmonic Iharmonic THD p ot 100 hermonic 1o gunn SUIS i Ifundamental i Ifundamental i Ifundamenta THD Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following element for pickup THD Alarm 3 Apply parallel currents to terminals 300 301 as follows Source 1 Fundamental 60 Hz 2 0 A 20 Terminals 300 301 Source 2 2nd Harmonic 120 Hz 0 0 A Z0 also Terminals 300 301 4 Slowly ramp Source 2 up to 0 21 A Monitor the THD Metering above 10 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 87N Neutral Differential Test D02705R01 21 After 30 seconds THD Alarm High Contact 8 Closed End of THD test 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide Testing the 87N uses the same process as testing the 87 with the following ex ception ISA is used for the neutral associated with HV wye
349. tion Data Name Description D49PTTR25STSOpSgeneral 49 2 Operates D49PTTR3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DA9PTTR3of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR3 ST Op general 49 3 Operates D49PTTR4 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR4of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR4 ST Op general 49 4 Operates D49PTTR5 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DA9PTTRS of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR55STSOpSgeneral 49 5 Operates T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D49PTTR6 This section defines logical node data for the logical node DA9PTTR6of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR65STSOpSgeneral 49 6 Operates D49PTTR7 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR7of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR7 ST Op general 49 7 Operates D49PTTR8 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR8of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR8 ST Op general 49 8 Operates D49PTTR9 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D49PTTR9of the logical device Protection Data Name Description D49PTTR9
350. tion enabled an alarm is generated The event is logged and the overcurrent pickup reverts to the regular 51HV setting T PRO provides 50N 51N neutral overcurrent protection for up to 3 neutral connected transformer windings The functions use one of the following 3 In puts of Input 5 as follows INgy to ISA When 50N 51N functions are used I5 cannot be used for the phase differential 87 function If only one 50N 51N is required the remaining I5 inputs may be used for fault recording from any CT source Neutral Overcurrent is similar to 50 51 except that the input currents are taken from the transformer neutral CTs and are set in the unit of secondary amps rath er than per unit To enable 50N 51N Current Input 5 must be set to 87N 51N or 87N Auto in Winding CT Connections settings If Input 5 is set to 87N Auto only 50N 51N HV is available Table 4 23 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent Setting Functions 50N Pickup Minimum level that operates device 50N 50N Pickup Delay Operating time for the 50N 51N Pickup Minimum level that operates device 51N Curve Type Sets the type of curve TMS Factor for altering inverse time curve A B p Parameters for defining the curve TR Factor for altering the reset time T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Table 4 24 50N 51N Neutral Overcurrent Setting Functions 50N HV LV TV Enable
351. tion defines logical node data for the logical node EIGGIO lof the log ical device System Data Name Description EIGGIO1 ST Ind1 stVal External Input 1 EIGGIO1 ST Ind2 stVal External Input 2 EIGGIO1 ST Ind3 stVal External Input 3 EIGGIO1 ST ind4 stVal External Input 4 EIGGIO1 ST Ind5 stVal External Input 5 EIGGIO1 ST Ind6 stVal External Input 6 EIGGIO1 ST Ind7 stVal External Input 7 EIGGIO1 ST ind8 stVal External Input 8 EIGGIO1 ST Ind9 stVal External Input 9 EIGGIO1 ST Ind10 stVal External Input 10 EIGGIO1 ST Ind11 stVal External Input 11 EIGGIO1 ST Ind12 stVal External Input 12 EIGGIO1 ST Ind13 stVal External Input 13 EIGGIO1 ST Ind14 stVal External Input 14 EIGGIO1 ST Ind15 stVal External Input 15 EIGGIO1 ST Ind16 stVal External Input 16 EIGGIO1 ST Ind17 stVal External Input 17 EIGGIO1 ST Ind18 stVal External Input 18 EIGGIO1 ST Ind19 stVal External Input 19 EIGGIO1 ST Ind20 stVal External Input 20 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 OCGGIO2 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation This section defines logical node data for the logical node OCGGIO2of the logical device System Data Name Description OCGGIO2 ST Ind1 stVal Output Contact 1 OCGGIO2 STS Ind2 stVal Output Contact 2 OCGGIO2 STS Ind3 stVal
352. tive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 8 520 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 9 521 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 10 522 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 11 523 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 12 524 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 13 525 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 14 526 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 15 527 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 16 528 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 17 529 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 18 530 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 19 531 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Output Contacts 20 532 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix E 1 Appendix E Modbus RTU Communication Protocol Output Contacts 21 533 0 Contact Open inactive 1 Contact Closed active Differential 87 Trip 769 0 Off inactive 1 On active Differential 87 Restraint 770 0 Off inactive 1 On active 87 Unrestrained
353. tive 51 51N HV Trip Inactive Active 52 51N HV Alarm Inactive Active 53 50N HV Trip Inactive Active 54 51N LV Trip Inactive Active 55 51N LV Alarm Inactive Active 56 50N LV Trip Inactive Active 57 51N TV Trip Inactive Active 58 51N TV Alarm Inactive Active 59 50N TV Trip Inactive Active 60 67 Trip Inactive Active 61 67 Alarm Inactive Active 62 24INV Trip Inactive Active 63 24INV Alarm Inactive Active 64 24DEF 1 Trip Inactive Active 65 59N Trip Inactive Active 66 59N Alarm Inactive Active 67 60 Alarm Inactive Active Appendix F 14 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix F DNP3 Device Profile 68 THD Alarm Inactive Active 69 Self Check Fail Inactive Active 70 Ambient Temperature Alarm Inactive Active 71 Top Oil Temperature Alarm Inactive Active 72 49 1 Operates Inactive Active 73 49 2 Operates Inactive Active 74 49 3 Operates Inactive Active 75 49 4 Operates Inactive Active 76 49 5 Operates Inactive Active 77 49 6 Operates Inactive Active 78 49 7 Operates Inactive Active 79 49 8 Operates Inactive Active 80 49 9 Operates Inactive Active 81 49 10 Operates Inactive Active 82 49 11 Operates Inactive Active 83 49 12 Operates Inactive Active 84 87N HV Trip Inactive Active 85 87N LV Trip Inactive Active 86 87N TV Trip Inactive Active 87 TOEWS 15 Minute Alarm Inactive Active 88 TOEWS 30 Minute Alarm Ina
354. tons provide selective infor mation about the relay T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 LED Lights D02705R01 21 3 Using the IED Getting Started Table 3 3 Description of LED Lights Relay Functional When LED is illuminated indicates that the relay is functional When the Relay Functional green LED first illuminates the Relay Inoperative normally closed contact Opens and the protective functions become active IRIG B Functional When LED is illuminated indicates the presence of a valid IRIG B time signal Service Required When LED is illuminated indicates the relay needs service This LED can be the same state as the Relay Functional LED or can be of the opposite state depending on the nature of the problem The following items bring up this LED DSP failure protection difficulties within the relay Communication failure within the relay Internal relay problems Test Mode llluminates when the relay output contacts are intentionally blocked Possible reasons are Relay initialization on start up User interface processor has reset and is being tested The user cannot communicate with the relay through the ports until the front display becomes active and the TEST MODE LED goes out Normally the red Target LEDs will be off after the start up unless the relay had unviewed target messages prior to losing power Alarm llluminates when an enabled relay function picks up The red Alarm LED should be
355. tor 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges GL 4 Group Logic 4 Group Logic 4 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 5 Group Logic 5 Group Logic 5 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 6 Group Logic 6 Group Logic 6 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 27 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Appendix B 28 Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 03 GL 7 Group Logic 7
356. tor 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 15 Group Logic 15 Group Logic 15 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 Input A lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix B 30 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt GL 16 Group Logic 16 Group Logic 16 Disabled Setting Group to Activate lt none gt Pickup Delay 0 00 s 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix B 31 Appendix C Hardware Description The relay is a complete transformer protection relay package designed and manufactured with high quality features and recording components The fol lowing information describes the main hardware components of the relay Main Processor The MPB has two processor sub systems which control the operation ofthe en Board MPB tire relay the DSP processor and the control processor The DSP sub system interfaces to the RAIB the DIB and the OCB and manages the
357. tor 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 9 ProLogic 9 ProLogic 9 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 10 ProLogic 10 ProLogic 10 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 gt T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 Appendix B IED Settings and Ranges Operator 5 Input E lt Unused 03 PL 11 ProLogic 11 ProLogic 11 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 Operator 3 nput C lt Unused 0 gt Operator 4 nput D lt Unused 0 Operator 5 nput E lt Unused 0 PL 12 ProLogic 12 ProLogic 12 Disabled Pickup Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Dropout Delay 0 00 0 00 to 999 00 Operator 1 nput A lt Unused 0 gt Operator 2 nput B lt Unused 0 gt Operator 3 n
358. trip incorrectly during normal operations or external faults 4 8 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications Analysis of extensive dynamic simulations has shown that even with current distortion due to a variety of measurement error factors the phase angle of the current is maintained Therefore phase angle differences can be used to reli ably identify faults as being internal or external to the transformer zone this fact is the basis of the Delta Phase Dot Product DPDT algorithm Note that DPDT cannot produce a trip output on its own it can only give the differential slope characteristic permission to trip The current angles of the faulted and unfaulted phase current inputs for an ex ternal fault are close to 180 degrees apart However since it s recognized that there could be CT phase angle errors the boundary condition has been set con servatively to 90 degrees This boundary is fixed and has no user settings as sociated with it DPDT is performed on a per phase basis on the HV LV and TV Delta Com pensated Currents 1 e HVA LVA TVA are compared only to each other HVB LVB TVB are compared only to each other HVC LVC TVC are com pared only to each other The relay checks to see if the compared currents are more or less than 90 from each other If all compared currents are within the 90 or less of each other the relay recognizes the condition as an Internal fa
359. ts assigned to the winding The input of each 50 51 is the maximum fundamental RMS current among phases A B and C If is greater than the pickup setting an alarm is set and the relay starts to integrate towards a trip using the pickup formula When the integrated torque reaches 1 a trip signal is issued The 51 reset is a back integration process that will fully reset the 51 in a time determined by the reset formula T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 27 4 Protection Functions and Specifications 4 28 Adaptive Feature To automatically adjust the 51HV pickup level for different ambient tempera ture conditions an adaptive feature is applied to device 51HV as in 5IADP Adaptive Overcurrent on 50 51 Overcurrent on page 4 27 The 50 device is an instantaneous or definite time overcurrent and operates when the 7 max is above the pickup level for the duration of the set delay Note that the current used in the 50 51 functions may be the uncompensated Wye currents or Delta Compensated currents For more information see Note regarding delta compensated currents used in other T PRO functions on page 4 8 Table 4 21 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Setting Functions 50 Pickup Minimum level that operates device 50 50 Pickup Delay Operating time for the 50 51 Pickup Minimum level that operates device 51 Curve Type Sets the type of curve TMS Factor for altering inverse time curve A B p Pa
360. tting ig Setting Group 7 Setting lt Big Device 14 BFL TV BFI LV BFI HV Recording Target LED 87 Trip 87N HV Trip 87N LV Trip S7N TV Trip na 494 4 2 0 BE H 49 3 E mu 00 mu m BH m 49 4 Target LED 1 Target LED 2 Target LED 8 oet EUR Target LED 8 49 5 Target LED 8 49 6 49 7 49 8 49 9 49 10 49 11 49 12 EIEIEIEIEI EIEIEIEIEI BAA EJEIEIEIE BAA JEJEJEJE Target LED 8 Target LED 8 Target LED 8 Target LED 8 Target LED 8 Target LED8 TOEWS 15 Min Alarm TOEWS 30 Min Alarm TOEWS Trip Alarm LED Target LED7 24INV Trip 24INV Alarm 24DEF 1 Trip 24DEF 2 Trip 59N Trip 59N Alarm 274 Trip Target LEDS Target LED 5 Alarm LED None 27 2THp 60 Alarm THD Alarm Self Check Fail Alarm LED Alarm LED lt hi f S gt v T PRO Offliner Settings v401 Setting Group 1 Figure 6 21 Output Matrix The Output Matrix is where the user shall assign Protection Functions to Out puts contacts i
361. tual time to trip in minutes is also available 30 29 1 O minutes If the time to trip is greater than 30 minutes the display value is 4444 Excessive Loss of Life Warning This feature overcomes a difficulty of using simple over temperature as an in dication of overload If the hot spot temperature trip setting is 140 C and the temperature hovers at values just below that level then damage to the cellulose insulation occurs but no trip occurs Also if the temperature briefly exceeds the setting less than an hour and then falls back to normal levels a trip should not occur but will You can overcome these unreliability and security issues by using the Loss of Life concept The calculation is outlined in Top Oil and Hot Spot Tempera ture Calculation in Appendix N The 30 minute warning 15 minute warning and trip outputs occur if either the hot spot temperature or Loss of Life limits are exceeded The three settings are T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 D02705R01 21 4 Protection Functions and Specifications THS Trip Setting Use 175 C with Loss of Life protection enabled The Loss of Life setting will not allow temperatures near this level to last too long If Loss of Life protection were not enabled then a lower setting would be nec essary say 140 C a temperature at which oil bubbles might start to form de pending for one thing on the oil s water content THS To Start Loss of Life Cal
362. tures for handling backward compatibility with previous software versions is described Also described are methods of converting a Set tings File sending a new Settings File to the relay and creating a Settings File from an older version of the software Next the RecordBase View and RecordGraph to analyze the records from a re lay are described This is followed by a lengthy description of the main branches from the Tree View This section provides all information for Identification System Param eters SCADA Communication DNP Configuration SCADA Settings sum mary Record Length Setting Groups ProLogic Group Logic Output Matrix and Settings summary Finally a description of how the settings on the relay can be viewed through the RecordBase View analysis software 1s provided T PRO 4000 User Manual 6 1 6 Offliner Settings Software 6 2 Du Identification mic Analog Inputs External Inputs Output Contacts Virtual Inputs Setting Groups Nameplate Data Connections Winding CT PT Temperature Scalinc SCADA Communication DNP Configuration Point Map Class Data SCADA Setting Summar Record Length Ei Setting Group 1 Setting E Protection Functions 87 87N 49 TOBWS 24 59N
363. tware see SCADA Setting Summary Transmitted Value Scaling 3 po s nerd a Multipli Resolution t Name Banas o Minimum Maximum default rangei Offset Units default Description E 1 2 3 or none maximal 0 Va Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 1 Va Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 2 Vb Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 3 VbAngle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 4 Vc Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 5 Vc Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 6 Voltage V1 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 kV 0 1 0 00001 7 1 positive 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 8 P 2 0 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 MW 0 1 0 00001 9 Q 2 00 Configurable 0 1 0 00001 1 0 0 0 Mvar 0 1 0 00001 10 1a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 11 Ha Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 12 11b Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 13 11b Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 14 1c Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 15 11c Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0 01 16 2a Magnitude 2 0 Configurable 0 0 01 1000 0 0 A 1 0 0 01 17 12a Angle 2 18 000 18 000 0 1 0 01 1 0 0 0 Degrees 0 1 0
364. ubscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 21 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind22 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 22 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind23 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 23 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind24 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 24 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind25 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 25 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind26 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input26 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind27 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 27 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind28 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 28 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind29 stVal Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 29 SUBSCRGGIO1 ST Ind30 stVal T PRO 4000 User Manual Subscribed GOOSE Virtual Input 30 D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation D87NHVMMXNI This section defines logical node data for the logical node DB37NHVMMXNI of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D87NHVMMXN1 MX Amp19 mag f 87N HV fault operating current magnitude D87NHVMMXN1 MX Amp2 mag f 87N HV fault restraint current magnitude D87NLVMMXN2 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D87NLVMMXN2 of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D87NLVMMXN2 MX Amp1 mag f 87N LV fault operating current magnitude D87NLVMMXN2 MX Amp2 mag f 87N LV fault restraint current magnitude D87NTVMMXN3 This section defines logical node data for the logical node D587NTVMMXN3 of the logical device
365. uence voltage angle This section defines logical node data for the logical node D24InvMSQI3of the logical device FaultData Data Name Description D24InvMSQI3 MX SeqV c1 cVal mag f 24INV fault positive sequence voltage magnitude T PRO 4000 User Manual D24InvMSQI3 MX SeqV c1 cVal ang f 24INV fault positive sequence voltage angle Appendix Q 57 Index D02705R01 21 A ac and dc wiring 8 1 ac schematic drawing I 1 ambient temperature connections O 1 analog inputs 6 11 analog phase shift table L 1 B back view 1 4 backward compatibilty 6 7 Baud rate direct serial link 2 17 modem link 2 17 C calibration 7 1 communication modbus E 1 network link 2 13 communication with the relay 2 3 connections 7 7 converting a settings file 6 7 creating a setting file from an older version 6 8 D dc schematic drawing J 1 display 3 6 E event messages D 1 external inputs 6 12 F Front display 3 1 front display 3 6 Front view 3 1 front view 1 3 function line diagram 1 2 G graphing protection functions 6 6 grounding 2 1 H hot spot temperature N 1 HyperTerminal 2 13 I identification relay 6 9 installation 8 1 T PRO 4000 User Manual Index IRIG B time input 2 1 L LED lights 3 5 loss of life M 1 M mechanical drawings G 1 modbus E 1 modem link 2 17 modem link internal 2 13 N nameplate 7 7 O Offliner features 6 3 Offliner settings 3 1 P phy
366. ult If the difference current also enters the trip area of the slope characteristic the 87 will trip However if one or more the currents are greater than 90 from any of the other compared currents this is recognized as an External fault and the 87 will be Blocked from tripping even if the difference current enters the trip area of the slope characteristic The method used to compare current angles is the mathematical dot product This concept makes use of the angular relationship present in Kirchhoff s cur rent law In mathematical terms if Phasor A and Phasor B are considered then A B AB Cos Where theta is the angle between the two phasors Phasors A and B are normalized to a value of 1 0 and then the dot product is applied and analyzed Any 790 the dot product will be negative Block 87 trip All lt 90 the dot product will be positive allow 87 trip To ensure the current phasor has enough magnitude to be reliably used a cur rent level detector for each current input is fixed at 5 of Ipominal 1 6 0 25 A for 5 A nominal 0 05 A for 1 A nominal relay If any current is below the 596 threshold the current angle will not be calculated in DPDT In the case where only one current input is above this current threshhold such as when energiz ing an offline transformer the DPDT algorithm will not inhibit the 87 slope This means that if a transformer fault occurs upon energization or if a perma nent faul
367. utput Contact 2112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 1 BELTV e ii e i no o EIC aoad o d aaa pese E goad a EEG o EC aman mamans 00 oag oooga aoad O o pooeooesoo non Pd EC joeeo Bogo o 0080 amag o opion z non BEBOBODOECOOEBO popa O00 EECOEBCODEEECDCOBO pogs o m ooo pagpanamoggo doma o DOOBODCOEOOOBHBO gg O oa es a Jea pagana D BugaBooagbeadago amad o o masaspDuanaa o masmspanasa avag O pooo20000202 asap ponon a O o CORRRSSSORRERBERE RS mar mmoOoOogogoogooOooOOoOo0000 00 OD law ZEURE CNOWONDRONONONCR NONORO po oOo oo oo swm O O o oo o o O SUE XBBRBSERBSEHSERHU UT Eg Figure 4 24 Output Matrix D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 4 51 5 Data Communications 5 1 Introduction Section 5 deals with data communications with the T PRO relay First the SCADA protocol is discussed and it is then followed by the new IEC 61850 communication standard The SCADA protocol deals with the Modbus and DNP Distributed Network Protocol protocols The SCADA configuration and its settings are described The parameters for SCADA communications are defined using T PRO 4000 Offliner software Finally details on how to monitor SCADA communications are given for maintenance and trouble shooting of the relay 5 2 SCADA Protocol Modbus Protocol DNP Protocol D02705R01 21 The relay supports either a Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII S
368. uts Appendix Q 12 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation FaultData D24DEFMMXU1 Measurement D24DEF 1 24DEF 1 fault frequency FaultData D24DEFMMXU2 Measurement D24DEF 2 24DEF 2 fault frequency FaultData D24InvMMXU3 Measurement D24INV 24INV fault frequency FaultData D50NHVMMXUA Measurement D50N HV 50N HV fault currents FaultData D51NHVMMXUS5 Measurement D51N HV 51N HV fault currents FaultData D50NLVMMXUG Measurement D50N LV 50N LV fault currents FaultData D51NLVMMXU7 Measurement D51N LV 51N LV fault currents FaultData D50NTVMMXU8 Measurement D50N TV 50N TV fault currents FaultData D51NTVMMXU9 Measurement D51N TV 51N TV fault currents FaultData D50HVMMXU10 Measurement D50 HV 50 HV fault currents FaultData D51HVMMXU11 Measurement D51 HV 51 HV fault currents FaultData D50LVMMXU12 Measurement D50 LV 50 LV fault currents FaultData D51LVMMXU13 Measurement D51 LV 51 LV fault currents FaultData D50TVMMXU14 Measurement D50 TV 50 TV fault currents FaultData D51TVMMXU15 Measurement D51 TV 51 TV fault currents FaultData D59 1MMXU16 Measurement D59 1 59 1 fault voltages FaultData D59 2MMXU17 Measurement D59 2 59 2 fault voltages FaultData D27 1MMXU18 Measurement D27 1 27 1 fault voltages FaultData D27 2MMXU19 Measurement D27 2 27 2 fault voltages FaultData D67MMXU20 Measurement D67 67 fault voltages and currents FaultData D87MMXU21 Measu
369. vent record is created every 250 events Record Capacity Up to 150 sec transient records trend and event records D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix A 1 Appendix A IED Specifications Input amp Output T PRO Model 4000 Specifications Analog Voltage Inputs 1 set of 3 phase voltage inputs Nominal Voltage across input channel Full Scale Continuous Maximum Over scale Thermal Rating Burden Vn 7 69 Vrms 120 Vrms L L 2x Vn s 138 Vrms 240 Vrms L L 4x Vn 276 Vrms 480 Vrms L L for 3 seconds 3x Vn 207 Vrms 360 Vrms L L for 10 seconds 0 03VA Vn Analog Current Inputs 5 sets of 3 phase current inputs 15 cur rent channels Nominal Current Full Scale Continuous Maximum full scale rating Thermal rating Burden In 1 Arms or 5 Arms 3x In 3 Arms or 15 Arms 40x In for 1 second symmetrical 400 Arms for 1 second 0 25 VA 5 Arms 0 10 VA 1 Arms Optional Temperature Inputs Ambient and Top Oil 2 4 20 mA current loops External temperature sensor can be self powered or from T PRO relay Unregu lated 30 Vdc supply output 40 mA 24 Vdc Amplitude measurement accuracy 0 5 for 54 to 66 Hz 0 5 for 44 to 56 Hz Analog Sampling Rate 96 samples cycle for recording 8 samples cycle for protection Records up to 25th harmonic External Inputs digital 9 isolated inputs 3U chassis 20 isolated inputs 4U ch
370. voltage 27 Va 27 Vb 188 ie di NAI 189 o 27 2 Undervoltage 27 Va m 27 Vb 190 gt O 27 Vc Figure 7 9 Logic UnderVoltage 27 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 13 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 81 Over Under Frequency Test 7 14 27 Three Phase Undervoltage Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering 5 Logic 1 or Front HMI Metering 5 Logic Logic Protections 1 2 Monitor the following element for pickup 27 2 Alarm 3 Apply balanced 3 phase voltage to the T PRO terminals as follows Ph A 330 66 4 V Z0 Ph B 331 66 4 V 7 120 Ph C 332 66 4 V 7120 Ph N 333 4 Slowly and simultaneously ramp the 3 phase voltage magnitudes down At 50 5 to 49 5 V per phase expect 50 0 V 27 2 Alarm High 5 Turn voltages off 6 End of 27 test Settings 81 1 Over Frequency Pickup 61 Hz 81 2 Over Frequency Rate of Change 0 1 Hz second 81 3 Under Frequency Pickup 59 Hz 81 4 Under Frequency Rate of Change 0 1Hz second All Time Delays 0 2 seconds As shown in Figure 7 10 on page 7 15 map elements to outputs in the Out put Matrix Map all 81 Trip elements to Out 13 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 81 1 Frequency or Df Dt 200 ms Vpos gt 0 25 pu or 5 V 4 0 81 2 Frequency or Df Dt Vpos 0 25 pu or 5 V 0 81 3
371. w 49 2 Operates Low 49 3 Operates Low 49 4 Operates tow 49 5 Operates Low 49 B Operates tow 49 7 Operates Low 49 8 Operates Low 49 9 Operates Low 49 10 Operates Low 49 11 Operates Low 49 12 Operates Low TOEWS15Min Low TOBWS30Mim Low TOEWS Trip Low 81 1 Trip Low 81 2 Trip Low 81 3 Trip Low 81 4 Trip Low 27 1 Trip High 27 2 Trip Low Ft Alarm Low 24DEF 2 Trip Low 59 1 Trip Low 59 2 Trip Low IRIG B Signal Loss Low T T Di Analog IO IR A Harmonics A Trend D49 A External A Logic 1 Logic 2 A ProLogic A Outputs A GroupLogic A Virtual Metering o Zoom Level 100 v Freeze Close Main Menu Config Mar Metering Relay Control Panel v0 7 post 1 2 Current Relay TPRO TPRO4000 Connected Figure 7 5 Metering Logic 1 60 Loss of Settings only Enable Setting can be modified Potential Test Voltage 0 5 per unit on 1 or 2 phases does not operate on loss of 3 phas es As shown in Figure 7 6 on page 7 9 map the 60 element mapped to Out 7 in the Output Matrix 59 VA fixed 0 5 pu 59 VB fixed 0 5 pu 59 VB fixed 0 5 pu Out 7 Figure 7 6 Logic Loss of Potential 60 D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual 7 9 7 Acceptance Protection Function Test Guide 24 Overexcitation Test 7 10 60 Test Procedure 1 Access Relay Control Panel Metering Logic 1 or Front HMI Meter ing Logic Logic Protections 1 Monitor the following element f
372. wer down power up cycle will reset the LED to green and re energize the relays B DSP Self Check Fail The Self Check Fail output can be assigned and used in ProLogic statements and the Output Matrix There are two possibilities for DSP Self Check Fail either Alarm or Block Both are related to the dc offset on a channel which should not occur with prop er calibration Alarm just drives the optional output contact but Block causes the Relay Functional LED to go out and the relay to be unable to drive any out put contact as in the first and last paragraphs of section A DSP System Fail ure above C DSP Micro Processor MPC Comm Failure D MPC Self Check Fail The Service Required LED changes from off to red D02705R01 21 T PRO 4000 User Manual Appendix P 1 Appendix P Failure Modes E MPC System Fail The Test Mode LED changes from off to red until the MPC has rebooted The watchdog will continue to attempt to re start the MPC several times If the MPC reboots but can not return to normal operation the Service Required LED changes from off to red Appendix P 2 T PRO 4000 User Manual D02705R01 21 Appendix Q IEC61850 Implementation Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS Introduction This specification is the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS and presents the ACSI conformance statements as defined in Annex A of Part 7 2 of the IEC 61850 standard specifications ACSI basic conf

T-PRO 4000 User Manual v1.2 Rev 1.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents